JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING - 07-0035-PR-DJOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX
RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR- D
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
Clearwater
ISSUED FOR BID
March 18, 2011
City of Clearwater, Florida
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX
RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR- D
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IV ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX GEOTECHINCIAL REPORT BY DRIGGERS ENGINEERING
SERVICES
SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT
DISTRICT PERMIT
PRE-QUALIFICATION APPLICATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER FIRE HYDRANT SPECIFICATIONS
SCHLAGE M490G ELECTROMAGNETIC GATE LOCK
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Cover Table of Contents.doc Page 11 10/10/2008
EMERGENCY CALL LIST
TO: Engineering; Police Communications; Traffic; Fire Department; Utilities Dispatch/Gas; Public
Service/ Road & Drainage; Assistant Director Public Utilities; Public Utilities/Water; Public
Utilities/Wastewater; Construction Project Coordinator; Construction Inspector, Parks &
Recreation Department
FROM: Engineering
PROJECT: JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM
CONCESSION BUILDING 07-0035-PR-D
LOCATION: 2450 DREW STREET, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
The following Contractor has been awarded the above project by the City Commission
action dated: THURSDAY MAY 19 2011
PROJECT IS TO BEGIN: N Z ° l l
CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS:
NAME: CERTUS BUILDERS
ADDRESS: 304 S. WESTLAND AVENUE
TAMPA, FLORIDA 33606
PHONE NO.: 813-781-0271 FAX NO. 813-463-0266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY - PLEASE NOTIFY: Please List 3
NAME: DF- P" S v a 1?7 v1- TITLE: G . E . c?
PHONE NO.: ° ? 3 - 3 ?o-? - O ° 3 8
NAME: Z? " t O QTR -r'-: ri TITLE: ti? s F Nr
PHONE NO.: a "3 -'7 8 1- 072-'7 1
NAME: S t-! cL a 0 5 v `-'!E? (?-- TITLE: t r d-
PHONE NO.: 2,13 ° 3$ 0 3 (a c, e
EMERGENCY TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE PERSON
NAME: D--'o-0 5v`"'?E(Z
PHONE NO.: $ \3 31o -3 O O ? $
1
NOTE: IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT & THE CLEARWATER POLICE
DEPARTMENT WHEN WORK COMMENCES AND WHEN STREETS ARE TO BE
CLOSED TO TRAFFIC.
TO: City of Clearwater
ATTN: Public Works Construction
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748
The following personnel are authorized by me to sign submittals for
Project Name & Number: JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM
CONCESSION BUILDING 07-0035-PR-D
NAMES: ? a%j+ E. (L a.07ErL,
D SAN ? v r??.? E R._.
RO ? ?LSr-+ti1?
COMPANY NAME: CERTUS BUILDERS
BY: s7tt--t,
DATE: I 12-(0111
TITLE: 1? Z ? D E c? T
? r
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF SIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOMICONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by
prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room website address:
www.mvClearwater.com/ciWnroiects, ON WEDNESDAY MARCH 23 2011, until no later than close of
business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated
on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work consist of: site work and not limited to clearing & grubbing, tree removal, installation of silt
fencing, tree barricades, reconstructing retention pond, construct new weir structure & removal of existing
storm sewer structure, installation of fill dirt rough & fine grading, installation of storm water piping,
sanitary sewer, potable domestic water line, fire water main, fire hydrants, electrical -175 KVA,120/208
volt step down transformer , telephone, 6" thick concrete slabs; construct restroom/concession building
57'-4"x 66' masonry building approximately 2/3 is enclosed space & other covered deck area, includes
but not limited to: concrete foundations, landfill gas mitigation system, concrete, masonry, plumbing,
electrical, HVAC system, stucco, flooring system, metal barrel tile roofing system, doors & hardware,
millwork, painting, & restoration ofall disturbed sodding.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on WEDNESDAY, APRIL,
6, 2011 AT THE LONG CENTER 1501 N. BELCHER RD, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33765 -
BOARD ROOM 2ND FLOOR. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect/Engineer will
be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the
Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3'd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30
P.M. on WEDNESDAY APRIL 20 2011, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for JOE
DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-
PR-D.
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and
proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for
review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are
currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of COMMERICAL BUILDING
with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $400,000.00
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays
prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
George McKibben, Purchasing Manager
(727) 562-4634
1 Sectionl.doc Page 1 of 2 8/27/2008
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents.
SECTION 11 ................................................................................................................................... I
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3
6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3
9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
13 REJECTION OF BIDS ..................................................................................•................. 5
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5
15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5
16 ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ...........................................
PERMITS
LICENSES 5
,
,
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7
19 BID PROTEST .......................................................................................................•.......... 7
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8
Sectionl1doc i 9/27/20 ] 0
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room - website address: www.Mclearwater.com/cibmrojects. Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
Y any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
I Sectionll.doc Page 1 of 9 9/27/2010
1
Section 11-- Instructions to Bidders
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
Sectionll.doc . Page 2 of 9 9/2712010 1
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
SectionILdoc Page 3 of 9 9/27/2010
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a $.5"x11" manila envelope with the
project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall
be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and
addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at
the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or
facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
SectionlI.doc
Page 4 of 9
9/27/2010 1
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
SectionILdoc Page 5 of 9 9/27/2010
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law_
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical
Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSIVENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or.
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
SectionlI.doc Page 6 of 9 9/27/2010 1
Section 11- Instructions to Bidders
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems
necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
I Sectionll.doc Page 7 of 9 9/27/2010
1
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should
be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid.
19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
SectionIl.doc Page 8 of 9 9/27/2010
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater_ Engineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best
Management Practices.
References EPA website
iI
iI
I I
1
11
I SectionII.doc Page 9 of 9 9/27/2010
i
A
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
T able of Contents:
1 DEFINITIONS ................................••----••-•--•....---•--•.................................-----•...................1
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ......................................................... 5
...................
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT .............................................................•----•.........-----........................-...... 5
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ............................................................... ... .. 5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ...................................................................... .. 6
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT -•-•-•--•-------• ..............•--...............--•-------•----•---..... 7
3.1 INTENT ............................................•---....-----••-----..............---------•--•.............---.....---------• - 7
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................. . 7
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS ..............•--•---•---•------•------•...............••••-----•................................... 8
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ................................................................................... ..... . 8
4.2
4.3 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ................................................................ 8
---•-• ....
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ................................
..... 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ............................. ............................................. ---- ................ 9
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ......................... .... ... 9
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND .............................. . 9
5.2 INSURANCE .........................................•-................................................---------............... 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10
5. 2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ........................•---.................................................... ......... 12
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ..............•................................................ 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14
6.4
6.5 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........
USE OF PREMISES. 14
65.1 STAGINGAREAS........................................................ ............................................ 15
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 15
16
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16
6.8
6.9 PERMITS .......................................................................................................................
SAFETY AND PROTECTION ...................•-------•---................................................------ 16
17
6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 18
6.11 DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................•......................
Sectionlll.doc i 11/03/2 18
010
611.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW.. ... - ................ 18
611.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 19
611.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 21
611.4 DELIVERABLES: . .......................................................... ............... .......... ..... -- 23
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23
7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE .....................................................................•----.----.-------- 24
7.2 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 24
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 26
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 26
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 27
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 27
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 30
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 32
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................ ...... 33
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 35
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION .........................................•.................................................. 36
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ............................................................... ........ 36
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ............................. ............ .. 37
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ..................•...._......................................................................... 38
I Sectionlll.doc
ii
11/03/2010
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 38
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 39
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 40
17 MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................•................ 40
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM .................................................................................................... 40
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 40
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 41
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION ............................................................:....................................... 41
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41
19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42
22.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 42
22.2 EXAMPLE ..................................................................................................................... 42
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 43
23.3 FIXED SIGN ...................................................................................................... ..... 43
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 43
23.5 SIGN COLORING ..............•.......................................................................................... 44
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ......................................................•......................................... 44
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 44
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45
Sectionlll.doc iii 11103/2010
Section Ill -General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
city.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bands
Performanc a and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
SectionIll.doc Page 1 of 45 11/03/2010
D
Section III - General Conditions
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule--CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
SectionIII.doc
Page 2 of 45
11/032010 1
Section 111- General Conditions
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D.0.T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "famish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
i Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
SectionIII.doc Page 3 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request far Information (RM)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can, be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
SectionIII.doc Page 4 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III -General Conditions
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to famish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2
2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
.
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be famished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
S
i
IH
d
P
5
f 45
ect
on
.
oc
age
o
11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the
Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule- This is to be a sequence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period.
SectionlIl.doc Page 6 of 45 11/03/2010
F1
Section 111- General Conditions
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
i 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
I Sectionlll.doc Page 7 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
Sectionlll.doc Page 8 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
' is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
Sectionlll.doc Page 9 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000_ and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
SectionIII.doc Page 10 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000_ Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Lont?shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
SectionI]I.doc Page I 1 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, 'technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
Sectionl1l.doc Page 12 of 45 11/03/2010
1
1
Section III - General Conditions
from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage :Funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$60.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
r SectionIII.doc Page 13 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Sectionlll.doc Page 14 of 45 11/03/2010
1
' Section III - General Conditions
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
' 6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
' by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
' Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
' 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
1 Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
+ All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
r SectionJILdoc Page 15 of 45 11/03/2010
L'
Section III --- General Conditions
• Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe
pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed.
Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
SectionIll.doc Page 16 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees
will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to. (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
Sectionlll.doc Page 17 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The
Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay
claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
Sectionlll.doc Page 18 of 45 11/03/2010
' Section III - General Conditions
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
' construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
' Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a
' number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's
Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number
of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and
Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings,
Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0
times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work
completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all
' of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to
Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor.
' 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
' monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
SectionIII.doe Page 19 of 4 S 11/03/2010
Section III -- General Conditions
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
61G17-6002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, casting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sixes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, casting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
Sectionlll.doc Page 20 of 45 11/03/2010
1
' Section III - General Conditions
conduit runs, I -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
dia
ram
g
.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement
shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
' 6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G1'7 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
1
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2 Laver Namina Definitions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
5ectionI1I_doc
Page 21 of 45
11/03)1010
Section III - General Conditions
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
Sectionlll.doc Page 22 of 45 11/03/2010
' Section III -General Conditions
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
' The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
' Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myclearwater.com.
11
f'.
I
1
t
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
SectionIII.doc Page 23 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
performs, work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
Sectionlll.doc Page 24 of 45 J I/03/2010
' Section Ill - General Conditions
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
' Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
' and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
' The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
' right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
' 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The
' duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
' the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
' Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
' justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
Sectionlll.doc Page 25 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
platters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
5ectionIII.doc Page 26 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
' Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
'
s Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Owner
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
' certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
' approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
'
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
' Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
' If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
' SectionI1l.doc Page 27 of 45 11/03/7010
1
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
.parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
Section]II.doc Page 28 of 45 11/03/2010
' Section III - General Conditions
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
' negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
' A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
' Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
' SectionIIl.doc Page 29 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III -- General Conditions
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if_ (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
SectionIll.doc Page 30 of 45 11/03/2010
' Section III - General Conditions
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
' Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
' public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
SectionIII.doe Page 31 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to he inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
Sectionlll.doe Page 32 of 45 11/03/2010
I Section HT- General Conditions
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
' recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In.
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
SectionTll.doc Page 33 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described
herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
SectionIII.doc Page 34 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and fumisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires
review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment
will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment
is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the
reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in
writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper.
In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any
payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because:
(i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's
Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
r SectionIII.doc Page 35 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay
in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative
or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14,4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion, for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which
this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will
produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and
assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list.
Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the
contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract.
Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
SectionIII.doc Page 36 of 45 11/03/2010
1
i
1
1
1
Section 111- General Conditions
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be wade under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative
will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
Sectionlll.doc Page 37 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as
to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay
contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent- permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
SectionIILdoc Page 38 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
' the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
SectionIII.doc Page 39 of 45 11/03/2010
11
Section III - General Conditions
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other parry is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
SectionlII.doc Page 40 of 45 11/032010
Section III - General Conditions
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor_ All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall retrain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
' 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers
and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Tom Glenn at the
City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email:
tom.glenn@myclewwater.com.
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
SectionIIl.doc Page 41 of 45 11103/2010
Section III - General Conditions
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2. EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE:
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
Section111doc Page 42 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III - General Conditions
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
'
s use and expenditure of public
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
SectionIII-doc Page 43 of 45 11/03/2010
1
Section III -General Conditions
23.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
SectionIII.doc
Page 44 of 45
11/03/2010 1
t
Section III - General Conditions
1 ? F?
r PROJECT NAME
(CONTRACT NUMBER)
(DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
r CONTRACTOR:
COMPLETION DATE:
FUNDING: --___--
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
r ?
Cl
earwater
r _
U
r
r
I
r
r
r
r
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
r SectionIll.doc Page 45 of 45 11/03/2010
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
SectionIII.doc Page 46 of 45 11/03/1010 1
h-1
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .......... ...................................................................... . 4
2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 5
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. . 5
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ............................................................................ . 6
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ..........................................................................................
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 6
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 6
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ................................................................... . 6
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................... ............ 6
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 8
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 8
6 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................................9
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK ........................................ 10
7.1 EXCAVATION .......................• ----......................................---....................................--.. 10
7.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................... 10
8 REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 10
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................•-----............... 10
9 OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 10
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... .11
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................11
12 DEWATERING ..............................................................................................................• 12
12.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 12
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 12
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 12
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 12
13 SANITARY MANHOLES ..............................................................................................15
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE ..........................................................................................................15
13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 16
13.3 DROP MANHOLES .....................................................................................................16
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................16
Section) V.doc i 10/11/2010
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS ........................... ................................................. .......... ---.... 16
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ......................... ................................................... 16
14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 17
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ....................................................•................................... 17
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 17
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................ .......... 17
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 17
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .............................................•.................---.................... 17
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................. .................................... 18
18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 18
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 18
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......................................................................•-----•.......--.--........ 18
19 STORM SEWERS ........•• ................................................................................................ 19
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 19
19.2 TESTING ...............................................................................................................
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ---•-• ........................................................................................... 19
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 20
20.1 MATERIALS .........................................................................•-----------........................... 20
20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 20
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ..................... ..- ----- ....... ...-..................................... .--.......... 20
20.2 INSTALLATION ................................•-------------...-•------........--------------------...---..--•--........ 20
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 20
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 21
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ...............................•-•------.....-•--------........................................ 21
20.4 TESTING ...............•---•-•---•-....-----........................---...-•----------.....................................--- 21
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 21
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 22
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...........................•--........................... ............. 22
20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ......................................................................... ............. 22
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 22
21 DRAINAGE .........................................................•.....•..................................................... 22
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 22
22.1 BASE ................•---•.......................................---------•-•----•---...................................-..------ 22
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE. .................. 24
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 24
22.2 SUBGRADE .............................................••---•...........................................--.---............. 24
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 25
22.2.2 BASISOFPAYMENT ............................................................................................ 25
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 25
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ...............•------..................................................................... 25
Section]V.doc ii 10/11/2010
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................ 25
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ...................................................................... ........... 25
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................. . ......... 25
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES ......................................................... ........... 26
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS .................... ........... 26
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ......................................... ........... 27
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ................................................... ........... 27
23.6.1 CRACKS ..................................................................................................... ...........27
23.62 POTHOLES ................................................................................................ ...........28
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 28
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ................................................ ............ 29
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................ ............ 29
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .......................................................................... ....•-----.. 30
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..................................................................................... ............ 30
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT ...................... ............ 30
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. ............ 31
25.1 IRRIGATION .................................................................................................... ............ 31
25. 1.1 DESCRIPTION .................... .................... .................. .-....................... ...... ............ 31
25.1.2 PRODUCTS.. .......... --- ..................... -.- ............ .............. ---- ........... .... ........ 32
25.1.3 EXECUTION .......................................... .................................................. ....... 36
25.2 LANDSCAPE ................................................................................................... ......•----.40
25.2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................. ............40
25.2.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................... ................... ............ 45
25.2.3 EXECUTION ................................... ...... ................. ........................ ..-•- ----........ 48
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 55
26.1 INTENT.... ........................................................................................................ ............ 55
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 55
26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 56
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................... ............ 56
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ...................................................•----.................-•----........ 57
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ........................................................................... .... ............. 57
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ........................................................ ---•-........... ............. 57
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................... ............. 57
26.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................... ............. 58
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS .............................................................................. ............. 58
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..............•--................-•------........-•----.................. ----.----•-.. 58
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................... ............. 58
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................... ............. 58
29 CONCRETE CURBS ........................................................................................ ............. 58
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................................... ...•- ....... 58
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................... ......•-..... 59
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ............................................ ............. 59
SectionlV.doc iii 10/11/2010
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 59
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 59
303 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 59
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 59
31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................ 60
32 SEEDING ......................................................................................................................... 60
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 60
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES .............................................. ................................. 61
33.2 PRECAST TYPE ............................................•---...........................------..............------..... 61
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 61
34 MATERIAL USED ............................ ............:................ .................. .............................. 61
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 61
36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 62
,37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 62
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 62
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 62
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 62
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 62
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 62
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 63
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 63
37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 63
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL ................................................................................................... 63
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 63
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 64
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ...............•-----.............................................................. 64
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 64
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 64
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................ . 64
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS ................................... . 64
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ....................................................................... . 64
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ...................................................................................... . 65
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ..................... . 65
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ................................................................... . 65
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ...................................................... . 65
38.9 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ . 66
38.10 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................ .66
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................ . 69
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE ................... . 69
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 69
SectionIV.doe iv 10/11/2010
'
........................................................................................................................-•
41.1 SCOPE 69
41.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................
41.2.1 GENERAL ................................................................. ................................... 70
70
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 70
41.2.3 GATE VALVES ......................................................................................................
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 72
72
._...................
41.2.5 HYDRANTS.. ...................... - ...................................... .......... 73
41.26 SERVICE SADDLES .................. .......................................................................... 74
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 74
41.2.8 BACKFLOWPREVENTERS ................................................................................ 74
4129 TAPPING SLEEVES .................................................................................. ------ 75
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 75
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 75
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 75
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 75
413.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS..................................... . ... 77
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 77
41.4 TESTS .......................................................•----...............................................................
41-4-1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ............................. ...•---.------ ........ ...................................... 78
78
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 78
' 41.5 STERILIZATION .........................................................................................................
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 78
78
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM..... . ................................... .... ..•--------------- ........... .............. _.. 78
' 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................................
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 78
79
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 79
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................•.........................................................
41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 79
79
41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 80
41.63 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ...................................................................
41.64 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND 80
COVERS ............................................................................................................... 80
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 80
' 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................•...... 81
43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 81
' 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ------------------------•-----•---........................................................ 81
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 81
43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 81
' 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ................................................................... ...................... 81
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE .......................................................... ......... 81
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ........................................................ ........ 81
43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................... 82
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS . 83
43.2.1 GENERAL ...................... .................................................................................. 83
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ................................................................. ......... 84
43.23 SLOPE ......................................................................... ......................................... 84
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION .................................................. .................................... 85
1 SectionlV.doc v 10/11/2010
1
5 PERIMETER CURBING ................................ .................................................. 85
2
43
.
.
6 SURFACE COURSE ....................................................................................
2
43 ........ 85
.
.
7 ROOT BARRIER .......................................
2
43 85
-
.
8 FENCING .....................................................................................................
43
2 ........86
.
.
9 WINDSCREENS .................... ......-................................................................
2
43 ........86
.
.
2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ...................................................... ...........................
43 ........ 86
.
11 SHADE STRUCTURE ...................................................................................
2
43 ........ 88
.
.
12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) ..........................................................................
2
43 ........ 88
.
.
13 CONCRETE .............................. ........-...........................---...................
2
43 ........88
.
.
2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING .........................................
43 ........ 88
.
115 WATER COOLER------. • .................................................................................
43 ........ 89
.
16 DEMONSTRATION ......................................................................................
43
2 ........89
.
.
43.2.17 WARRANTY .......................... .................................................................... ........89
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................ ......... 90
1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44 ......... 90
.
2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .....................................................
44 ......... 90
.
1 WORK ZONE SAFETY .................... .... .........................................
44
2 ......... 90
.
.
3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ..............................................................
44 ......... 91
.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS .......................................................................................... ......... 91
3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ........
44 ......... 91
.
33 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS... .............. - ......... ........... -- ...
44 ..... ... 91
.
4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ....................... ......... ........................................... ........
44
3 .. -...... 91
-
.
4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 91
44
.
5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION ..........
44 .......... 92
.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................... .......... 92
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR.. .......... 92
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .................................................................... .......... 92
45.1 INTENT ...................................................................................
2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORANSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ..............
45 .......... 92
.......... 93
.
3 MATERIALS .................................................... ..............
45 .......... 93
.
4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .........................................................
45 .......... 93
.
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ............................................................................. .......... 94
6 LINER INSTALLATION ................................................................
45 .......... 94
.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ............................................................•--.....----... ..-•----.. 94
8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................
45 ........... 94
.
45.9 PAYMENT .............................. .........---........................................ .......---• 94
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING .......................... ........... 95
1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................
46 .•-----....95
.
1 PIPEANDFITTINGS ........... ................ ............................. .......... ..............
46
1 .. ......... 95
.
.
461.2 QUALITYCONTROL ............................ ...............................................
.. ........... 95
3 SAMPLES ............................. .........................................................
461 ...........95
.
461.4 REJECTION .............................................................. ................................. ........ --- 95
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................... ........... 95
3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 96
46
.
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ............................................................................... ........... 96
463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ......................................... ........ ........... 96
SectionIV.doc vi 10/11/2010
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 96
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE.. ..... - ....................................................... -..- - ..... . 96
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ......................................... ............................................ .. 96
464.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ..................................................... . 96
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ......................................................................... . 96
464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ......................................................... . 97
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ................. ................................. ...-- 97
464.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ..................................................................... . 97
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................................ 97
464.7 BACKFILLING .................................................................................................... .98
464.8 POINTREPAIR ............................................................... .................................... . 98
464.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS.. .... - .............. I ... ---- ... ........................................ . 98
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 98
47.1 SCOPE .................................................... •..................................................................... 98
47.2 MATERIALS ................................................. ................................................... .•----... .. 98
47.3 PIPE ----------------------------•------•--......................................
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 99
47.5 FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 99
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 99
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 99
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 99
48.3 COMPOSITION ................................................... ..................................................... .. 99
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 100
48.5 MATERIALS -------------------•-•---..................................................................................... 100
48.6 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 100
48.7 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................... 100
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 100
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................................•-•-•---------- 101
48.10 PROPORTIONING ..............•................................................................................---... 101
48.11 MIXING ...................................................................................................................... 101
48.12 APPLICATION ..................................•---------------.....................................................---- 101
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .......----•---•-•-• ................................................................... 102
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 102
48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 102
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ...................................................... ..... 102
48.17 INSPECTION .....................................•---•---•-----................................................. ... 103
48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 103
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ......................... 104
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT .------• ....................................................................................... 104
49.2 PAYMENT .............................................................. ----................................................ 104
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 104
49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 104
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 105
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 105
49.4.1 MATERIALS .................................. ...................... ........ .................. 106
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL .........................................................................•-------..... 106
I Section]V.doc
vii
10/11/2010
1
49.6 GROUTING MIX....................................................... ............. .............. 106
49.7 LINER MIX ................................................•• .............. ................... -...-...... ........ 106
49.8 WATER .....-• ............................................................ 107
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 107
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............. ......................... ................................................... -•--............... 107
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 107
49.11.1 PREPARATION. ..... __ ............... ........... -____ ......... ___ ..... ............ . 107
49.11.2 MIXING ................................................. .................................................. ....... 108
49.11.3 SPRAYING ........................................... .. 108
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ..... ........... ------- --............ ____ .... ............. . 108
49.11.5 CURING .................................... ................................... 108
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE. ........ _ .... ................ ....... .. 109
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 109
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................ .............. 109
49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 109
49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION ................................................................... 111
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................113
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................113
51.1 SCOPE ...............................................................................................•-• ------------ 113
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ...................................... ................... ......... .................. 114
51.2.1 ASPHALT..... .................................................................
...................... 114
51.2.2 CONCRETE .......................................................................... ------ ............. 114
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX ............................................................................ 114
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT .......................................................... 114
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE ........................................................... 115
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION ... -----• ...............................................•-.----.-•---............... 115
51.6 PLAYING LINES .......... .............................................................................................. 115
51.7 GENERAL ---------• ...................................................•---•-----•--•--.---.................................. 115
51.8 LIMITATIONS .......................................................... ------------ .................................... A15
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 116
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES .................................................................................. X16
53.1 MATERIAL ......................................... -.................. -•-•----............................................. 116
53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ................................................... 116
53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :............................................... 118
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................................................ 119
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ........................................................................................ 119
53.2 PERFORMANCE ..................................................•.............--------•---.............. ............. 119
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 120
54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 120
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................ 120
54.3 WORK METHODS .............................................................. . . ...........-.........--- 121
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING.... .................. .......... ____ ......................... _ 121
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ...................................................................... .... 121
54.4 LITTER ....................................................................................................................... 121
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ..........................•-----......... ....................... 121
I I SectionIV.doc
viii
10/11/2010
1
1
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 121
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.).-..- 121
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ............................................................................................. .... 121
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ..............................................................................•................. 122
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 122
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION ............................................. ............................................. 122
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 122
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ................... ------------------------------------•-•------------------------------------ 122
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 122
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ........................................... ..... 122
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 122
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ...............................•------------------------.................................... 123
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 123
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ...............................•------................................................. 123
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 123
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ..........--• .............................................................................. 123
55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 124
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 124
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 124
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................••-•------------------..................---------................ 125
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ................. ........ ............................................................ 125
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 125
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 125
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ...................................................................•----.•--.---................ 125
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 126
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................•-•------.-- 126
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 126
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................................•-•-------•- 126
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .-• ........................................................................... --.--------- 126
57 RIPRAP .........................................................................................................................126
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................•-......---. 127
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 127
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ......................................................................•-----..---.-----.---.. 127
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 127
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 127
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128
60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 128
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 128
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128
1 SectionIV.doc
,x
10/11/2010
1
'
62 TREE PROTECTION ..................................... ....... 129
' 62.1
62.2 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................
ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 129
129
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ..........................................•............................................. 130
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 131
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 131
63.2
63.3 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES .....................................................................
THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 131
131
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS .......................................................................................... 132
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 132
63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 132
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 132
II
II
i 1 SectionIV.doc x 10111/2010
1-1
1
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
Project Name: JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOMICONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D
Scope of Work:
The work consist of site work and not limited to clearing & grubbing, tree removal, installation of silt fencing,
tree barricades, reconstructing retention pond, construct new weir structure & removal of existing storm sewer
structure, installation of fill dirt rough & fine grading, installation of storm water piping, sanitary sewer, potable
domestic water line, fire water main, fire hydrants, electrical, telephone, 6" thick concrete slabs; construct
restroom/concession building 57'4"x 66' masonry building approximately 2/3 is enclosed space & other
covered deck area, includes but not limited to: concrete foundations, landfill gas mitigation system, concrete,
masonry, plumbing, electrical-175 KVA,120/208 volt step down transformer with minimum 4" 3,000
PSI/28 day concrete maintenance pad - minimum with 4" beyond the transformer edge on all sides or
approved equal, HVAC system, stucco, Silikal flooring system, metal barrel tile roofing system,
doors & hardware, millwork, painting restoration of all disturbed area with same type sod 417
Bermuda & Bahia sodding.
2. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-10405, Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree Removal
Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2nd Floor of the Municipal Service Building - 100
South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed silt fence of the limits of the proposed limits of work area.
3. Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex will be programmed during the construction of the restroom/concession building
and the general contractor and his sub contractors shall provide all safety measures to ensure safety and welfare
of the public and Park & Recreation staff during the construction of this project.
4. The geotechnical report is included in this document and the contractor shall review and adhere to the
recommendations of the geotechnical engineer as indicated in the report.
5. The City has applied and received the SWFWMD Permit and a copy is attached with this document.
6. The contractor shall note a qualified installer shall be utilized in the installation of the Landfill Gas Mitigation
System for the drawings 1 through 4 and technical specifications sections: 02720-Geotextiles, 02740-
Geocomposits; 02770-Geomembranes and provide Sierra Gas Monitors developed by Geosyntec Consultants.
See Section 02770 - 1,02 Submittals. Submit to the Engineer information regards to the installer qualifications.
This information shall be provided and other documentation required for the Landfill Gas Mitigation System
during the Pre-Construction Meeting to expedite the review process. Attached is a short list of geosynthetics
installers that would be qualified to perform the work at the lot DiMaggio Sport Complex. The consultant
indicates a couple of qualified contractors may be out of state, but they are very active in Florida.
a. Environmental Specialties international, inc., 617 Schumaker Lane, Salisbury, Maryland 21804
Representative: Ted Hoey, Tel: 412-337-2100
b. Erosion Control Systems of Florida, 8000 Southeast 23rd Drive, Webster, Florida
33597Representative: Charles Ellingsworth, Tel: 352-569-9393
c. Comanco Environmental Corporation, 4301 Sterling Commerce Drive, Plant City, Florida, 33566
Representative: Erik Simpson or Nick Dille, Tel: 813-988-8829
d. National Lining Systems, Inc., 16970-3 San Carlos Boulevard, Suite 191, Fort Myers, Florida, 33908
Representative: Joe Irwin, Tel: 863-248-0850
e. Environmental Design & Construction, 204 Wholesale Avenue, Huntsville, Alabama 35811
Representative: Diane Harris, Tel: 256-551-0372
Should the contractor select a contractor to perform the work other than those listed above for the Landfill Gas
Mitigation System they must meet the geosynthetics installer qualification and licensed to install per the
technical specifications stated above and qualifications submitted at the pre-construction meeting.
SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
7. Attached in the drawing document are approximate location of existing conduits & lighting of the multipurpose
fields the contractor shall take care not to disturb these existing utilities. See drawing by APG Electric sheet
numbers; E 1, E 2& E 3
8. The Owner has elected to provide and install range hood and fire suppression systems. Contractor shall be
required to provide electrical connection all associated conduits requirements. The Owner will provide the
roofing curb stop to the contractor prior for installation of the roofing system.
9. The gas system and the Rinnia water heater will be provided by Clearwater Gas and is contracted through the
owner to perform the gas piping work. The contractor shall provide the plumbing and electrical and
connections of the water Rinnia heater, this includes the blow off piping from the blow off valve to the mop
sink. Blow off valve provided by Clearwater Gas. Gas venting of the water heater will be performed by
Clearwater Gas.
10. A 300 KVA, 277/408 volt Progress Energy transformer exists in the electrical yard. The contractor of this
project shall be required to provide an outdoor 175KVA 120/208 volt step down transformers and all the
electrical components in providing an operable electrical system for the restroom/concession building.
11. C ontractor shall be required to provide enclosure around range hood as specified on the drawings whether the
range hood is reinstalled by the owner or the general contractor.
12. The contractor shall be required to install '/a" conduits for all low voltage wiring. Where hard ceilings are
installed and is not accessible in the attic space the contractor shall provide the junction box from the location
on the walls, ceilings or soffits to where they are accessible above the ceiling for the Owner's low voltage
vendor. The owner's vendor will provide the installation of the low voltage wiring fire wired above the ceiling
hung from 'J' hooks attached to the rafters. All low voltage will be installed by the owner's vendors unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
13. The magnetic locking system low voltage is by the contractor awarded this project. The contractor shall
provide material submittal to the architect and owner for approval for all hardware to provide a complete
operational magnetic locking system. Magnetic locking system shall include control panel with timing
mechanism to automatically lock the gate at night and hold gate open during the day with an emergency push
button to prevent users to be lock in when the gate is closed. The cost for the magnetic locking system shall
include a one year maintenance agreement and options to renew maintenance agreement for multiple years. See
attachment in the appendix for information on Schlage electromagnetic gate lock
14. A number 8 gauge coated tracer wire shall be supplied for sanitary sewer (green) and fire line (blue) at each end
of the tap and termination of building or end of line.
15. A ny items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the Joe DiMaggio Sport
Complex Restroom/Concession Building shall have been included cost for those items not listed somewhere in
the pricing of the General Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provides by
the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors utilized to implement this project.
16. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in
submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the
Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the Joe
DiMaggio Sport Complex Restroom/Concession Building and no additional compensation will be provided by
the Owner.
17. T he contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed
areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. Video and photographs of the
existing conditions is recommended prior to the contractor mobilizing on to the site.
SectionlV.doc Page 2 of 127 10/1112010
1
' Section IV -'Technical Specifications
' 18. T he owner will provide electricity and water for construction of this project.
19. T he contractor will be required to provide sanitation for his employees and sub contractor during the construction
period of this project and will not be allow utilize Owner facilities.
20. T he successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and
submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of
payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard ALA form in making his application for payment
on or prior to the 25'" of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and
' approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean
wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate
of final payment.
'
21. T he successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and
major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at
each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub-
' contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses.
22. T he successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for
review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect
' as the required submittal list-
23. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing, material submittal and shall be maintained by the
contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file
folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out
materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact
information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses.
' 24. The contractor is to supply spare parts as listed below:
a. Minimum one gallon of paint of each color or type un-open containers, plus left over open paint
containers; contractor to provide color name, draw down of each colors & type; color design mix for
each colors in each of the O & M manuals provided to the Owner
b. HV/AC unit filters, return duct filters 1 each for each grill and a/c unit
c. 1 spare light ballasts for each type of fixture
d. Spare lamps for each type of light fixture minimum of 4 lamps
e_ Spare VCT Floor Tiles 2% of each color or minimum of one box/carton as packed by manufacture
whichever is greater and open boxes of tiles (same lot number as installed)
f. Vinyl Floor Base 2% (same lot number as installed)
g. Metal Roofing tiles 2% of each item
25. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for
review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre-
construction meeting.
' 26. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be
determined at the pre-construction meeting.
27. Sequence o f work:
a. The all site work including underground infrastructure: in and around the football/soccer field,
bleacher area, beneath restroom/concession building structure all earthwork shall be identified in the
contractor's construction schedule and completed within the first 30 days upon notice to proceed.
b. Construction of the Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex - Restroom Concession Building 4,300 sq. ft.,
' Project No. 07-0035-PR-D, single story masonry building; all associated items required per
architectural(Fowler Assoc. Architects) & site civil drawings (Deuel & Assoc. Engineers)-(CS-1,1 of
SectionlV.doc Page 3 of 127 10/112010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
d.
e.
3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3, A-11, A1.2, A-1.3, A2.1, A-2.2, A-11, S-1.0, S-1.1, S-1.2, E-1.0, E-1.1, E-1.2, M-
1.1, P1.1) up to five feet outside drip line of the building's roof canopy line (unless otherwise noted);
include storm drain system and miter end sections and ice machine piping even if it is outside the roof
canopy drip line; the technical specifications; miscellaneous items and all other items not included in
bill of quantities bid items listed below in providing a complete operational building
Landfill Gas Mitigation System/Building Protection Plan - drawing and technical specifications
developed by Geosyntec Consultants; drawing sheets (1 of 4, 2 of 4, 3 of 4 & 4 of 4); specifications
sections 02720, 02740; 02770 and Permanent Gas Monitoring Sensors - Sierra Gas Monitors and all
miscellaneous items in providing a complete operable landfill gas mitigation system
Site Civil - includes all associated work five feet outside the drip line of the building roof line (unless
otherwise noted) including tie in of utilities of line item 1 & 2 above according to drawings by Deuel
Assoc. Engineers (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) & Fowler Assoc. Architect (E-1.0 Riser Diagram Detail) the
technical specifications and all other items not included in the bill of quantities bid items listed above
of a complete operable site civil infrastructure system. The intent is to include all work associated on
the drawings listed and if not specifically of items on the drawing the bidder shall include all work cost
on the drawings & specifications shall be include in line items. Coordinate with Owner irrigation
contractor for relocation of irrigation controller/control wires/irrigation mainline and cap of abandoned
lateral zones. The Owner may select option of self performing the site civil work but the intent is to
incorporate this work in this contract with the general contractor awarded the project
All work completed within 135 consecutive calendar days from notice to proceed
CONTRACT PERIOD: 135 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS
SectionlV.doc Page,4 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
I El Sco Of Work
2.1 0 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor
2.2 ? Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City
3 0 Definition Of Terms
4 J Order And Location Of The Work
5 0 Excavation For Underground Work
6 0 Concrete
7 0 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 0 Reinforcement
9 0 Obstructions
10 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
l1 ? Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 ? Dewaterin
13 0 Sanitary Manholes
14 0 Backfill
15 ? Street Crossings, Etc.
16 0 Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer Storm Drainage Structures
17 El Unsuitable Material Removal
18 0 Underdrains
19 0 Storm Sewers
20 0 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 0 Drainage
22 ? Roadway Base And Sub grade
23 Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 ? General Planting Specifications
26 ? Hd a Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 ? Plant Mix Driveways
28 [J I Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 ? Concrete Curbs
30 0 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 0 Sodding
32 ? Seedin
SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
33 R1 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 0 Material Used
35 0 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 Street Si ns
37 0 AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas
38 0 Erosion And Siltation Control
39 0 Utility Tie In Location Markin
40 0 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 D Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 0 Gas System S ecifications
43 ? Tennis Courts
44 ? Work Zone Traffic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 Specifications for Polyethylene Sli limn
47 Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe_
48 Gunite S ecifications
49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 ® Project Information Signs
51 ? In-Line Skating Surfacing System
52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction N_
53 ? Gabions and Mattresses
54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 ? Milling Operations
56 0 Clearing and Grubbing
57 ? Ri ra
58 ? Treatment Plant Safety
59 ? Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials
60 ? Signing And Markin
61 ? Roadwa Li htin
62 0 Tree Protection
63 ? Project Web Pages
2 FIELD ENGINEERING
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III
(General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 127 10/112010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
SectionlV.doc
Page 6 of 127
10/112010 1
' Section IV -Technical Specifications
AA Aluminum Association, Inc.
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMA Acoustical Materials Association
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA American Plywood Association
ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers
' ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
' AWG American Wire Gauge
AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CISPI
CRSI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
DOT Department of Transportation (Florida)
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FAC Florida Administrative Code
FBC Florida Building Code
FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code
FGC Florida Gas Code
FMC Florida Mechanical Code
FPC Florida Plumbing Code
FedSpec Federal Specifications
HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute
IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IPS Iron Pipe Size
MIL Military Specification
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
' NPT National Pipe Thread
' SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 127 10/11/2010
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
SDI Steel Door Institute
SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI)
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI)
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TCA Title Council of America
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE I
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
SectionIV.doc Page 8 of 127 10/11/2010
1 Section IV - Technical Specifications
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
' Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
' Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may.require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
1 SectionIV.doc Page 9 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry"
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
SectionlV_doc Page 10 of 127 10/112010
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
1 whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
' material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
k i
l
di
l
b
or,
nc
u
ng
a
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above wor
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
r The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
I SectionlV.doe Page 11 of 127 10/112010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for
the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must
collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference...
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE
ACTIVITY
City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities:
1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification
SectionIV.doc
Page 12 of 127
10/11/2010 1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance.
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
' FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-
620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to
determine if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be
sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE I
1
1
1
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/1
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631 E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1
Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/l
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/I 86.0 µg/1
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/1
Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1
1 SectionlV.doc Page 13 of 127 I0/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of.Clearwater.
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information-
I . the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
2. the name and address of the facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the
Department.
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural
background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than $.5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural
background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration
of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or
greater than 1500 mg/1.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
SectionIV.doc Page 14 of 127 10/112010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface
waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any
' source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office
within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic
Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
r 13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
' The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
' stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type 11 cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
SectionIV.doc Page 15 of 127 10111/2010
1
Section IV -Technical Specifications
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete -
Adjustment of Manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class 1) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have
the inside plastered with, 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227
Type 11 Class 1) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
SectionlV.doc Page 16 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
' 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
' site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
' truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
I Section]V.doc Page 17 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 124545 or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% 1
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter, fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
SectionlV.doc Page 18 of 127 10/112010
11
' Section 1V -Technical Specifications
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
uivalent
lter fabric or e
140N f
f
d
ith Mi
h
ll b
q
i
i
ra
w
e wrappe
a
All reinforced concrete pipe joints s
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
' The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration_ In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
' Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
I SectionlV.doc Page 19 of 127 10111/2010
rl
Section IV -Technical Specifications
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.)_
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
Dewatering of the trench, bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
' preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide farm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
1 The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall to ke all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
' above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
1 SectionlV.doc Page 21 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 127 10/112010
I Section IV - Technical Specifications
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that salve day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely planner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
' commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
1 SectionIV.doc Page 23 of 127 10/11/2010
Section N - Technical Specifications
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles- The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
SectionlV.doc Page 24 of 127 10/11/2010
1
t
t
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES -- PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory'every 1000 tons
' include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
I SectionlV.doc Page 25 of 127 10111/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of l~DOT's Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of/" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may
be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches)
Type S-I
Type S-I with
Type S-III
Top Layer
Type 5--111
FC-3
Type 5-111
with FC-3
Top Layer
Type S-1
with FC-3
Top Layer
1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 1 1
1'/2 1 %2
SectionIV.doc
Page 26 of 127
10/11/2010 1
1
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
2 1'/4 3/4 * 1 1
2'/2 1'/4 1'/4 1'/2 1 1'/a 1
3 1%2 1%2 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-111 per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC--3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
SectionlV.doc Page 27 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions.
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfll using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
5ectionIV.doc Page 28 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section 1V -Technical Specifications
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt.
rior to the
laced
halt shall be re
lacement of as
d b
ki
i
t
ll
p
p
p
ngs
mpac
e
y p
pavement mar
2. A
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
' 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
i
' s off
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debr
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
' discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
' asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
- plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
' 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip
Index 101
er Cit
or face of said curb
.
p
y
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
' Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
' Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
' Specifications (latest edition).
' Sectionl V.doc Page 29 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
SectionIV.doc
Page 30 of 127
10/11/2010 '
' Section 1V -- Technical Specifications
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
' 25.1 IRRIGATION
' 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
' item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
' 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
' mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC_ Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
'. three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
' 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
' maintenance.
1 SectionIV.doc Page 31 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV-Technical Specifications
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting- Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming toASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
SectionlV.doc Page 32 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
' The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem
5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stern
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
I SectionlV.doe
Page 33 of 127
10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a I" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks 436
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek 9182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 1
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
SectionlV.doc Page 34 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
' directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
' per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
' stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage
.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
' A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
M 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
' function if submerged in water.
I SectionlV.doc Page 35 of 127 10/11/2010
11
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as ]manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg_ Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
SectionlV.doc Page 36 of 127 10/112010
iI
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
' to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
' interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
1 The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
. prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
GENERAL
NG
-
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHI
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
I SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than % in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
SectionfV.doc Page 38 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
Y OF CLEARWATER
25.1.3 )
.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CIT
A The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
. utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
r pressure is on.
¦ 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
' SectionIV.doc Page 39 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV -'Technical Specifications
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 40 of 127 10/11/2010
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
1
25
2 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.
. .
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
SectionIV.doc Page 41 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONSMEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT :
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C. W.:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SP-R.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN_ :
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O. C.:
On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.:
Diamete L
LVS.:
Leaves.
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
SectionJV.doc
Page 42 of 127
10/11/2010 1
G
Section IV -Technical Specifications
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
SectionIV.doc Page 43 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 127 10111/2010
t
1
1
1
1
1
P
r?
r
Section IV -Technical Specifications
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A_ Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
SectionIV.doc Page 45 of 127 10/112010
1
Section N - Technical Specifications
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
7. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years- If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
SectionlV.doc Page 46 of 127 10/11/2010
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/ the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two -'/" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
SectionlV.doc Page 47 of 127 10111/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to S feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - '/zfeet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
SectionIV.doc Page 48 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to S
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
f
'
"
"
acturer
s
per the Manu
Rodeo
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with
Specifications.
r B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
I SectionIV.doc Page 49 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
SectionIV.doc Page 50 of 127 10/11/2010
71
L
1
1
u
1
r
n
U
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each '/2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backf ll tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
SectionlV.doc Page 51 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A, Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two '/ inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
SectionlV.doc Page 52 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
25.2.3 .2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
B. and form of the plant.
Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
I SectionlV.doc Page 53 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V -'Technical Specifications
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
SectionlV.doc Page 54 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 127 10/11/2010
Section N - Technical Specifications
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
HDPE
Impact Strength
D 256 A
3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff 1C=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
SectionJV.doc Page 56 of 127 10111/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
N
PECTION
26.5 TELEVISION I
S
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
completed
,
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
1 reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
I SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 127 10/112010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
SectionlV.doc
Page 59 of 127
10/11/2010
L'i
D
Section IV - Technical Specifications
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
r Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
I SectionIV.doc Page 59 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES INLETS CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
SectionIV.doc Page 60 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
' smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accornmodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
I SectionlV.doc Page 61 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of EDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
SectionlV.doc Page 62 of 127 10/11/2010
I]
1
1
1
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
r
1 SectionIV.doc Page 63 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length, of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
SectionlV.doc Page 64 of 127 10/112010
t
1
fl
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
r 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
' 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
' a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
I SectionIV.doc Page 65 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation-
Section]V.doc Page 66 of 127 10/11/2010
1
1
t
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee
3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee
4th occurrence - Stop Work Order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750.
1 SectionlV.doc
Page 67 of 127
10/11/2010
H
C
O
V
R
U
H
U
wZ
00
?o
oW
w
O
Q
w r.?
I--1
U
OO
U W
W ?
x?
H?
w
o?w
w o
1
? V
I
x
o ?
a x
U
o
°
W W o
a
?
? z
o
?¢W
w o o Quo
r ? H
° o
ye'
L W
~
U w ? ? Fx-
z?'z
x
>
o
CD
En A4
00
M ~
xH O
Q O
o 3
ul
WUa
zo
?
Q
?
Q
z
?o°
r-(
N
N
b
n
N
r?
a w °?
U ?
? O
H y
V A
z
a
a
°
?o
v • „?
U j
r? CO O
r y O
? •U y
O C _?
o ?y
? 3 a
C C C
0
C: X:
? o •3
b?
? y U
C .? p
? U L1
y
U
A ?
-LID
H z C/)
? o 0
H
Q ?
w
u
T?
VJ
M+i
F
W
O
0
0
a
O
co?
F
0
00
°
b
0
1
1
1
F-]
Section IV -Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER
WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
' This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
' 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
' 41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfllling and clean up.
SectionN.doc Page 69 of 127 10111/20I0
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness
(In.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same Q.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
SectionlV.doc Page 70 of 127 101112010
1
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio
(OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI) Laying Length
(Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
' All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum
' above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
' accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
' accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
' 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
' mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
' connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
' All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
' SectionlV.doc Page 71 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method
by the Engineer.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSI/A.W W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring
bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with 0509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet I of 2 & Sheet
2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
SectionIV.doc Page 72 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section IV -Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
' No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B-84-B.
' No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AW WA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
' 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
' 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
' 9. Operating nut shall be a 0 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
' 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
' 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open.
' 16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
' Specifications.
1 SectionfV.doc Page 73 of 127 10/11!2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AW WA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC
202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless
steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
SectionIV.doc
Page 74 of 127
10/11/2010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
' 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
' pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
1 part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
' or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
' The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts. and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
obstructions.
I SectionIV.doc Page 75 of 127 10/11/2010
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
SectionlV.doc Page 76 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed 18-inches from the main line.
' The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 &
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
' hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
' curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
1 independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
SectionIV.doc Page 77 of 127 10111/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications '
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ,
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
' 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
applicable pay items of work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joints materials
• Tests and sterilization
+ Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
11 SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
SectionlV.doc Page 80 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-111 Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than '/a" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
I SectionIV.doc Page 81 of 127 10/11/2010
Section N - Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfaces or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfaces or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
Section]V.doc Page 82 of 127 10/112010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
' No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
fl
n
1
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAKES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
I SectionIV.doc
Page 83 of 127
10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid_ The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 127 10/11/2010
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
1
1
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type 11 Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
Sectionlv.doc Page 85 of 127 1W112010
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
SectionlV.doc Page 86 of 127 10/112010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
' 43
2
10
3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
.
.
.
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
3
1
4 N
T
.2.
4
0.
E
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
1 10
43
2
5 CENTER STRAP
.
.
.
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline_
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (I each) - six-foot length aluminum.
SectionI V.doc
Page 87 of 127
10/112010
iI
Section IV -Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 127 10/11/2010 1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
1 Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
I Sectionlv.doc Page 89 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk. closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 127 10/11/1010 1
11
1
r
11
1
r
Section IV - Technical Specifications
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
SectionIV.doc Page 91 of 127 10/112010
1
Section N - Technical Specifications
All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
SectionlV.doc Page 93 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
' The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification valties shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
SAMPLES
46.1.3
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
SectionlV.doc Page 95 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Ripe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes-
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
21 %2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and nodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
SectionlV.doc Page 96 of 127 10/11/2010
11
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
1 be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
I SectionJV.doc Page 97 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
SectionlV,doc Page 98 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
JOINING SYSTEM
47.4
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
r Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
lication
ete suitable for
neumatic a
d
pp
.
uce a concr
p
pro
1 SectionlV.doc Page 99 of 127 10/1112010
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C 150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No. 4 Sieve
Passing No. 8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. 50 Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
100%
95% to 100%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to 60%
10% to 30%
2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
SectionlV.doc Page 100 of 127 10/112010
1
1
fl
C
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
1
1
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. 'Be mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
SectionIV.doc Page 101 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if.
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be, properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
SectionIV.doc Page 102 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV -Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
L'
1
fl
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap
(cfm) Max. Hose Dia.
(In.) Max. Size Nozzle
(In.) Min. Air Press.
(psi)
365 15/8 15/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
I SectionlV.doc Page 103 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
SectionIV.doc
Page 104 of 127
10/11/2010 1
1
1
1
I
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall. of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type 11
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
' 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the, application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
5ection]V.doc Page 105 of 127 10/11/2010
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
SectionlV.doc Page 106 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
' conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
' with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
r 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
SectionIV.doc Page 107 of 127 10/11/2010
1]
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
SectionlV.doc Page 108 of 127 10/11/2010
1
1
1
1
t
1
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of.
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium, aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
SectionIV.doc
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Page 109 of 127
10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: '
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior '
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 '
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity Non Toxic ,
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
8.1x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
SectionlV.doc Page I10 of 127 10/11/2010
r
1?
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1900 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 901/6 Humidity - X0.04 X0.06 X0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume
Color (other colors available on request)
Pot Life, hrs
Tensile Strength, psi, min
Tensile Elongation, %
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
1:1
Light Gray
1
2,000
10-20
5
1,800
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (31/6), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (30/o), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
SectionIV.doc Page 111 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
SectionlV.doc Page 112 of 127 10/11/2010
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
1
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nixie (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
' 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
' 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
SectionlV,doc Page 113 of 127 10/1112010
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
• 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
• 2 Coats of Plexiflor
Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
SectionlV.doc Page 114 of 127 10111/2010
Section N-Technical Specifications
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
' After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
' Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
' diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
' Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
' of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
' State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
' 51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
' 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
SectionIV.doc Page 115 of 127 10/11/2010
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
OF CONSTRUCTION.
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1 _ Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4'/ inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-rite
SectionlV.doc Page 116 of 127 10/11/2010
w
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
' 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
' less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
if
G
i
ic
rav
ty:
1. Spec
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
' not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
' a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
' not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
' 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
' a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
5ectionIV.doc Page 117 of 127 10111/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.9.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
• Absorption, maximum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
SectionIV.doc Page l 18 of 127 10/11/2010
t
1
Section N - Technical Specifications
• Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
1 binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
' binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
' SectionlV.doc Page 119 of 127 10/112olo
Section 1V -Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
SectionlV.doc Page 120 of 127 10/11/2010
1
54.3 WORK METHODS
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
SectionIV.doc Page 121 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
SectionIV.doc Page 122 of 127 10/11/2010
1
1
s
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per elan-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
' Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
' 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
I . This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
SectionIV.doc Page 123 of 127 10/112010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
55 MILLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
SectionIV.doc Page 124 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
' the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
' All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense- The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
' operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section 1V, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
' There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
I SectionIV.doc Page 125 of 127 10/11x2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing Swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off=-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work-
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
SectionIV.doc Page 126 of 127 10/11/2010
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
1 shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
I reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
' 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
1 include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
• The date of the training, and
• The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
' All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of 1~DOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
I SectionIV.doc Page 127 of 127 10/11/1010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of
existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM'S (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61,1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
SectionIV.doc
Page 128 of 127
10/11/2010
1
r
Section IV -Technical Specifications
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
I SectionIV.doc
Page 129 of 127 10/1112010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations -- Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
SectionIV.doc Page 130 of 127 10/11/2010
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
hq://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material- It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
SectionIV.doc Page 131 of 127 10/11/2010
Section IV - Technical Specifications
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
SectionIV.doc Page 132 of 127 10/11/2010 1
SECTION IV
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
07-0035-PR-D
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
Section 02280 - Termite Control ............................... ....................................................... 2
Section 02720 - Geotextiles :......................... ............................. .....................................4
Section 02740 - Geocomposites : ....................................................................................... 8
Section 02770 - GeoMembranes ................................................ ................... 19
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03410 - Structural Pre-cast Concrete ..................................................................... 7
DIVISION 4- MASONRY
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry ............................... ---......................................---...... 7
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal Work .......................................................................... 3
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06101 -Rough Carpentry ............................................• ................. ........... .-.......... 5
Section 06113 - Gypsum Sheathing .......................... ........................ ................................ 2
Section 06192 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses ..................................................................... 4
Section 06201 - Finish Carpentry &. Millwork ................................................................... 4
DIVISON 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07100 - Waterproofing... ........... ................ ..... -.............
Section 07175 - Water Repellents .............. -................. ........-............ ............
Section 07193 - Elastic Sheet Vapor Barriers .................................................
Section 07200 - Insulation.... ........ .................................................................
Section 07316 - Metal Roof Tiles .................................................................
Section 07410 - Preformed Section 07460 - Hardi-Plank Siding ...................
Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal .....................................................
Section 07700 - Roof Specialties and Accessories ........................................
Section 07715 - Gutters and Downspouts.-.-... ..........--...............................
..
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers ..... ............. ...•---............................. ...----..........
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
S ction 08110 - Steel Doors & Frames
............... 3
...............2
............. 4
............. 5
............... 3
............... 3
............... 2
3
6
e ................. ...................................
.........
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: ........................................... ___ ....... __
Section 08711 - Hardware Schedule: ........... ............. __ ................ ...................
----- l 1
6
2
Table of Contents
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster........... ...... ..--• ..................................................... 5
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall....... .................................................. 5
Section 09672 - Flake Flooring .................................... ....................................................11
Section 09900 - Painting & Schedules ...............................................................................14
Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring...........,... ..... ......... ..................................................... 3
Section 09963 - Water Repellent & Anti-graffiti Coating ..................................................7
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10155 - Toilet Compartments....,_...... ................................................................. 5
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories..... ..... ...... ... _ ................................... ................... 2
Section 10811 -Electric Hand Dryers .............. ........ .......---------- -•----------------- .......------- -------- 8
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not Used
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Section 15400 - Plumbing . ............ ....... ........•- -.------ ------
Section 15500 - Air Conditioning, Heating & Ventilating: ...........
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16000 - Electrical: ........ ___ ........ ------------- --..--
6
7
-----------------9
Table of Contents
SECTION 02280
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. PROVIDE SOIL TREATMENT for termite control as herein specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications, comply with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of
substrate and application.
r B. ENGAGE APROFESSIONAL PESTCONTROL OPERATOR, licensed in accordance
with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment
solution.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
' A. RESTRICTIONS:
1. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations
are completed.
1 To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during
inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of soil
toxicant manufacturer.
1.05 GUARANTEE:
' SUBMIT 2 COPIES of written guarantee certifying that chemicals having the required
concentration and rate of application as hereinafter specified have been applied and that
soil poisoning treatment will prevent attack by subterranean termites for a period of not
less than 5 years, and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during
guarantee period, Contractor will retreat soil and also repair or replace damage caused
by termite infestation. This guarantee shall be secured by a Repair Bond in the amount
of $50,000 minimum for each occurrence and shall include provisions for Owner to
renew Bond for an additional 10 years on a yearly basis.
1
02280-1
r
PART2-.PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION:
A. USE AN EMULSIBLE CONCENTRATE INSECTICIDE for dilution with water,
specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as
a diluent. Provide a working solution of one of the following chemical elements and
concentrations:
1. Chioropyrifos ("Dursban-TC"); 1.0% in water emulsion.
- 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", Torpeo"); 0.5% in water emulsion.
B. OTHER SOLUTIONS may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to
local governing authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to
planting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION:
A. REMOVE FOREIGN MATTER which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on
areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously
compacted areas under slabs and foundations.
B. APPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION at following minimum rate:
I. Within building area, with or without slabs-on grade, at rate of one gallon per 10
square feet.
2. Outside building perimeter, under aprons, pads, or paved extensions, at rate of one
gallon per 5 square feet.
1 At hollow masonry foundations treat voids at rate of one gallon per 5 lineal feet,
poured directly into hollow spaces.
4. At control joints, along both sides of foundation walls and areas where slab will
be penetrated, at rate of 2 gallons per 5 lineal feet of penetration.
C. ALLOW DRYING TR Eafter application of not less than 12 hours before beginning
concrete placement or other construction activities.
D. POST SIGNS in areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been
applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.
E. REAPPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION to areas disturbed by subsequent
Excavation or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION
02280-2
Geosyntec Consultants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORT COMPLEX
MARCH 2011
Section 02720 - Geotextiles
Section 02740 - Geocomposites
Section 02770 - Geomembranes
Permanent Gas Monitoring Sensor - Sierra Gas Monitor
9 ?a•Y1 ( a (9
15 )VIPA '& q
Specifications TOG i March 2011
Section 02720: Geotextiles
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
SECTION 02720
GEOTEXTILES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. Latest version of American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards
and other standards noted in this specification.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Engineer for review not less than 21 calendar days
prior to use: geotextile Manufacturer and product name; certification of
minimum average roll values and the corresponding test procedures for all
geotextile properties listed in Table 02720-1; and projected geotextile delivery
dates.
B. For the proposed geotextile material, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for review, at least 14 calendar days prior to transporting the geotextile to site,
the results of manufacturing quality control testing (i.e., manufacturing quality
control certificates for each roll of geotextile) and certification that the
geocomposite is manufactured to meet the minimum criteria when tested in
compliance with requirements of this Section.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GEOTEXTILE
A. Furnish geotextile products with minimum average roll values (95 percent lower
confidence limit) meeting or exceeding the required property values in Table
02720-1.
B. Furnish geotextiles that are stock products.
C. Furnish geotextiles that are manufactured from first quality polymers, with no
more than 20 percent reclaimed polymer used in production.
D. Furnish polymeric threads for stitching that are ultra-violet (UV) light stabilized
to at least the same requirements as the geotextile to be sewn. Furnish polyester
or polypropylene threads that have a minimum size of 2,000 denier.
2.02 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sample and test the geotextile to demonstrate that the material conforms to the
requirements of this section.
B. Perform manufacturing quality control tests to demonstrate that the geotextiles
properties conform to the values specified in Table 02720-1. Perform as a
Technical Specifications 02720-1 March 2011
Section 02720- Geotextiles
Joe Maggio Spon Complex, Rev. 0
minimum, the following manufacturing quality control tests at a minimum
frequency of once per 100,000 square feet with minimum of I test per resin lot:
Test Procedure
Mass per unit area ASTM D 5261
Grab strength ASTM D 4632
Tear strength ASTM D 4533
Puncture strength ASTM D 4833
Static Puncture strength ASTM D 6241
C. Perform additional manufacturing quality control tests on the geotextile at a
minimum frequency of once per 250,000 square feet with minimum of I test per
resin lot, to demonstrate that the apparent opening size (ASTM D 4751) and
permittivity (ASTM D 4491) of the geotextile conform to the values specified in
Table 02720-1.
D. Submit quality control certificates signed by the geotextile manufacturer quality
control manager. The certificates shall state that the geotextiles are continuously
inspected and are needle-free. The quality control certificates shall also include:
lot, batch, and roll number and identification; and results of manufacturing
quality control tests including description of test methods used.
E. Do not supply any geotextile roll that does not comply with the manufacturing
quality control requirements.
F. If a geotextile sample fails to meet the quality control requirements of this
section, sample and test rolls manufactured at the same time or in the same lot as
the failing roll. Continue to sample and test the rolls until the extent of the
failing rolls are bracketed by passing rolls. Do not supply failing rolls.
2.03 PACKAGING AND LABELING
A. Supply geotextiles in rolls wrapped in relatively impermeable and opaque
protective wrapping. Wrapping which becomes torn or damaged shall be
repaired with similar materials.
B. Mark or tag geotextile rolls in accordance with ASTM D 4873 with the following
information: manufacturer's name; product identification; lot or batch number;
roll number; and roll dimensions.
C. Geotextile rolls not labeled in accordance with this section or on which labels are
illegible upon delivery to the site shall be rejected and replaced at no expense to
the Owner.
Technical specifications 02720-2 March 2011
Section 02720: Geotextiles
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
2.04 TRANSPORTATION
' A. Deliver geotextiles to the site at least 14 calendar days prior to the planned
deployment date.
2.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE
' A. Protect geotextiles from sunlight, moisture, excessive heat or cold, puncture,
mud, dirt, and dust or other damaging or deleterious conditions. Follow all
geotextile manufacturer recommendations for handling and storage. Geotextile
rolls shall be covered with additional tarp cover (in addition to the roll cover) to
prevent damage to the rolls.
B. Store geotextile rolls on palates or other elevated structures. Do not store
geotextile rolls directly on the ground.
C. Outdoor storage of geotextile rolls shall not exceed the manufacturer's
recommendation or longer than b months, whichever is less.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Handle geotextiles so as to ensure they are not damaged in any way.
B. Do not drive equipment directly on the geotextile.
C. After unwrapping the geotextiles from its opaque cover, do not leave them
exposed for a period in excess of 30 calendar days.
D. If white colored geotextiles are used, take precautions against "snow blindness"
of personnel.
E. Examine the geotextile surface after installation to ensure that no potentially
harmful foreign objects are present. Remove any such objects and replace any
damaged geotextiles.
3.02 SEAMS AND OVERLAPS
A. Continuously overlap a minimum of b inches and sew filter geotextiles (i.e., spot
sewing is not allowed) using a "single prayer" seam. Sew seams using Stitch
Type 401 as per Federal Standard No. 75I a. In lieu of sewing, geotextile filters
may be overlapped a minimum of two feet.
B. Do not install horizontal seams on slopes that are steeper than 10 horizontal to I
vertical. Seams shall be along, not across, the slopes.
3.03 REPAIR
A. Repair any holes or tears in the geotextiles using a patch made from the same
geotextile material. Extend geotextile patches a minimum of I foot beyond the
Technical Specifications 02720-3 March 2011
1
7?
Scction 02720: Gcotcxsil
es
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rcv. 0
damaged area. Sew geotextile patches into place no closer than 1 inch from any
panel edge. Should any tear exceed 50 percent of the width of the roll, remove '
and replace that roll.
B. Remove any soil or other material that may have penetrated the torn geotextiles.
`I
1
Technical specifications 02720-4 March 2011
?J
Secti n 02720: Geotextiies
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
TABLE 02720-1
REQUIRED PROPERTY VALUES FOR GEOTEXTII,E
PROPERTIES i? QUALIFIE UNITS cs) SPECIFIED TEST METHOD
R VALUES
Product Requirements
Nonwoven needle-
Type
punched _
Polymer composition Minimum % 95 polypropylene or
polyester by wt -
Mass per unit area Minimum oz/yd2 6 ASTM D 5261
Filter Requirements
Apparent opening size Maximum MM Oqs < 0.21 ASTM D 4751
Permittivity Minimum sec , 0.3 ASTM D 4491
Mechanical Requirements
Grab strength Minimum lb 150 ASTM D 4632(2)
Tear strength Minimum lb 65 ASTM D 4533(3)
Puncture strength Minimum lb 90 ASTM D 4833(41
Static puncture strength Minimum psi 330 ASTM D 6241
Durability Requirements
Ultraviolet Resistance Minimum % 70 ASTM D 4355
ote :
I. All values represent minimum average roll values.
2. Minimum of values measured in machine and cross machine directions with 1 inch clamp on Constant
Rate of Extension (CRE) machine.
3. Minimum value measured in machine and cross machine direction.
4. Tension testing machine with a 1.75-inch diameter ring clamp, the steel ball being replaced with 0.31-
inch diameter solid steel cylinder with flat tip centered within the ring clamp.
5. mm = millimeter % = percent
oz/yd2 = ounce per square yard sec = second
lb = pound psi = pound per square inch
6. See Paragraph 2.02 for required MQC test frequencies.
[END OF SECTION]
Technical Specifications 02720-5 March 2011
Section 02740: GeomMgosltes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
SECTION 02740
GEOCOMPOSITES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. Latest version of American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards
and other standards noted in this specification.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Engineer for review at least 21 calendar days prior to
use_ geocomposite Manufacturer and product names; certification of minimum
average roll values and the corresponding test procedures for all geocomposite
properties listed in Table 02740-1; and projected geocomposite delivery dates.
B. For the proposed geocomposite material, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review, at least 14 calendar days prior to transporting the
geocomposite to site, the results of manufacturing quality control testing (i.e.,
manufacturing quality control certificates for each roll of geocomposite) and
certification that the geocomposite is manufactured to meet the minimum criteria
when tested in compliance with requirements of this Section.
C. Submit subgrade acceptance certificates, signed by the Installer, for each area to
be covered by the geocomposite prior to that area being covered by
geocomposite.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The installation of the geocomposite drainage layers will be monitored by the
CQA Consultant.
B. The Contractor shall be aware of the activities required of the CQA Consultant
and shall account for these activities in the installation schedule.
C. The CQA Consultant will perform material conformance testing of the
geocomposite.
D. The CQA Consultant shall ensure that representative geomembrane conformance
samples are obtained at the specified frequency and forwarded to the
Geosynthetics CQA Laboratory for testing. Conformance samples shall be taken
across the entire width of the roll and shall not include the first 3 feet. Unless
otherwise specified, samples shall consist of one section 3 feet long by the roll
width for geonet and geocomposite testing and one section 10 feet long cut 1 foot
from the edge of the geonet for testing of the unbonded geotextiles. The required
minimum geocomposite conformance sampling frequencies are provided in the
Technical Specifications 02740-1 March 2011
Section 02740' GeocQmeosites
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
table below. The CQA Consultant shall mark the machine direction on the
samples with an arrow and affix a label, tag, or otherwise marls each sample with
the following information: date sampled; project number; lot/batch number and
roll number; conformance sample number; and CQA personnel identification.
The geocomposite rolls which are sampled shall be immediately rewrapped in
their protective coverings to the satisfaction of the CQA Consultant.
TEST NAME TEST METHOD MINIMUM TESTING
FREQUENCY11
Geotextile Components
Mass per Unit Area ASTM D 5261 1 test per 100,000 ft2
Grab Strength ASTM D 4632 1 test per 100,000 ftZ
Trapezoidal Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 1 test per 100,000 fl
Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 1 test per 100,000 ft2
Permittivity ASTM D 4491 1 test per 100,000 ft2
Geocomposite
Transmissivity ASTM D 4716 1 test per 200,000 ft2
Peel Strength ASTM F 904 1 test per 200,000 ft2
Note: Testing shall be performed at a frequency of one per lot or at listed frequency, whichever
is greater. A lot is defined by ASTM 4354.
E. Conformance testing of the geocomposite materials will be conducted to ensure
compliance with both the requirements of this Section and the manufacturer's list
of minimum average roll values. As a minimum, the geotextile, geonet, and
geocomposite conformance test procedures listed in the table above shall be
performed by the Geosynthetics CQA Laboratory.
F. The CQA Consultant shall review all laboratory conformance test results and
verify compliance of the test results with the specified values in this Section prior
to deployment of the geocomposites. Any non-conformance shall be reported to
the Design Engineer, Owner and Contractor.
G. The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies and non-conformances identified by
the CQA Consultant at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. In the case of failing test results, the Owner or Contractor (i.e., party responsible
for purchasing the materials) may request that another sample from the failing
roll be retested by the Geosynthetics CQA laboratory with the manufacturer's
technical representative present during the test procedure. If the retest fails or if
Technical Specifications 02740-2 March 2011
1
Section 02740: Gcocom i c
' Joe Maggio Sport Complex, Rcv. 0
the option to retest is not exercised, then two isolation conformance samples
shall be obtained by the CQA Consultant. These isolation samples shall be taken
' from rolls, which have been determined by correlation with the manufacturer's
roll number, to have been manufactured prior to and after the failing roll. This
method for choosing isolation rolls for testing should continue until passing tests
are achieved. All rolls which fail numerically between the passing roll numbers
shall be rejected. The CQA Consultant will verify that the Contractor has
replaced all rejected rolls. The CQA Consultant shall document all actions taken
' in conjunction with geocomposite conformance failures
PART2 PRODUCT
01 GEOCOMPOSITE
2.
A. Furnish geocomposite drainage layer materials consisting of a high density
' polyethylene geonet core with a needle punched nonwoven geotextile bonded to
each side of the geonet core. The geotextile shall not be glued or bonded to the
geonet in any manner other than heat bonding. Along edges, 6 inches of the
' geotextile shall not be heat bonded to the geonet to allow connection in the field.
B. Furnish geocomposite for the gas mitigation system having properties meeting
the required property values shown in Table 02740-1. Required geocomposites
' properties shall be considered minimum average roll values (95 percent lower
confidence limit).
C. Furnish geocomposites that are stock products.
D. In addition to the property values listed in Tables 02740-1, the geocomposite
' shall:
i
ll
I
b
h
i
y
nert;
.
e c
em
ca
2. have the geonet component contain a maximum of 1 percent by weight of
' additives, fillers, or extenders (not including carbon black) and shall not
contain foaming agents or voids within the ribs of the geonet; and
3. retain their structure during handling, placement, and long-term service.
E. Furnish polymeric threads for stitching that are ultra-violet (UV) light stabilized
to at least the same requirements as the geotextile to be sewn. Furnish polyester
or polypropylene threads that have a minimum size of 2,000 denier.
F. Furnish geocomposite meeting the transmissivity requirements in Table 02740-1
as tested by an approved testing laboratory. The transmissivity of the
geocomposites for gas mitigation system construction shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4716 to the transmissivity of the facility. The testing
'
Technical Specifications 02740-3 March 2011
Section 02740: Geceomoosites
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
of the geocomposite shall be conducted using the actual boundary materials
intended for the geocomposite at the normal load of 500 psf. At the normal
loads, testing shall be conducted for a minimum period of 24 hours.
2.02 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sample and test the geotextile and geonet components of the geocomposite to
demonstrate that these materials conform to the requirements of this section.
B. Perform manufacturing quality control tests to demonstrate that the geotextile
properties conform to the values specified in Table 02740-1. Perform as a
minimum, the following manufacturing quality control tests at a minimum
frequency of once per 50,000 square feet:
Test Procedure
Mass per unit area ASTM D 5261
Grab strength ASTM D 4632
Tear strength ASTM D 4533
Puncture strength ASTM D 4833
C. Perform additional manufacturing quality control tests on the geotextile, at a
minimum frequency of once per 100,000 square feet, to demonstrate that it's
apparent opening size (per ASTM D 4751) and permittivity (per ASTM D 4491)
conform to the values specified in Table 02740-1.
D. Perform manufacturing quality control tests to demonstrate that the geonet
drainage core properties conform to the values specified in Table 02740-1.
Perform as a minimum, the following manufacturing quality control tests at a
minimum frequency of once per 50,000 square feet:
Test Procedure
Polymer density ASTM D 1505
Carbon black ASTM D 1603
Thickness ASTM D 1777
E. Perform manufacturing quality control tests, at a minimum frequency of once per
100,000 square feet, to demonstrate that the geocomposite drainage layer
conforms to the hydraulic transmissivity (per ASTM D 4716) and peel strength
(per ASTM F 904) requirements of Table 02740-1.
F. Submit quality control test certificates signed by the geotextile, geonet, and
geocomposite manufacturer quality control manager. The quality control
certificates shall include: lot, batch, and roll number and identification; and
results of manufacturing quality control tests including description of test
methods used.
Technical Specifications 02740-4 March 2011
i
Section 027407 Ge0c0MPQ$itC
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
G. Do not supply any geocomposite roll that does not comply with the
manufacturing quality control requirements.
H. If a geotextile, geonet, or geocomposite sample fails to meet the quality control
requirements of this section, sample and test rolls manufactured at the same time
or in the same lot as the failing roll. Continue to sample and test the rolls until
the extent of the failing rolls are bracketed by passing rolls. Do not supply
failing rolls.
2.03 PACKING AND LABELING
A. The geocomposite shall be supplied in rolls wrapped in relatively impermeable
and opaque protective covers.
B. Geocomposite rolls shall be labeled with the following information: Fabricator's
name; product identification; lot or batch number; roll number; and roll
dimensions.
C. Geocomposite rolls not labeled in accordance with this section or on which labels
are illegible upon delivery to the site shall be rejected and replaced with properly
' labeled rolls at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. If any special handling is required, it shall be so marked on the geotextile
' component, e.g., "This Side Up" or "This Side Against Soil To Be Retained".
2.04 TRANSPORTATION
A. Geocomposites shall be delivered to the site at least 21 days prior to the planned
deployment date to allow the CQA Consultant adequate time to perform
conformance testing on the geocomposite samples.
2.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for storage of the geocomposite at the site.
B. Handling and care of the geocomposite prior to and following installation at the
site, is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for all
damage to the materials incurred prior to final acceptance by the Owner.
C. Geocomposite shall be stored off the ground (on palates or other elevated
structures) and out of direct sunlight, and shall be protected from excessive heat
or cold, mud, dirt, and dust. Do not store geotextile rolls directly on the ground.
Any additional storage procedures required by the manufacturer shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.
1 Technical Specifications 02740-5 March 2011
Section 02240 Geocomposites
Joe Maggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. The Contractor shall not commence geocomposite installation until the CQA
Consultant completes conformance evaluation of the geocomposite and quality
assurance evaluation of previous work.
B. The Contractor shall handle the geocomposite in such a 'manner as to ensure the
geocomposite is not damaged in any way.
C. The Contractor shall take any necessary precautions to prevent damage 'to
underlying layers during placement of the geocomposite.
D. The geocomposite shall only be cut using manufacturer's recommended
procedures.
E. In the presence of wind, all geocomposite panels shall be weighted with sandbags
or the equivalent. Such sandbags shall be installed during placement and shall
remain until replaced with cover material.
F. Care shall be taken during placement of geocomposite not to entrap dirt or
excessive dust in the geocomposite that could cause clogging of the drainage
system, and/or stones that could damage the adjacent geomembrane. Care shall
be exercised when handling sandbags, to prevent rupture or damage of the
sandbags.
G. If necessary, the geocomposite shall be positioned by hand after being unrolled
over a smooth rub sheet.
H. Tools and sandbags shall not be left on, in, or under the geocomposite.
1. After unwrapping the geocomposite from its opaque cover, the geocomposite
shall not be left exposed for a period in excess of 30 days.
J. If white colored geotextile is used in the geocomposite, precautions shall be taken
against "snow blindness" of personnel.
K. Do not drive equipment directly on the geocomposite.
3.02 SEAMS AND OVERLAPS
A. The components of the geocomposite (i.e., geotextile, geonet, and geotextile) are
not bonded together at the ends and edges of the rolls. Each component will be
secured or seamed to the like component of adjoining. panels.
B. Geotextile Components:
I. The bottom layers of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of four
inches. The top layers of geotextiles shall be continuously sewn (i.e., spot
Technical specifications 02740-6 March 2011
-"1
1
1
1
1
1
Section 027407 GeocomooSites
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
sewing is not allowed) and overlapped a minimum of 6 inches prior to
seaming.
2. No horizontal seams shall be allowed higher than one-third the slope height
on slopes steeper than 10 horizontal to 1 vertical (seams shall be parallel to,
not across the slope), except as part of a patch.
3. Polymeric thread, with chemical resistance properties equal to or exceeding
those of the geotextile component, shall be used for all sewing. The seams
shall be sewn using Stitch Type 401 per Federal Standard No. 751 a. The
seam type shall be Federal Standard Type SSN-1.
C. Geonet Component:
1. The geonet shall be overlapped a minimum of 4 inches along adjacent edges
of the geocomposite and secured with white or yellow plastic or nylon cable
ties at a spacing no less than 5 ft on slopes greater than 10 percent, and 10 ft
on flat surfaces.
2. Along adjoining geocomposite panels (end to end), the geonet shall be
overlapped a minimum of 12 inches, shingled down in the direction of the
slope and secured with white or yellow plastic or nylon cable ties at a
spacing no less than 1 ft across the butt seam .
3.03 REPAIR
A. Any holes or tears in the geocomposite shall be repaired by placing a patch
extending 2 ft beyond the edges of the hole or tear. The patch shall be secured
by tying fasteners through the bottom geotextile and the geonet of the patch, and
through the top geotextile and geonet on the slope. The patch shall be secured
every 6 inches with approved tying devices. The top geotextile component of the
patch shall be heat sealed to the top geotextile of the geocomposite needing
repair. If the hole or tear width across the panel is more than 50 percent of the
width of the panel, the damaged area shall be cut out and the two portions of the
geonet shall be joined in accordance with this section.
B. All repairs shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
Technical Specifications
02740-7
March 2011
Section 0274Q7 GeocQmposites
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
TABLE 02740-1
GEOCOMPOSITE PROPERTY VALUES
Properties Qualifier Units Specified Valuesttl Test Method
Geonet Component
Polymer composition Minimum % 95 polyethylene by weight --
Polymer density Minimum g/cm3 0.93 ASTM D 1505
Carbon black content Range % 2-3 ASTM D 1603
Nominal thickness Minimum Mil 250 ASTM D 1777
Geotextile Cam nent
Type None none needle punched nonwoven --
Polymer composition Minimum % 95 polyester or polypropylene
Mass per unit area Minimum oVydz 8 ASTM D 5261
Apparent opening size Maximum mm 095 5 0.21 mm ASTM D 4751
Permittivity Minimum sec' 0.5 ASTM D 4491
Grab strength Minimum lb 180 ASTM D 4632()
Tear strength Minimum Lb 75 ASTM D 4533(')
Puncture strength Minimum Lb 75 ASTM D 4833(3)
Geocomposite
Transmissivity Minimum ms/s See Note 4 ASTM D 4716
Peel strength Minimum g/in. 500 ASTM F 904
Notes:
I. All values represent minimum average roll values.
2. Minimum value measured in machine and cross-machine direction.
3. Tension testing machine with a 1.75-inch diameter ring clamp, the steel ball being repl aced with 0.31-
inch diameter solid steel cylinder with flat tip centered within the ring clamp.
4. The design transmissivity. of the geocomposite drainage layer used for the gas mitigation system lateral
drainage layer is measured using water at 68°F with gradient of 0.1 under a compressive stress of 500 psf
for 24 hours. For the test, the geocomposite shall be sandwiched between 40-mil textured PE
geomembrane and soil actually used below the geocomposite lateral drainage layer. The minimum
required transmissivity value is 5 x 10"1 m2/s under the compressive stress of 500 psf.
[END OF SECTION]
Technical Specifications 02740-8 March 2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
SECTION 02770
GEOMEMBRANES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
B. Latest version of American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards
and other standards noted in this specification
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for review not less than 45
calendar days prior to geomembrane use.
1. Geomembrane manufacturer capabilities, including: daily production
capacity available for this Contract; and manufacturing quality control
procedures.
2. A list of 10 completed facilities for which the manufacturer has supplied a
minimum total of 10,000,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane.
Provide the following information for each facility: name, location,
purpose of facility, and date of installation; names of owner, project
manager, design engineer, and installer; and thickness and surface area of
the geomembrane provided.
3. Origin (resin supplier's name, resin production plant) and identification
(brand name, number) of the polyethylene resin used.
4. Certification of minimum average roll values (95 percent lower confidence
limit) for physical, mechanical, and environmental properties and the
corresponding test procedures for the geomembrane properties listed in
Table 02770-1 and Table 02770-2. Submit values that are specific to the
resin used in manufacture.
5. Certification that welding rod or granules are compatible with the
specifications and the resin of the geomembrane furnished for this project
6. Manufacturer warranty as specified in this section.
B. Submit to the Engineer for review not less than 30 calendar days prior to
geomembrane use the following documentation on the resin used to manufacture
the geomembrane:
' 1. Copies of quality control certificates issued by the resin supplier including
the production dates and origin of the resin used to manufacture the
geomembrane for this Contract.
Technical Specifications 02770-1 March 2011
Scetion 02770: Geomcmbranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
2. - Results of tests conducted by the manufacturer to verify the quality of the
resin used to manufacture the geomembrane rolls assigned to the project.
3. Certification that no more than 10 percent reclaimed polymer is added to
the resin during the manufacturing of the geomembrane to be used for this
project and that all reclaimed polymer (if added) is same as the parent
material.
C. Submit to the Engineer for review the following documentation on geomembrane
roll production at least 14 calendar days prior to transporting any geomembrane
to the site.
I. Manufacturing certificates for each shift's production of geomembrane,
signed by the manufacturer quality control manager.
2. Certificates shall include: roll numbers and identification; sampling
procedures; and results of manufacturer quality control tests, including
descriptions of the test methods used (the manufacturer quality control tests
to be performed are given in Part 2 of this section).
D. Submit to the Engineer for review the following information from the installer at
least 14 calendar days prior to mobilization of the installer to the site.
1.. Layout drawings showing the installation layout identifying geomembrane
panel configurations, dimensions, details, locations of seams, as well as any
variance or additional details which deviate from the Construction
Drawings. The layout drawings shall be adequate for use as a construction
plan and shall include dimensions, details, etc. The layout drawings, as
modified and/or approved by the Engineer, shall become part of the
contract.
2. Installation schedule.
3. Copy of installer's letter of approval or license by the manufacturer.
4. Installation capabilities, including: information on equipment proposed for
this project; average daily production anticipated for this project; and
quality control procedures to include quality control organization.
5. A list of 10 completed facilities for which the Installer has installed a
minimum of 5,000,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane. The
following information shall be provided for each facility: the name and
purpose of the facility, its location, and dates of installation; the names of
the owner, project manager, and geomembrane manufacturer; name and
qualifications of the supervisor of the installation crew; thickness and
Technical Specifications 02770-2 March 2011
1
11
Sectm 027?0: Ge-*tn m ranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev, 0
surface area of installed geomembrane; type of seaming and type of
seaming apparatus used; and duration of installation.
6. Resumes of the installer superintendent and quality control chief to be
assigned to this project, including dates and duration of employment.
7. Resumes of all personnel who will perform seaming operations on this
project, including dates and duration of employment.
8. Evidence that the installation crew has the following experience.
a. The superintendent shall have supervised the installation of a minimum
of 2,000,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane.
b. At least one seamer shall have experience seaming a minimum of
500,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane using the same type
of seaming apparatus to be used at this site. Seamers with such
experience will be designated "master seamers" and shall provide direct
supervision over less experienced seamers.
c. All other seaming personnel shall have seamed at least 100,000 square
feet of polyethylene geomembrane using the same type of seaming
apparatus to be used at this site. Personnel who have seamed less than
1 100,000 square feet of seams shall be allowed to seam only under the
direct supervision of the master seamer or Superintendent.
' E. Submit to the Engineer for review at least 14 days prior to geomembrane
placement, a certificate of calibration less than 12 months old for the field
tensiometer. Tensiometer shall be calibrated within one year of date of test.
Calibration shall be traceable to national or industry recognized standards where
possible.
F. Submit subgrade acceptance certificates, signed by the Installer, for each area to
' be covered by the geomembrane prior to that area being covered by
geomembrane.
G. Within 14 calendar days of completion of the geomembrane installation, submit
to the Engineer the executed installation warranty as specified in this section.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. The construction of the geomembrane component of the gas mitigation system
will be monitored by the CQA Consultant.
' B. The Contractor shall be aware of the activities required of the CQA Consultant
and shall account for these activities in the construction schedule.
Technical Specifications 027703 Match 2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
C. The CQA Consultant will perform material conformance testing of geomembrane
materials and installation quality assurance testing of the geomembrane seams.
D. The CQA Consultant shall ensure that representative geomembrane conformance
samples are obtained at the specified frequency and forwarded to the
Geosynthetics CQA Laboratory for testing. Geomembrane conformance samples
shall be taken across the entire width of the roll and shall not include the first 3 ft
of material. Unless otherwise directed by the Design Engineer, samples shall be
3 ft long by the roll width. The required minimum geomembrane conformance
sampling frequencies are provided in the table below. The CQA Consultant shall
mark the machine direction on the samples with an arrow and affix a label, tag,
or otherwise mark each sample with the following information: date sampled;
project number; lot/batch number and roll number; conformance sample number;
and CQA personnel identification.
TEST NAME TEST METHOD MINIMUM TESTING
FREQUENCY")
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 Method B I test per 100,000 ft2
or ASTM D 1505
Thickness ASTM D 5199 or D 5994 1 test per 100,000 ft2
Tensile Strength at Break ASTM D 6693 1 test per 100,000 W
Elongation at Break ASTM D 6693 1 test per 100,000 If
Carbon Black Content ASTM D 1603 or D 4218 1 test per 100,000 ft2
Carbon Black Dispersion ASTM D 5596 1 test er 100,000 ft
Note: Testing shall be performed at a frequency of one per lot or at listed frequency, whichever
is greater. A lot is defined by ASTM 4354.
E. Conformance testing of the geomembrane materials will be conducted to ensure
compliance with both the values specified in this Section and the Manufacturer's
list of minimum average roll values. As a minimum, the geomembrane
conformance test procedures listed in the table above shall be performed by the
Geosynthetics CQA Laboratory.
F. In the case of failing test results, the Contractor may request that another sample
from the failing roll be retested by the Geosynthetics CQA Laboratory with the
Manufacturer's technical representative present during the test procedure. If the
retest fails or if the option to retest is not exercised, then two isolation
conformance samples shall be obtained by the CQA Consultant. These isolation
samples shall be taken from rolls, which have been determined by correlation
with the manufacturer's roll number, to have been manufactured prior to and after
the failing roll. This method for choosing isolation rolls for testing should
Technical Specifications 02770-4 March 2011
7-
L
Section 02770' Geomembranes
' Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
continue until passing tests are achieved. All rolls that fall numerically between
' the passing roll numbers shall be rejected. The CQA Consultant will verify that
the Contractor has replaced all rejected rolls. The CQA Consultant shall
document all actions taken in conjunction with geomembrane conformance
failures.
G. During geomembrane seaming activities, destructive seam samples shall be
obtained as outlined in Part 3.04 of this Section. The required minimum
' geomembrane sampling frequencies for geomembrane seams are provided in the
table below.
' TEST NAME TEST METHOD MINIMUM TESTING
FREQUENCY
Peel Strength ASTM D 639211.31 1 test every 500 ft
Shear Strength ASTM D 639212.31 1 test every 500 ft
Vacuum Testing Welded Seams - 100 percent of extrusion welds
ercent of fusion welds
- 100
T
ld
d S
ti
i
P
W
p
e
e
eams
r
ressure
es
ng
A
Notes:
(1) For peel adhesion, seam separation shall not extend more than 10 percent into the seam interface.
'resting shall be discontinued when the sample has visually yielded.
(2) For shear tests, the sheet shall yield before failure of the seam.
(3) For either test, sample failure shall be a Film Tear Bond (FTB).
' H. Destructive seam testing of the geomembrane materials will be conducted during
geomembrane installation to ensure compliance with the requirements of this
Section. The purpose of this testing is to evaluate seam strength. As a minimum,
the geomembrane seam test procedures listed in the table above shall be
performed by the Geosynthetics CQA- Laboratory. The following procedures
shall apply whenever a sample fails a destructive test, whether that test was
conducted in the field (see Part 3.04 of this Section) or by the Geosynthetics
CQA Laboratory. The CQA Consultant will monitor that the Installer follows
one of the two options below:
I. the Installer can reconstruct the seam (e.g., remove the old seam and re-
seam) between any two passed destructive test locations or between points
' judged by the CQA Consultant to represent conditions of the failed seam
(e.g., a tie-in seam or a seam made by the apparatus and/or operator used in
the failing seam); or
2. the Installer can trace the welding path to an intermediate location a
minimum of 10 R from the point of the failed test in each direction and take
'
Technical Specifications 02770-5 March 2011
Section 027707 Geornerribranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
a small sample for additional field testing in accordance with the destructive
test procedure at each location. If these additional isolation samples pass
the field test, then full laboratory samples are taken at both locations. If
these laboratory samples meet the specified strength criteria, then the seam
is reconstructed between these locations. If either sample fails, then the
process is repeated to establish the zone in which the seam should be
reconstructed or repaired.
Note: All failed seams must be bounded by two locations from which samples
passing laboratory destructive tests have been taken or the entire seam is
reconstructed and retested. In cases exceeding 150 ft of reconstructed seam, a
sample taken from the zone in which the seam has been reconstructed must pass
destructive testing. Repairs shall be made in accordance with this section. The
CQA Consultant shall document all actions taken in conjunction with destructive
test failures
All conformance test results shall be reviewed by the CQA Consultant prior to
deployment of geomembrane. All destructive seam test results shall be reviewed
by the CQA Consultant during geomembrane seaming activities. Any non-
conformance of the material's properties with the requirements of this Section
shall be reported to the Design Engineer, Owner and Contractor.
J. The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies and non-conformances identified by
the CQA Consultant at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. With respect to appurtenances, the CQA Consultant shall monitor that:
installation of the geomembrane in appurtenant areas, and connection of
geomembrane to appurtenances have been made in accordance with the
Construction Drawings and requirements of this section;
2. extreme care is taken by the Installer when seaming around appurtenances
since neither non-destructive nor destructive testing may be feasible in
these areas; and
3. the geomembrane has not been visibly damaged when making connections
to appurtenances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RESIN
A. Provide the geomembrane manufactured from new, first-quality polyethylene
resin. Do not add reclaimed polymer to the resin. The use of polymer recycled
during the manufacturing process is permitted if performed with appropriate
Technical Specifications 02770-6 March 2011
iI
Section 02770: Geomembranes
' Joc DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rcv. 0
cleanliness and if the recycled polymer during the manufacturing process does
1 not exceed 10 percent by weight of the total polymer weight.
B. Linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE) resin used for the gas mitigation
system geomembrane shall have the following properties:
' 1. Density (max.): 0.926 (ASTM D 792 Method B, or ASTM D 1505)
2. Melt Index (max.): 1.0 g/10 min (ASTM D 1238)
2.02 GEOMEMBRANE PROPERTIES
A. Furnish 40-mil smooth LLDPE geomembrane having properties that comply with
' the required values shown in Table 02770-1 and Table 02770-2.
th
b
t
ddi
i
f
i
h
a
geomem
rane
:
t
on,
urn
s
B. In a
1. contains a maximum of 1 percent by weight of additives, fillers, or
extenders not including carbon black;
2. does not have striations, pinholes, bubbles, blisters, nodules, undispersed
raw materials, or any sign of contamination by foreign matter on the surface
' or in the interior;
3. is free of holes, blisters, modules, undispersed raw materials, or any sign of
contamination by foreign matter; and
4. is manufactured in a single layer (thinner layers shall not be welded
together to produce the final required thickness).
2.03 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL
A. Resin:
1. Sample and test resin at a minimum frequency of one test per rail car to
demonstrate that the resin complies with the requirements of this section.
Perform tests on resin after the addition of additives to the virgin resin.
uirements of this section
ets the re
t th
i
if
i
iti
th
C
.
q
e res
n me
y
n wr
ng
a
ert
2. Do not use any noncomplying resin.
B. Rolls:
1. Continuously monitor for geomembrane defects during manufacture.
Geomembranes shall be subjected to continuous spark testing by the
Manufacturer at the factory.
2. Do not supply geomembrane that exhibits any defects.
3. Regularly monitor for geomembrane thickness during manufacture.
4. Do not supply geomembrane that fails to meet the specified thickness.
Technical Specifications 02770-7 March 2011
Section 02770= Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Spott Complex, Rev. 0
5. Sample and test the geomembrane, to demonstrate that its properties
conform to the values specified in Tables 02770-1 and 02770-2. Perform
the manufacture quality control tests at the following minimum frequencies
with minimum of one test per lot:
Test Frequency
Thickness Every Roll
Specific gravity 200,000 lb
Yield strength 20,000 lb
Yield elongation 20,000 lb
Break strength 20,000 lb
Break elongation 20,000 lb
Carbon black 45,000 lb
Carbon black dispersion 45,000 lb
Tear resistance 45,000 lb
Puncture resistance 45,000 lb
Oxidative induction time (OJT) 200,000 lb
6. If a geomembrane sample fails to meet the quality control requirements of
this Section, sample and test rolls manufactured, in the same resin batch, or
at the same time, as the failing roll. Continue to sample and test the rolls
until the extent of the failing rolls are bracketed by passing rolls. Do not
supply any failing rolls.
T Provide a written certification that the geomembrane meets the material
requirements specified in GRI-GM17 for the following properties using the
indicated test procedures. Provide written certification that these tests have
been performed on geomembrane rolls having the same formulation as the
geomembrane rolls that will be delivered for the project.
Test Procedure
Oven aging ASTM D 5721
UV resistance ASTM D 5885
2% Modulus ASTM D 5323
Axi-Symmetric Break Resistance Strain ASTM D 5617
C. Permit the CQA Consultant and/or Engineer to visit the manufacturing plant for
project specific visits. If possible, such visits will be prior to, or during, the
manufacturing of the geomembrane rolls for this project.
Technical Specifications 02770-8 March 2011
1
Section 02770: Geotn r ne
Joe Maggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
2.04 LABELING
A. Label the geomembrane rolls with the following information: thickness of the
material; length and width of the roll; name of Manufacturer; product
identification; lot number; and roll number.
B. Geomembrane rolls not labeled in accordance with this Section or on which
labels are illegible upon arrival at the site will be rejected and replaced at no
r additional expense to the Owner.
2.05 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver geomembranes to the site at least 14 calendar days prior to the planned
deployment date to allow the CQA Consultant adequate time to perform
conformance testing on the geomembrane samples.
B. Provide proper handling and storage of the geomembrane at the site. Protect the
geomembrane from excessive heat or cold, dirt, puncture, cutting, or other
damaging or deleterious conditions. Provide any additional storage procedures
1 required by the Manufacturer.
C. Store geomembrane rolls on pallets or other elevated structures. Do not store
geomembrane rolls directly on the ground surface. Do not store more than 3
' rolls high.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FAMILIARIZATION
A. Prior to implementing any of the work described in this section, the Contractor
shall become thoroughly familiar with all portions of the work falling within this
section.
B. Inspection:
' 1. Prior to implementing any of the work in this section, the Contractor shall
carefully inspect the installed work of all other sections and verify that all
work is complete to the point where the installation of this section may
' properly commence without adverse impact.
2. If the Contractor has any concerns regarding the installed work of other
sections, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing.
r Failure to inform the Engineer in writing or continuance of installation of
the geomembrane will be construed as the Contractor's acceptance of the
related work of all other sections.
I Technical Specifications 02770-9 Macch2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
3.02 SUBGRADE SURFACE PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall provide certification in writing that the surface on which the
geomembrane will be installed is acceptable. This certification of acceptance
shall be given to the CQA Consultant prior to commencement of geomembrane
installation in the area under consideration.
B. Special care shall be taken to maintain the prepared surface.
C. No geomembrane shall be placed onto areas of standing water.
D. Any damage to the prepared subgrade caused by installation activities shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense.
3.03 GEOMEMBRANE DEPLOYMENT
A. General:
1. Smooth geomembrane will be used as indicated on the Construction
Drawings.
2. The Contractor shall produce layout drawings prior to geomembrane
deployment. These drawings shall indicate the geomembrane
configuration, dimensions, details, locations of seams, etc. The layout
drawings must be approved by the Engineer prior to the installation of any
geomembranes. The layout drawings, as modified and/or approved by the
Engineer, shall become part of these specifications.
3. Do not deploy geomembrane until the panel layout drawings are approved
by the Engineer.
4. Do not deploy a geomembrane panel in an area until the CQA Consultant
has been provided with a certificate of subgrade acceptance for that area.
5. Do not deploy geomembranes until CQA Consultant completes
conformance evaluation of the geomembrane and performance evaluation of
previous work, including evaluation of Contractor's survey results for
previous work.
6. Deploy each geomembrane panel in accordance with the approved layout
drawings.
B. Field Panel Identification:
I . A geomembrane field panel is a roll or a portion of roll cut in the field.
2. Give each field panel an identification code (number or letter-number).
This identification code shall be agreed upon by the CQA Consultant and
the Installer.
Technical Specifications 02770-10 March 2011
Section 02770: Geomemixanes
Joe DiMaggio Spon Complex, Rev. 0
C. Field Panel Placement:
1. Place each geomembrane panel one at a time and seam each panel
immediately after its placement.
2. Do not place geomembrane panels when the ambient temperature is below
40° Fahrenheit (F), unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. For cold
weather (<401F) deployment, use the additional procedures authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
3. Do not place geomembranes during any precipitation, in the presence of
heavy fog or dew, in an area of ponded water, or in the presence of high
wind. .
4. Ensure that:
a. No vehicular traffic directly on the geomembrane.
b. Equipment used does not damage the geomembrane by handling,
trafficking, or leakage of hydrocarbons (i.e., fuels).
c. Personnel working on the geomembrane do not smoke, bring glass onto
the geomembrane, or engage in other activities that could damage the
geomembrane.
d. The method used to unroll the panels does not scratch or crimp the
geomembrane and does not damage the supporting soil.
e. The method used to place the panels minimizes wrinkles (especially
differential wrinkles between adjacent panels). Adjust or repair any
area of geomembrane wrinkles where the wrinkle height, measured
perpendicular to the slope during the hottest portion of the day, is more
than 4 inches.
f. The method used to place the panels does not cause the panels to lift up
or trampoline during the coolest portion of the day.
g. The geomembrane is anchored or weighted with sandbags, or the
equivalent, to prevent damage or uplift from wind. Install sufficient
anchoring or weighting to prevent uplift and maintain such system until
overlying material is placed.
5. Replace any field panel or portion thereof that becomes damaged (torn,
twisted, or crimped). Remove from the work area damaged panels or
portions of damaged panels.
D. Do not install geomembrane between one hour before sunset and one hour after
sunrise unless approved by the Engineer.
Technical Specifications Uzi /U-I I March 2011
Scction 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev_ 0
3.04 FIELD SEAMING
A. Personnel shall be experienced as specified in this section. Do not perform
seaming unless a "master seamer" and the CQA Consultant are on-site.
B. Orient seams parallel to the line of maximum slope (i.e., oriented down, not
across, the slope). Minimize the number of seams in corners and at odd-shaped
geometric locations. Do not locate seams at an area of potential stress
concentration.
C. Weather Conditions for Seaming:
I. Do not seam geomembrane at ambient temperatures below 40°F or above
104°F, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. For cold (<40°F) or
hot (104°F) weather seaming, use the additional procedures authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
2. Measure ambient temperatures between 0 to 6 inches above the
geomembrane surface.
3. In all cases the geomembrane seam areas shall be dry and protected from
wind.
D. Overlapping and Temporary Bonding:
1. Sufficiently overlap geomembrane panels for welding and to allow peel
tests to be performed on the seam. Any seams that cannot be destructively
tested because of insufficient overlap are failing seams.
2. Control the temperature of the air at the nozzle of heat bonding apparatus
such that the geomembrane is not damaged.
E. Seam Preparation:
1. Prior to seaming, clean the seam area and ensure that the area to be bonded
is free of moisture, dust, dirt, debris of any kind, and foreign material.
2. If seam overlap grinding is required, complete the process according to the
Manufacturer's instructions or within 60 minutes of the seaming operation.
Do not grind to a depth that exceeds ten percent of the geomembrane
thickness. Grinding marks shall not appear beyond 0.25 inch of the
extrudate after it is placed.
3. Align seams with the fewest possible number of wrinkles and "fishmouths".
F. General Seaming Requirements:
1. Extend seams to the outside edge of panels to be placed in the anchor
trench.
Technical Specifications 02770-12 March 2011
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
Section 027707 mflMmembram
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
2. If required, place a firm substrate such as a flat board or similar hard
surface directly under the seam overlap to achieve proper support.
3. Cut fishmouths or wrinkles at the seam overlaps along the ridge of the
wrinkle to achieve a flat overlap. Seam the cut fishmouths or wrinkles and
patch any portion where the overlap is less than 6 inches with an oval or
round patch of geomembrane that extends a minimum of 6 inches beyond
the cut in all directions.
4. Place the electric generator used for power supply to the welding machines
outside the area to be lined or mount it on soft tires such that no damage
occurs to the geomembrane. Properly ground the electric generator. Place
a smooth insulating plate or fabric beneath the hot welding apparatus after
use.
G. Seaming Process:
1. Approved processes for field seaming are extrusion welding and fusion
welding. The primary method of welding shall be fusion. Seaming
equipment shall not damage the geomembrane. Use only geomembrane
Manufacturer-approved equipment.
2. Extrusion Equipment and Procedures:
a. Maintain at least one spare operable seaming apparatus on site.
b. Equip extrusion welding apparatus with gauges giving the temperature
in the apparatus and at the nozzle.
c. Prior to beginning a seam, purge the extruder until all heat-degraded
extrudate has been removed from the barrel. Whenever the extruder is
stopped, purge the barrel of all heat-degraded extrudate.
3. Fusion Equipment and Procedures:
a. Maintain at least one spare operable seaming apparatus on site.
b. Fusion-welding apparatus shall be automated self-propelled devices
equipped with gauges giving the applicable temperatures and pressures.
c. Fusion-welding apparatus shall produce a double-track seam.
d. Abrade the edges of cross seams to a smooth incline (top and bottom)
prior to extrusion welding.
H. Trial Seams:
1. Make trial seams on excess pieces of geomembrane to verify that seaming
conditions are adequate. Conduct trial seams on the same material to be
Technical Specifications 02770-13 March 2011
Section 027707 Geomemhrenes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
installed and under similar field conditions as production seams. Conduct
trial seaming at the beginning of each seaming period, and at least once
each every five hours, for each seaming apparatus used that day prior to
seaming. Also, each seamer shall make at least one trial seam per day, for
each day that seaming is performed by that seamer. Conduct trial seaming
under the same conditions as the actual seaming. Prepare trial seams that
are at least 15 feet long by 1 foot wide (after seaming) with the seam
centered lengthwise for fusion equipment and at least 3. feet long by I foot
wide for extrusion equipment. Prepare seam overlap as indicated in the
"Overlapping and Temporary Bonding" Article of this Part.
1.
2. Cut four specimens, each 1.0 inch wide, from the trial seam sample. Test
two specimens in shear and two in peel, using a field tensiometer. The test
specimens shall not fail in the seam. If a specimen fails, repeat the entire
operation. If the additional specimen fails, do not accept the seaming
apparatus or seamer until the deficiencies are corrected and two consecutive
successful trial seams are achieved. A seamer may start production
seaming prior to testing of the trial seams. In the event the trial seam fails,
all production seams by the seamer are failed seams.
Nondestructive Seam Continuity Testing:
I. Nondestructively test field seams for continuity over their full length.
Perform continuity testing as the seaming work progresses, not at the
completion of field seaming. Complete any required repairs in accordance
with the "Defects and Repairs" Article of this Part. Apply the following
procedures:
a. use vacuum testing for extrusion welds; and
b. use air pressure testing for double-track fusion seams.
2. Vacuum Testing:
a. Use the following equipment:
A vacuum box assembly consisting of a stiff housing, a transparent
viewing window, a soft neoprene gasket attached to the bottom,
port hole or valve assembly, and a vacuum gauge.
ii. A system for applying 5 pounds per square inch (psi) gauge
suction to the box.
iii. A bucket of soapy solution and applicator.
b. Follow these procedures:
Technical Specifications 02770-14 March 2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
3
i. Energize the vacuum pump and reduce the tank pressure to 5-
±1 psi gauge.
ii. Wet an area of the geomembrane seam larger than the vacuum box
with the soapy solution.
iii. Place the box over the wetted area.
iv. Close the bleed valve and open the vacuum valve.
V. Ensure that a leak tight seal is created.
vi. Examine the geomembrane through the viewing window for the
presence of soap bubbles for not less than 20 seconds.
vii. If, no bubbles appear after 20 seconds, close the vacuum valve and
open the bleed valve, move the box over the next adjoining area
with a minimum 3 inch overlap, and repeat the process.
viii. Mark all areas where soap bubbles appear with a marker that will
not damage the geomembrane and repair in accordance with the
"Defects and Repairs" Article of this Part.
Air Pressure Testing:
a. Use the following equipment:
i. an air pump (manual or motor driven) or air reservoir, equipped
with a pressure gauge, capable of generating and sustaining a
pressure between 25 and 30 pounds per square inch;
ii. a rubber hose with fittings and connections; and
iii. a hollow needle, or other approved pressure feed device..
b. Follow these procedures:
L Seal both ends of the seam to be tested.
ii. Insert needle, or other approved pressure feed device, into the
tunnel created by the fusion weld.
iii. Insert a protective cushion between the air pump and the
geomembrane.
iv. Energize the air pump to a pressure between 25 and 30 pounds per
square inches, close valve, and sustain the pressure for not less
than 5 minutes.
Technical Specifications 02770-15 March 2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
V. If loss of pressure exceeds 3 pounds per square inches, or does not
stabilize, locate faulty area and repair in accordance with the
"Defects and Repairs" Article of this Part.
vi. Cut opposite end of air channel from pressure gauge and observe
release of pressure to ensure air channel is not blocked.
vii. Remove needle, or other approved pressure feed device, and seal
both ends in accordance with the "Defects and Repairs" Article of
this Part.
J
Destructive Testing:
1. Perform destructive seam tests to evaluate seam strength and integrity.
Perform destructive testing as the seaming work progresses, not at the
completion of field seaming. Destructive seam test shall meet the seam
properties presented in Table 02770-2.
1 Sampling and Testing:
a. Collect destructive test samples at a minimum average frequency of one
test location per 500 feet of seam length and at additional locations of
suspected nonperformance. The CQA Consultant will select test
locations, including locations with evidence of excess geomembrane
crystallinity, contamination, offset seams, or any other evidence of
inadequate seaming.
b. Cut samples at the locations designated by the CQA Consultant at the
time the locations are designated. Number each sample and identify the
sample number and location on the panel layout drawing. Immediately
repair all holes in the geomembrane resulting from the destructive seam
sampling in accordance with the repair procedures described in the
"Defects and Repairs" Article of this Part. Test the continuity of the
new seams in the repaired areas according to "Nondestructive Seam
Continuity Testing" Article of this Part.
c. Cut two strips l inch wide and 12 inch long with the seam centered
parallel to the width from either side of the sample location. Test the
two 1-inch wide strips in the field tensiometer in the peel mode. The
CQA Consultant may request an additional test in the shear mode. If
these samples pass the field test, prepare a laboratory sample at least l
foot wide by 3.5 feet long with the seam centered lengthwise. Cut the
laboratory sample into three parts and distribute as follows:
i. one portion 1 foot long to the Installer;
Technical Specifications 02770-16 March 2011
Ski n 02770: Geomem ranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
ii. one portion 1.5 feet long to the CQC Consultant for testing; and
iii. one portion 1 foot long to the Engineer for archival storage.
3. In the event of failing field or laboratory test results, the Contractor may
reconstruct the entire seam between two passing destructive tests;
otherwise, the CQA Consultant will identify the extent of the
nonconforming area. Obtain additional samples for testing as requested by
the CQA Consultant.
K. Defects and Repairs:
I . Inspect the geomembrane before and after seaming for evidence of defects,
holes, blisters, undispersed raw materials, and any sign of contamination by
foreign matter. The surface of the geomembrane shall be clean at the time
of inspection. Sweep or wash the geomembrane surface if surface
contamination inhibits inspection.
2. Test each suspect location, both in seam and non-seam areas, using the
methods described in the "Nondestructive Seam Continuity Testing" Article
of this Part. Repair each location that fails nondestructive testing.
3. Cut and reseam wrinkles not conforming with this Part. Test the seams thus
produced like any other seam.
4. Repair Procedures:
a. Repair any portion of the geomembrane exhibiting a flaw, or failing a
destructive or nondestructive test. Use the most appropriate of the
available procedures:
i. patching, used to repair large holes, tears, undispersed raw
materials, and contamination by foreign matter;
ii. abrading and reseaming, used to repair small sections of extruded
seams;
iii. spot seaming, used to repair minor, localized flaws;
iv. capping, used to repair long lengths of failed seams;
v. topping, used to repair areas of inadequate seams, which have an
exposed edge less than 4 inches in length; and
vi. removing bad seam and replacing with a strip of new material
seamed into place (used with long lengths of fusion seams).
b. When making repairs, satisfy the following:
h 20
1
1
Technical Specifications 02770-17 Marc
Section 02770: 0comembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
i. abrade surfaces of the geomembrane that are to be repaired no
more than 60 minutes prior to the repair;
ii. clean and dry all geomembrane surfaces immediately prior to
repair;
iii. only use approved seaming equipment;
iv. extend patches or caps at least 6 inches beyond the edge of the
defect, and round corners of patches to a radius of at least 3 inches;
and
v. cut the geomembrane below large caps to avoid potential for water
or gas collection between the two sheets.
5. Repair Verification:
a. Test each repair using the methods described in the "Nondestructive
Seam Continuity Testing" Article of this Part. Repairs that pass the
nondestructive test are adequate unless the CQA Consultant elects to
also perform destructive tests. Re-repair and retest failed tests.
3.05 MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH THE GEOMEMBRANE
A. Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the geomembrane during the
installation of other components of the foundation and gas mitigation system.
B. Do not drive equipment directly on the geomembrane.
3.06 SURVEY CONTROL
A. Survey the installed geomembrane so that an as-built drawing can be developed
to show panel seams, repairs and destructive sample locations.
3.07 GEOMEMBRANE ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall retain all ownership and responsibility for the geomembrane
until accepted by the Owner.
B. The geomembrane shall be accepted by the Owner when:
1. the installation is finished;
2. all documentation of installation is completed including the CQA
Consultant's final report; and
3. verification of the adequacy of all field seams and repairs, including
associated testing, is complete.
Technical Specifications 02770-18 March 2011
Section 02770: Genmembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
3.08 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect all prior work and all
materials and completed work of other sections.
B. In the event of damage, the Contractor shall make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no additional cost to Owner.
1
I Technical Specifications 02770-19 March 2011
Section 02770: Geomembranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
TABLE 02770-1
REQUIRED 40-mil LLDPE GEOMEMBRANE PROPERTIES
Properties (2) Qualifiers Units 1'1 Specified Values Test Method
Physical Properties
Thickness Nominal mils 40 ASTM D 5199
Specific Gravity Minimum N/A 0.939 ASTM D 792 (Method B) or
Maximum ASTM D 1505
Carbon Black Content Range % 2-3 ASTM D 1603 or D 4218
Carbon Black Dispersion N/A none 9 of 10 in Category 1 or 2 ASTM D 5596
and all in Category 1, 2, or 3
Mechanical Properties
Tensile Properties
Break Strength Minimum lb/in 152 ASTM 6693
Break Elongation Minimum % 800 ASTM D 6693
ASTM D 1004
Tear Resistance Minimum lb 22
Die C Puncture
Puncture Resistance Minimum lb 56 ASTM D 4833
Environmental Properties
Oxidative Induction Time (OIT) Minimum min 100 / 400 ASTM D 3895//)5885
Notes;
1. % = percent
hrs = hours
min = minutes
lb/in = pounds per inch
lb = pound
N/A = Not Applicable
2. See Paragraph 2.03 for required MQC test frequencies.
Technical Specifications 02770-20 March 2011
Sectinn-02770: Geomemhranes
Joe DiMaggio Sport Complex, Rev. 0
TABLE 02770-2
REQUIRED 40-mil LLDPE GEOMEMBRANE SEAM PROPERTIES
Properties Qualifiers units 131 Specified Values (4)
.I Test Method
Shear Stren tg h c')
Fusion Minimum lb/in 60 ASTM D 6392
Extrusion Minimum Win 60 ASTM D 6392
Peel Streng h
FTB (Z)
Fusion Minimum Win 50 ASTM D 6392
Extrusion Minimum lb/in 44 ASTM D 6392
Notes:
1. Also called "Bonded Seam Strength". Value is at material yield point and failure shall occur in material
outside of seam area.
2. FTB = Film Tear Bond. (Maximum 10 percent seam separation).
3. lb/in ? pounds per inch.
4. Values listed for peel and shear strengths are for 4 out of 5 test specimen. The seam strength of the 5`h
specimen can be as low as 80% of the listed values.
[END OF SECTION]
Technical Specifications 02770-21 March 2011
t
1?
L-1
MYC sierra monitor corporation
Model 20OX Series
Gas Sensor Monitors
Model 2001 - Combustible Gas
Model 2003 - Hydrogen Sulfide
Model 2006 - Carbon Monoxide
The Model20OX Series are compact, solid-
state, fixed-installation single alarm monitors
designed for continuous area monitoring of
Combustible Gas, Hydrogen SuNide, or Car-
bon Monoxide.
The Model 20OX Series consists of three separate gas
monitors, Model 2001 for Combustibles Model 2003
Hydrogen Sulfide and Model 2006 for Carbon Monoxide.
A red LED (light-emitting diode) and audible alarm acti-
vate when the concentration of gas exceeds the factory-
set (and user-adjustable) level. Agreen LED indicator
on the monitor shows that power is connected and it is
a safe condition.
The standard configuration has a buzzer and normally
operating open relay, a fail-safe normally operating closed
relay is field selectable.
All the electronic circuitry needed to operate the moni-
tor, except the DC input power, is contained in a com-
pact unit. It may be mounted in any orientation. For a
single-monitor installation and a local alarm, the accom-
panying AC-to-DC power supply may be plugged into a
standard AC source. The monitors accept 9 - 24 VDC.
A solid-state semiconductor-type sensor and associated
electronic circuitry ensure trouble-free, long-term opera-
tion. There are no pumps, filters or chemical cells to
replace or maintain. Except periodic calibration to verify
the alarm setting, no attention is required after installa-
tion. The user may adjust the alarm level by using a
different calibration gas concentration.
A sensor self-check feature will flash the LEDs on and
off alternatively and sound an interrupted tone as a warn-
ing should the sensor fail (open circuit).
Remote Alarm Available
If a remote alarm is desired, the Model 2102 Dual Chan-
nel Alarm Panel can be connected up to 500 feet from
the monitors.
Features
¦ Self-check feature signals sensor failure
¦ Optional normally operating closed relay
¦ No chemical cells to replace, no periodic
maintenace other than routine caaibration
¦ All the electronic circuitry needed to operate
the monitor contained compact unit, power
supily plugs into standard AC source
Benefits
¦ Reliable operation
¦ Fail-safe configuration
¦ Maintenance free operation
¦ Quick easy installation and connection to
alarm panel
Sierra Monitor Corporation 1991 Tarob Court Milpitas, CA 95035 (408) 262.6611 (800) 7274377 Fax: (408) 262.9042
Semiconductor-Type Sensor
Gas Sensor Monitors
Model 2001 Combustibles Gas Monitor
The Model 2001 can detect a wide range of combus-
tibles. Typical applications include combustible gas
monitoring in basements nearwaste dumps, manhole,
tanks, parking garages and vehicle maintenance facili-
ties, laboratories, chemical plants, and more.
Model 2003 Hydrogen Sulfide Monitor
The Model 2003 can be used in such typical applica-
tions as waste water treatment plants, laboratories and
chemical plants.
Model 2006 Carbon Monoxide Monitor
The Model 2006 Carbon Monoxide Gas Sensor Mod-
ule can be used to provide an early warning of CO
accumulation in tanks, laboratories, chemical plants,
parking garages, vehicle test facilities and more.
SPECIFICATIONS
INDICATORS:
Visual:
Audible:
SENSOR TYPE:
RANGE;
Model 2001
Model 2003
Model 2006
FACTORYALARM
SETPOIN7
Model 2001
Model 2003
Model 2006
INPUT
OUTPUT: 0.5 AMP dry contact. 100 VDC, 130 VAC
Green LED for Monitor "ON"/Safe Nominal 5 volts DC, source 25 mA, SAFE and
Red LED for Alarm ALARM signals 70 dB buzer.
LEDs oscillate on/off for sensor failure TTL interface to Model 2102 Alarm Panel is
user configurable.
Sustained alarm tone for as long
as gas is present. Interrupted tone or sensor RESPONSETIME:
failure. Model 2001 Less than 30 seconds
Solid-State Metal Oxide Semiconductor Model 2003 For 50 ppm alarm, if 50 ppm H2S is present,
1-4 min. If a250 ppm H2S is present, 30-60
(at 50% relative humidity) seconds.
300-2,000 ppm Hydrogen
500-10,000 ppm Methane Model 2006 Less than 30 seconds
10-50 ppm Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE: None, other than routine calibration
50-500 ppm Carbon Monoxide (CO)
OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
RANGE:
1000 ppm Methane
ENCLOSURE
50 ppm H2S MATERIAL:
100 ppm CO SIZE:
9 - 24VOC (±1 V), 250 mA
Plug-in 120 VAC AC/DC Power Supply is WEIGHT:.
provided
APPROVAL:
ay66
1.176 n760
O
t1 ?
O
2S A° ac 7AO1
. ter. r,.., ftu
aee a
aaa aaa
000 "a
0.177 W1.11G1Mrt7D HDI.B!
-40Fto158°F
-201Cto70°C
Aluminum
3.7x2.2x1.1 in. (9.4 x 5.7 x 2.8 cm)
3.8 oz (108 g)
UL 60950
ORDERING INFORMATION
Combustible Gas 2001-00
Hydrogen Sulfide 2003-00
Carbon Monoxide 2006-00
G STE
C (9) us g9o°' 1
?<nr t
Sierra Monitor Corporation 1991 Tarob Ct. Milpitas, CA 95035 (408) 262-6611 800-7274377 FAX: (408) 262-9042
Visit our Web site at. www-sierramonitor--com E-Mail: sierra(pslerramonitor com
Rev. A2-8-23-0702007by Sierra Monitor Corporation
1
SECTION 03410
STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of structural precast concrete work (SPC-Cons) is shown on drawings
and in schedules.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of following codes,
specifications and standards, except as otherwise indicated.
I . ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2_ ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".
4. Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants
and Production of Precast Concrete Products".
B. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS: Firms which have (5) years successful experience
in fabrication of precast concrete units similar to units required for this project will be
acceptable. Fabricator must have sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without causing delay in work.
I. Fabricator must be producer member of the Prestressed
Concrete Institute (PCI) and/or participate in its Plant Certification Program.
C_ FABRICATION QUALIFICATIONS: Produce precast concrete units at fabricating
plant engaged in manufacturing of similar units.
D. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES: Install precast units without exceeding following
tolerance limits.
1. Variation from Position in Plan: Plus or minus 1/2" maximum at any location.
2. Offset in alignment of adjacent members at any joint: 1/16" in any 10' run; 1/4"
maximum.
[l
1
03410-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. GENERAL: Submit following items as specified in Section (01340)_
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications and instructions for
manufactured materials and products. Include manufacturer's certifications and
laboratory test reports.
C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing complete information for
fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. Indicate member dimensions and
cross-section; location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement
and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection.
1. Provide layout, dimensions, and identification of each precast unit corresponding
to sequence and procedure of installation- Indicate welded connections by AWS
standard symbols. Detail inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories
and construction at openings in precast units.
2. Provide location and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in
other construction. Furnish templates if required for accurate placement.
1 Include erection procedure for precast units and sequence of erection.
4. Provide manufacturer's complete design calculations prepared by a registered
engineer, if requested by Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. DELIVER precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to
assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site in a manner to ensure against
cracking, distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are
visible. Lift and support units at designated lift points.
B. DELIVER ANCHORAGE ITEMS which are to be embedded in other construction
before start of such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions as required for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK:
A. ACCURATELY CONSTRUCT FORMS, mortar-tight, of sufficient strength to
withstand pressures due to concrete placing operations, temperature changes. Maintain
formwork to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions
indicated, within specified fabrication tolerances.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS:
A. REINFORCING BARS: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
03410-2
B. LOW-ALLOY STEEL REINFORCING BARS: ASTM A 706.
C. GALVANIZED REINFORCING BARS ASTM A 615 bars, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and bending, complying with ASTM A 151
D. STEEL WIRE: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn, steel.
E. WELDED WIRE FABRIC: ASTM A 185.
F. WELDING DEFORMED STEEL WIRE FABRIC: ASTM A 497.
G. SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCEMENT: Provide supports for reinforcement, including
bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing, complying with CRSI recommendations.
1. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs which are hot-dip galvanized, plastic protected
or stainless steel protected.
2.03 PRESTRESSING TENDONS
A. UNCOATED, 7-wirestress-relieved strand complying with ASTM A 416. Use Grade
250 unless Grade 270 required or shown on drawings.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS:
A. PORTLAND CEMENT: L--STM C 150. Type I or Type M. Use only one brand and
type of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. AGGREGATES: ASTM C 33. and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a
single source for exposed concrete.
C. WATER: Potable or free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
D. AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 260.
E. WATER-REDUCING ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 494, Type A.
F. CALCIUM CHLORIDE: Do not use calcium chloride in precast, prestressed
concrete.
2.05 CONNECTION MATERIALS:
A. STEEL PLATES: Structural quality, hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A 283, Grade C.
W STEEL SHAPES: ASTM A 36.
03410-3
C. ANCHOR BOLTS: ASTM A 307, low-carbon steel bolts, regular hexagon nuts and
carbon steel washers.
D. FINISH OF STEEL UNITS: Exposed units galvanized per ASTM A 153; others painted
with rust-inhibitive primer.
E. BEARING PADS: Provide bearing pads for precast concrete units as indicated on
drawings.
F. ACCESSORIES:Provide clips,hangers, and other accessories required for installation
of project units and for support of subsequent construction or finishes.
2.06 GROUT MATERIALS:
A. NON-METALLIC, SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT: Pre-mixed, non-metallic,
non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement,
shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with
Corps of Engineers CRD-C621.
2.07 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
A. PREPARE DESIGN MIXES for each type of concrete required-
B. DESIGN MIXES may be prepared by an independent testing facility or by qualified
precast manufacturing plant personnel, at precast manufacturer's option.
C. PROPORTION MIXES by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods,
using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete required,
complying with ACI 211.1 or ACI 2112.
I. Produce standard-eight concrete consisting of specified portland cement,
aggregates, admixtures, and water to produce the following properties.
2. Compressive Strength: 5000 psi minimum at 28days. Release strength for
prestressed units: 3500 psi.
3. Cure compression test cylinders using the same methods as will be used for the
precast concrete work.
D. ADMIXTURES
1. Use air-entraining admixture in concrete, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use water-reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer's
directions. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased
workability for low-slump concrete, may be used subject to Architect's
acceptance.
3. Use amounts as recommended by admixture manufacturer for climatic conditions
prevailing at time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to
maintain quality control
03410-4
108 FABRICATION:
'
A. GENERAL: Fabricate precast concrete units complying with manufacturing and testing
procedures, quaiity control recommendations, and dimensionai tolerances of PCI NINL-
116, and as specified for types of units required.
B. BUILT-IN ANCHORAGES: Accurately position built-in anchorage devices and secure
to formwork. Locate anchorages where they do not affect position of main
reinforcement or placing of concrete. Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless
acceptable to Architect.
C. CAST-IN-HOLES for openings larger than 10" diameter or 10" square in accordance
with final shop drawings. Other smaller holes will be field cut by trades requiring them,
as acceptable to Architect.
D. PLACE CONCRETE in a continuous operation to prevent formation of seams or planes
of weakness in precast units, complying with requirements of ACI 304. Thoroughly
consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocation or
damage to reinforcement and built-in items.
E. IDENTIFICATION: Provide permanent markings to identify pick-up points and
orientation in structure, complying with markings indicated on final shop drawings.
Imprint date of casting on each precast unit on a surface which will not show in
finished structure.
F. FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: Provide fmishes for formed surfaces of precast
concrete as indicated for each type of unit, and as follows:
1. Standard Finish: Normal plant run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth
finish to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint
marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated, but no major or unsightly
imperfections, honeycomb, or structural defects will be permitted.
G. FINISH OF UNFORMED SURFACES: Apply trowel finish to unformed surfaces
unless otherwise indicated. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with a
straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish.
2.09 HOLLOW SLAB UNITS:
' A. TYPE: Precast, prestressed concrete units with open voids running full length of slabs,
produced under a rigid factory-inspected process acceptable to Architect.
' B. FURNISH UNITS which are free of voids or honeycomb, with straight true edges and
surfaces.
C. PROVIDE "STANDARD FMSH" units unless otherwise indicated.
1
03410-5
D. FABRICATION: Manufacture units of concrete materials which will provide a
minimum 3500 psi compressive strength at time of initial prestress and a 28-day
compressive strength of 5000 psi.
E. ADEQUATELY REINFORCE SLAB units to resist transporting and handling stresses.
F. INCLUDE CAST-IN-WELD PLATES where required for anchorage or lateral bracing
to structural steel members.
G. COOPERATE WITH OTHER TRADES for installation of items to be cast-in hollow
slab units- Notify Contractor of items not received in ample time so as to not delay
work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
101 INSPECTION-
A. ERECTOR must examine supporting structure and conditions under which precast
concrete work is to be erected, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Erector.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. BEARING PADS: Install flexible bearing pads where indicated, as precast units are
being erected. Set pads on level; uniform bearing surfaces and maintain in correct
position until precast units are placed.
B. WELDING: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D 1.1, including qualification
of welders.
C. PROTECT UNITS from damage by field welding or cutting operations and provide
non-combustible shield as required.
D_ REPAIR DAMAGED METAL SURFACES by cleaning and applying a coat of liquid
galvanizing repair compound to galvanized surfaces and compatible primer to painted
surfaces.
E. POWER-ACTUATED FASTENERS: Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for
surface attachment of accessory items in precast, prestressed unit unless otherwise
accepted by precast manufacturer.
F. GROUTING CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS: After precast concrete units have been
placed and secured, grout open spaces at connection and joints as follows:
03410-6
1. Shrinkage-resistant grout consisting of premixed compound and water to provide
a flowable mixture without segregation or bleeding.
1 Provide forms or other acceptable method to retain grout in place until
sufficiently hard to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping
until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level
with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24
hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces
' before it hardens.
3.03 PLANT QUALITY CONTROL EVALUATIONS:
' A. THE OWNER may employ a separate testing laboratory to evaluate precast
manufacturer's quality control and testing methods.
B. THE PRECAST MANUFACTURER shall allow Owner's testing facility access to
materials storage areas, concrete production equipment, and concrete placement and
curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory and provide samples or
materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for testing and evaluation.
' C. PATCHING: Where core test results in satisfactory and precast units are acceptable for
use in work, fill core holes solid with patching mortar, and finish to match adjacent
concrete surfaces.
D. DEFECTIVE WORK: Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified
requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast
concrete units that meet requirements of this section. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to precast concrete work.
I END OF SECTION
1
03410.7
F-1
' SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-i Specification sections apply to work
specified in this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. EXTENT of each type of masonry work is shown on Drawings and in schedules.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. JOB MOCK-UP:
1. Prior to installation of brick masonry work, erect sample wall panel mock-up
using materials, bond and joint tooling required for final work. Build mock-up at
' the site, where directed, approximately 4' x 4' , indicating proposed range of color,
texture and workmanship to be expected in completed work.
2. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up before start of
masonry work.
3. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed masonry
work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed.
' 4. At Contractor's option, mock-up may be a portion of permanent wall.
B. FIRE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS: Where fire-resistance ratings are
required for unit masonry work, provide materials and construction which are identical
to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in
compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization or
by another means, as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS.
A. SAMPLES: Submit, for approval, 2 sets of samples (minimum of 6 brick in each set)
of brick required. Include in each set full range of exposed color and texture to be
expected in completed work. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive
' responsibility of Contractor.
B. TEST REPORTS: Submit test reports or letter certifying brick compliance with
specification requirements.
04200-1
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A_ PROTECTION OF WORK: During erection, cover top of wall with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is
not in progress and to protect masonry cores from rain.
B. STAINING: Prevent grout or mortar from staining face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL:
A. MANUFACTURER: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture
and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B. MASONRY UNIT CHARACTERISTICS: Provide units complying with standards
referenced and requirements indicated.
2.02 BRICK:
A. PROVIDE FACING BRICK meeting or exceeding the requirements for ASTM C 216,
Grade SW, Type FBS.
B. SIZE, TEXTURE AND COLOR: As indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU):
A. SIZE: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8"
high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Width shown on Drawings.
B. SPECIAL SHAPES: Providewhere shown and where required for lintels, corners,
jambs, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions.
C. PROVIDE NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE HOLLOW LOAD-BEARING CMU
units complying with ASTM C 90 Grade N-i with a compressive strength of not less
than 1500 PSI (Net Section Area).
D. WHERE FIRE-RESISTANCE RATINGS are required for unit masonry work, provide
"Solite" unit masonry that complies with ASTM C-90 Grade N-1 or ASTM C-145
Grade N-1 as necessary to provide load bearing capacity required and the fire ratings
required.
04200-2
1
1
I
t
1
2.04 PRECAST LINTELS AND SILLS
A. PRECAST LINTEL BEAMS, using 5,000 p.s.i. concrete, where employed over
openings, shall have not less than eight (8) inches bearing at each end on the masonry
blockwork. Lintels for openings exceeding four (4) feet wide but not exceeding eight
(8) feet wide, shall be eight (8) inches wide by eight (8) inches deep, and contain two
(2) No. 6 bars top and bottom. Precast lintel beams shall be provided with No- 3
stirrups at eight (8) inch spacing.
B. PRECAST SILLS shall be of size and shape as shown on the drawings, placed in full
bed of mortar level and true.
2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS:
A. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type I.
C. SAND: ASTM C 144.
B. HYDRATED LEVIE: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. WATER: Clean and potable.
2.06 MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
A. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AND TIES FOR MASONRY:
1 _ Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10'
with matching corner ("L") and intersecting ("T") units. Fabricate from cold-
drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side
rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than
nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position side rods for full
embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces
exposed to exterior and not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Provide the following type
of joint reinforcing unless otherwise indicated.
(a) Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
(b) Number of side rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry. For multi-
wythe masonry, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each
face sheet of each concrete masonry wythe.
2. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gage side and cross rods.
3. Wire Finish:
(a) For exterior walls hot-dip galvanize joint reinforcing after fabrication to
comply with ASTM A i53, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft.).
(b) For interior walls provide manufacturer's standard mill galvanized finish.
B. INDIVIDUAL WIRE TIES FOR MASONRY:
1. Fabricate from 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire, ASTM A 82, unless otherwise
indicated, of the length required for proper embedment in wythes or masonry.
04200-3
(a) For use with hollow masonry units laid cells vertical, provide rectangular
shaped ties.
(b) For use with solid masonry units, provide ties with ends bent to 90 degree
angles to form hooks not less than 2" long.
(c) Where spacing and back-up joints do not align, provide either offset or
adjustable 2-piece ties.
2. For exterior walls, fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coating,
ASTM A 153 Class B-2.
C. ANCHORS AND TIES:
1. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Where shown on Drawings provide corrugated metal
ties not less than 22 ga. and not less than 7/8" wide and 7" long with one end
crimped for attachment to substrate. Size to extend to within 3/4" of face of
masonry veneer.
2. For interior work, fabricate from steel with mill galvanized or hot-dip coating-
3. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot-dip
galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
101 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. THICKNESS: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build
single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal
thickness shown or specified.
B. CUT MASONRY UNITS with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible.
C. WET CLAY BRICK having ASTM C 67 absorption rates greater than 0.025 oz, per
square inch per minute.
1. Determine absorption by drawing a circle the size of a quarter on typical units and
place 20 drops of water inside the circle.
2. Wet brick units only if water is absorbed within 1-1/2 minutes.
D. DO NOT WET concrete masonry units.
E. PATTERN BOND: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown,
lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centeredon units in courses above
and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less
than 2inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners.
F. LAY OUT WALLS IN ADVANCE for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with
uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns
04200-4
1
and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations.
G. LAY-UP WALLS plumb and true and with course level, accurately spaced and
' coordinated with other work.
H. STOPPING AND RESUMING WORK: Rack back i/2-masonry unit length in each
course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if
specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying
fresh masonry-
1. BUILT-IN WORK: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and
other sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar.
' 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place
a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING:
A. MORTAR MIXES: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, and of the following
types.
1. Use Type S mortar for exterior above grade loadbearing and non-loading walls,
parapet walls, pavements, and for interior loadbearing walls.
' 2. Use Type N mortar for interior non-loadbearing partitions.
B. BATCH CONTROL:
1. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required
proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement
of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted.
1 Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with workability to
provide maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar.
3. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer.
Use water clear and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work.
Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed
since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to
restore workability.
C. LAY BRICK AND OTHER SOLID MASONRY UNITS with completely filled bed
and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into
place. Do not slush head joints.
' D. LAY HOLLOW CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS with full mortar coverage on
horizontal and vertical face sheets; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on
footings and foundation walls.
E. JOINTS: Maintain joint widthsshown, except for minor variations required to maintain
1
04200-5
bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. Cut joints
flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials-
Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of
caulking or sealants where shown.
F. REMOVE MASONRY UNITS DISTURBED after laying; clean and relay in fresh
mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in
position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh
mortar.
3.03 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING:
A. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING as shown and
specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a
minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations.
Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at ends of units. Do not bridge control and
expansion joints with reinforcing except as otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at
corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and
bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions-
B. SPACE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL REINFORCING at 16 inches o.c. vertically
unless otherwise shown.
3.04 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK:
A. PROVIDE ANCHORING DEVICES of the type shown and as specified. If not shown
or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved.
B. ANCHOR MASONRY to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such
members to comply with the following:
1_ Space anchors vertically and as shown, but not more than 24 inches o.c. 36
inches o.c. horizontally.
C. ANCHOR SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY VENEER to backing with metal ties as
follows:
1. Anchor embedded Provide indicated.
2. Anchor veneer to concrete back-up with dovetail anchors.
3. Space veneer anchors as shown, or if not shown, space not more than 24 inches
o.c. vertically and horizontally. Provide additional anchors within V-0" of
openings and space not more than 3'-0" around perimeter.
4. Anchor veneer to masonry back-up with two-piece wall anchors spaced not more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally. Provide additional anchors within
1'-0" of openings and space not more than 3'-0" around perimeter.
04200-6
3.05 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING:
A.
B
C.
D
E.
REMOVE AND REPLACE EXPOSED-TO-VIEW MASONRY UNITS which are
loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if do not match adjoining
units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh
mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
REMOVE AND REPLACE CONCEALED-FROM-VIEW MASONRY UNITS which
are loose, broken, or similarly damaged. Provide new units and install in fresh mortar
or grout.
POINTING: During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes,
and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent
work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of
caulking or sealant compounds.
CLEAN EXPOSED BRICK MASONRY SURFACES by the bucket and brush hand
cleaning method or by high pressure washing method.
1. Use commercial cleaning agents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CLEAN EXPOSED CMU by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after
final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.
END OF SECTION
04200-7
r
SECTION 05400
r
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
r
PART 1-GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. EXTENT of cold-formed metal framing, including structural metal studs, is shown on
drawings.
B. TYPES of cold-formed metal framing units include the following:
1. "C" shaped steel studs.
C. COLD-FORMED metal framing specified in this section is for interior application,
' exterior application and roof trusses.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. COMPONENT DESIGN: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in
accordance with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
r Members".
B. MANUFACTURER: Provide cold-formed metal framing components of type(s)
indicated, produced by one of the following or equivalent:
r 1. "C"-shaped load bearing studs and joists, 1-5/8" flange:
a. Inryco/N ilcor.
b. Bostwick.
r c. U. S. Gypsum.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
r '
A. s product information and installation
PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer
instructions for each item of cold-formed framing and accessories.
r
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations
not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage
designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing,
1
1 05400-1
splices, accessories, and details as may be required for proper installation.
2. Submitted shop drawings shall be checked and signed by the General Contractor
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. PROTECT METAL FRANIING UNITS from rusting and damage. Deliver to the project
site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand,
type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable
waterproof coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL FRAMING:
A. SYSTEM COMPONENTS: With each type of metal framing required, provide
manufacturer's standardsteel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes,
reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.
B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES:
1. 16 gage and heavier units. Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446
2. For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570,
or A 611.
3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A
525 for minimum G 60 coating.
C. "C"-SHAPE STUDS: Manufacturer's standard load-bearing steel studs of size, shape,
and gage indicated, with 1.625" flange and flange return lip.
102 FABRICATION:
A. GENERAL: Framingcomponents may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints
welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or
distortion.
B. FASTENINGS: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components
by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with the manufacturer.
1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.
05400-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
101 INSTALLATION:
A. GENERAL: Install cold-formed metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Runner Tracks: install continuous tracks sized to thatch studs. Align tracks
accurately to the layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by
stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c.
spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of
attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
2. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb
' walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
3. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls,
anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.
' 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system
wherever indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, and similar work
requiring attachment. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise
indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry
' standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item
supported.
' B. INSTALLATION OF STUD SYSTEM: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks
by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges.
1. Frame openings larger than 2'-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's
instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below openings. Anchor
tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as
full--height studs. Secure stud system at perimeter as required.
2. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, as shown for wall system, with a
separate stud and do not bridge the joint with components of stud system.
3. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more
than 4'-6" o.c. Weld at each intersection.
C. FIELDPAIN'TTNG: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during
handling and installation. Use galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1
1 05400-3
1
SECTION 05700
1
ORNAMENTAL METALWORK
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A_ DEFINITIONS: Ornamental metalwork includes metal products which are used in
building construction for functional, architectural and decorative effects and which are
not a part of other metal systems specified in other sections.
' B. EXTENT of these items is indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. SHOP ASSEMBLY: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
' handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's, fabricator's and finisher's specifications
and installation instructions for products used in ornamental metalwork, including
finishing materials and methods.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of
ornamental metalwork. Include plans, elevations and detail sections. Indicate materials,
methods, finishes and types of joiner, fasteners, anchorages and accessory items;
specify finishes. Provide setting diagrams and templates for anchorages, sleeves, and
bolts installed by others.
'
C. SAMPLES: Submit samples of each type of metal and finish required. Prepare samples
on metal of same alloy and thickness to be used for the work. Where normal color and
' texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each set of samples
showing the limits of such variations.
1. Include b" long samples of linear shapes.
1
1
05700-1
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. ACID ETCHED COPPER: Provide Copper to match Architect's sample in color and
thickness for copper cap and fascia band and continuous finneal band.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with standards of the Copper Development Association.
C. TEMPER: Provide materials in standard commercial tempers and hardness, as required
for fabrication, strength and durability.
D. FASTENERS: Furnish of basic metal and alloy, matching finished color and texture as
metal being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide
Phillips flathead screw for exposed fasteners-
E. BITUMINOUS PAINT: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic).
2.02 FABRICATION:
A. GENERAL: Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a minimum
ambient temperature of 100 degrees F_ without causing buckling, excessive opening of
joints or overstressing of fastenings-
B. FORM METALWORK to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines and angles.
Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of units- Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
C. MILL JOINTS to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed
to weather to exclude water penetration.
D. CORROSION PROTECTION: Coat concealed surfaces which will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, in exterior work and work to be built
into exterior walls and decks, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Do not extend
coating onto exposed surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop
drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. Do not delay
job progress; allow for adjustments and fitting where taking of field measurements
before fabrication might delay work.
05700-2
B. COORDINATE and furnish anchorages and delivery of such items to the project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. PROVIDE ANCHORAGE DEVICES and fasteners where necessary for securing
ornamental metal items to in-place construction.
B_ PERFORM all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation or ornamental metal
items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true,
' measured from established lines and levels.
C. FORM TIGHT JOINTS with exposed connections accurately fitted with uniform
reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting and grinding are required
for proper shop fitting and jointing of work, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence
of such corrective work.
D. DO NOT CUT OR ABRADE FINISHES which cannot be completely restored in the
field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by
complete refinishing or provide new units at Contractor's option.
END OF SECTION
05700-3
SECTION 06101
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
' A_ DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. DEFINITION: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
' sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of
work in this section include, but are not necessary limited to, rough carpentry for:
1. Wood grounds, nailers, framing and blocking.
2. Wood furring.
1 Sheathing.
4. Wood roof trusses.
5. Exposed rafters.
B. FINISH CARPENTRY is specified in another section within Division 6.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A_ SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings of wood trusses signed and sealed by
registered structural engineer. Indicate species and stress grades of lumber to be used
and details of metal connectors to be used at joints. Show pitch, span and location of
' trusses. Provide large scale details of typical connections and anchorages.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure
to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and
provide air circulation within stacks.
' 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
' A. COORDINATION: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for
accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports
to allow proper attachment of other work.
06101-1
1
PART2-PRODUCTS
101 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS:
A. LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20.
B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS 1/ANSI-A199.1 and APA_
C. FACTORY-MARK each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and
grading agency.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. LUMBER, GENERAL:
1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual
sizes as required by PS 20.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
B. WOOD ROOF TRUSSES:
1. Provide wood roof trusses designed and fabricated in accordance with AITC and
TPI specifications.
2. Design Loads: Total load, 45 p.s.f which includes 10 p.s.f ceiling load,
1 Submit shop drawings for wood roof trusses which have been designed, signed
and sealed by structural engineer registered to practice in the state where project
is located. A minimum of one (1) complete set of shop drawings shall bear
engineer's original signature and raised seal.
C. EXPOSED RAFTERS: Provide framing lumber complying with the following:
1. Provide preservative treated lumberas specified herein under title of Wood
Treatment".
2. Provide Select Structural Grade lumber of either Hem-Fir per WWPA rules or
Southern Pine per SP1B rules.
3. Provide rough sawn finish on all exposed surfaces.
D. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips,
bucks, nailers, blocking furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide
lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:
2. Grade: No. 2 pine (SPIB).
E. PLYWOOD:
1. Concealed Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide
the following:
a. Provide Exterior Type plywood for exterior use and Interior Type with
06101-2
1
1
exterior glue for interior use.
b. Provide C-D/Ext-APA plywood for exterior use; provide C-D/Int-APA
plywood for interior use, unless otherwise shown.
C. For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-
retardant treated plywood with exterior glue.
1 Exposed Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed, provide "A" type surface on
exposed surfaces. Provide exterior glue.
F. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and
as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal
Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring
devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of size and type
recommended by manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.
2. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, ASTM D 226.
3. Hurricane Clips: Provide appropriate hurricane clips as recommended for
installation condition by Heckman or equal products as approved. Provide 18
gage galvanized clips except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for each
different condition.
1 3.03 WOOD TREATMENT:
e
A. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT: Where lumber of plywood is indicated as "PT",
"Trt-Wd", or "Treated", or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable
requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB
Standards listed below. Mark each treated item to comply with the AWPB Quality Mark
requirements.
I . Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of IS%
for plywood and 19% for lumber. Treat indicated items and the following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concrete.
B. FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT: Where fire-retardant treated wood is indicated,
pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with
AWPA C20 and C27, as applicable for interior and exterior applications. Identify
lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., U. S.
Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspection agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction,
C. CUTS AFTER TREATMENT: Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment,
where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same
chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA-M4.
06101-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. DISCARD UNITS OF MATERIAL with defects which might impair quality of work,
and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B. SET CARPENTRY WORK accurately to required levels and lines, with members of
plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted.
C. SECURELY ATTACH CARPENTRY WORK to substrates by anchoring and fastening
as shown and as required by recognized standards. Select fasteners of size that will not
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
of wood; pre-drill as required.
3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING:
A. PROVIDE WHEREVER SHOWN and where required for screeding or attachment of
other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work
to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. ATTACH TO SUBSTRATES as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during
installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete
placement.
C. PROVIDE PERMANENT GROUNDS of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled
lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to
exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer
required.
D. PROVIDE MINIMUM 2" X 8" WOOD BLOCKING extending between metal and
wood studs and securely fastened at each end for the mounting of all toilet room
accessories, sinks, toilet partitions and other wall -mounted items.
3.03 WOOD FURRING (Wd-Fur):
A. INSTALL PLUMB AND LEVEL with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with
wood as required for tolerance of finished work.
B. FURRING TO RECEIVE GYPSUM DRYWALL: Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 x
2" furring at 16" o.c. vertically.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (Pwd):
06101-4
A
A COMPLY with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA), for
installation of plywood.
B. SHEATHING: Install as recommended by APA for spacing of supports or types of
substrates involved in the work. Provide thickness shown, or if not shown, provide
thickness recommended by APA.
r
END OF SECTION
P
06101-5
SECTION 06113
GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of gypsum sheathing is shown on the Drawings.
B. COORDINATE this work with Sections of the Work providing framing and other
substrates for sheathing.
1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. PROTECT sheathing from exposure to weather. Deliver in manufacturer's unopened
bundles, identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store inside in a dry, ventilated
space.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING:
A. COMPLY WITH ASTM C79.
B. GYPSUM SHEATHING: 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated, 2" x 8" V tongue and
grooved on long edges, asphalt treated water resistant and repellant board as
manufactured by U.S.Gypsum, National Gypsum or an approved equal.
2.02 ACCESSORIES:
A. PROVIDE FASTENERS or other accessories as required for complete installation and
fastening to framing. Provide building felt barrier over sheathing installation.
06113-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. INSTALLER of gypsum sheathing must examine substrate and conditions under which
work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory
conditions- Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 APPLICATION:
A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and
recommendations where other more stringent requirements are not indicated below.
B. APPLY GYPSUM SHEATHING horizontally with long dimension across studs and
groove edge down, with vertical joints staggered and centered over studs. Fit panels
tightly against adjacent panels and snugly at terminations to building components.
C_ SECURE SHEATHING to steel studs with U.S. Gypsum I" Type S-12 screws or equal
spaced approximately 8 inches on centers (4 per 2 ft. sheathing width per support) and
not less than 3/8" in from edges and ends of sheathing panels.
END OF SECTION
06113-2
1
SECTION 06192
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
fl
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. DEFINITION: Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of
metal plate connected members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which
have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the job site.
' B. EXTENT of wood trusses is indicated on drawings and specified herein.
C_ RELATED WORK:
' 1. Roof Sheathing: Section 06100.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. TPI STANDARDS: Comply with application requirements and recommendations of the
following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications.
I . "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses".
' 2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses"_
3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses".
4. "Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses".
5. "Quality Control Manual".
B. WOOD STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements
of "National Design Specification for Wood Construction" published by N.F.P.A.
' C. LUMBER STANDARD: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the
respective grading inspecting agencies for species and grade of lumber indicated.
D. CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide truss
Connector plates manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which
complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates
published in TPI "Quality Control Manual".
1
06192-1
E. FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of
successfully fabricating trusses similar to type indicated and which complies with the
following requirements for quality control:
1. Fabricator practices a quality control program which complies with, or is
comparable to, one published in TPI "Quality Control Manual", and which
involves inspection by an independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to
Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
F. DESIGN: Trusses shall be designed so that no horizontal reactions are imposed on the
supporting structure under vertical loads.
1. Truss members and connections shall be designed for all live, dead, and wind
loads, plus any concentrated loads shown on the drawings.
Duration Factors
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Roof DL + LL + WL 1.33
Roof DL + LL 1.25
A. GENERAL: Submit following items as specified in Section (01340).
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates,
hardware, fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling and erection.
1. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that trusses
to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements.
C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of
lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss
required; type, size, material, finish, design value, and location of metal connector
plates; and bearing and anchorage details.
1. Provide shop drawings which have been signed and stamped by a structural
engineer licensed to practice in the state the project is located.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. HANDLE AND STORE TRUSSES with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or
other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure.
B. TIME DELIVERY and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to
avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
06192-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS.
A. LUMBER:
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency.
2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide seasoned lumber with a maximum moisture content at time of dressed of
15%.
4. Lumber Species: Southern Pine, graded by SPIB.
5. Lumber Grade: For species indicated, provide the following stress-rated grade:
"Selected Structural".
B. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES:
1. Connector Plate Material: Metal complying with following requirements, unless
otherwise indicated, not less than "0.036" thick, coated thickness. Provide
connector plates from a single manufacturer.
2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, Coating G60.
3. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated,
' complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, screws, bolts, nuts and
washers and anchoring devices.
2.02 FABRICATION:
A. CUT TRUSS MEMBERS to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting
joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units.
B. FABRICATE METAL CONNECTOR PLATES to size, configuration, thickness and
anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated.
C. ASSEMBLE TRUSS MEMBERS in design configuration indicated using jigs or other
means to ensure uniform and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position
members to produce design camber indicated.
D. CONNECT TRUSS MEMBERS by means of metal connector plates accurately located
and securely fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved.
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION:
A. GENERAL: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer
and the Truss Plate Institute.
1
06192-3
B. ERECT TRUSSES with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other,
located accurately at design spacings indicated.
C. HOIST UNITS in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of
trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator,
exercising care not to damage truss members of joints by out-of-plane bending or other
causes.
D. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel
and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed.
E. ANCHOR TRUSSES securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details
indicated.
F. INSTALL PERMANENT BRACING and related components to enable trusses to
maintaindesign spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to
comply with other indicated requirements.
G. DO NOT CUT or remove truss members.
END OF SECTION
06192-4
SECTION 06201
FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A_ DEFINITION: Finish carpentry and millwork includes work which is exposed to view,
is non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections. Types of work in
this section include:
1. Wood trim,
2. Casework and countertops.
B. RELATED WORK:
1. Rough Carpentry- Section 06100.
2. Builders Hardware and Wood Doors: Division 8.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A_ FACTORY-MARK EACH PIECE of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and
grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent
finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in
accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
B. AWI QUALITY STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute
(AWI), except as otherwise indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item,
dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other
components. Submit shop drawings for the following:
1. Casework.
B. SAMPLES: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish
carpentry and millwork-
1. Plastic Laminate: 1 piece, 3" x 5".
06201-1
r
2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware: I unit of each type and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: r
A. SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable
grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and
product indicated.
B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS-I/ANSI-A199.1 and APA.
1
C. HARDWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS Comply with National Hardware Lumber
Association (NHLA) rules. r
D. HARDWOOD PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS 51.
E. PLASTIC LAMINATE: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern
and finish indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard products.
F. WOODWORK STANDARD: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)
"Custom Quality Standards" unless otherwise indicated-
I. For following types of woodwork comply with indicated standards as applicable:
a. Standing and Running Trim: AWI Section 300.
b_ Casework and Countertops:AWI Section 400.
G. CASEWORK HARDWARE STANDARD: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
ANSI-156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware".
1. Quality Level: Type 2 (institutional), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Locks: Where indicated (if any), provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or
discs) tumbler locks, keyed individually except as otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Hardware Finish: Provide hardware with BHMA Code 626 satin
chromium plate finish (US26D).
2.02 MATERIALS GENERAL:
A. NOMINAL SIZES are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide
dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as
required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
B. MOISTURE CONTENT OF LUMBER: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a
moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than
values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting
agency for the species and product indicated.
06201-2
1
I
C. LUMBER FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: Use pieces made of solid lumber stock-
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring
devices of the proper type, size, material and finish for application indicated to provide
secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal
Specifications.
L Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating
(ASTM A 153).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. DISCARD UNITS of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly
treated, nor adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints
or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to
surfaces, sizes or patterns.
B. INSTALL WORK PLUMB, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as
"
'
"
for plumb and
in 8
-0
required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8
level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces.
C. SCRIBE AND CUT WORK TO FIT adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
D. TRIM: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from
maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, to produce tight fitting
joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end
joints.
1. Make exterior joints water-resistant by careful fitting.
E. CASEWORK: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings
properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware
and accessory items as indicated.
F. ANCHOR FINISH CARPENTRY WORK to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or
directly attached to substrates.
1
06201-3
3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
A. REPAIR DAMAGED AND DEFECTIVE WORK wherever possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace work.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
S. CLEAN WORK ON EXPOSED and semi-exposed surfaces.
PROTECTION: Installer of work shall advise Contractor of final protection to maintain
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time
of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
06201-4
SECTION 07100
WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. EXTENT of waterproof coating is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this
section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and general
recommendations.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. SUBSTRATE: Proceed with work of this section only after substrate construction and
penetrating work have been completed.
B. WEATHER: Proceed with work of this section only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
PROVIDE waterproof coating equal to Thoroseal with Acryl-50 mixed and applied as
recommended by manufacturer for applicable conditions. (White color.)
07100-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. INSTALLER must examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be
performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE:
A. CLEAN SUBSTRATE of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with
recommendations of prime materials manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. APPLICATION: Apply two coats of waterproof coating as recommended by
manufacturer. Second coat shall be sponge applied with light textured surface.
3.04 PROTECTION:
A. PROTECT OTHER WORK from spillage of waterproofing materials. Replace or
restore work which is soiled or otherwise damaged by installation of work of this
section.
END OF SECTION
07100-2
I
? I - PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION 07200
INSULATION
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. EXTENT of insulation work is shown on drawings, by generic name or by abbreviation.
' B. APPLICATIONS of insulation specified in this section include the following:
1. Blanket-type insulation.
2. Semi-Rigid Blanket-Type insulation.
3. Board Type insulation, concealed.
4. Loose-Fill insulation.
C. ROOF INSULATION is specified in another section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (k-
value at 75°F. or 24°C-) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as
' directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where
insulation is identified by "R" value, provide appropriate thickness.
B. FIRE AND INSURANCE RATINGS: Comply with fire-resistance, flammability and
insurance ratings indicated, and comply with governing regulations as interpreted by
authorities.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
' A. PRODUCT DATA:
1. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of
insulation required.
' 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
I A. GENERAL PROTECTION: Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, or soiled.
INSULATION
0'7200-I
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection
during installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. FACED MINERAL FIBER BLANKETBATT INSULATION: Thermal insulation
produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting
resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (Blankets with reflective
vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft
vapor-retarder membrane on one face, respectively; and as follows:
1. . Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
2: Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 25 and 50, respectively.
B. SEMI-RIGID SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS: FS HH--I-521, Type I; semi-
rigid mineral fiber blanket without membrane, Class 25 flame-spread, thicknesses as
indicated.
C. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION: Rigid, cellular thermal
insulation with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of
polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with. ASTM C 578 for Type
indicated; with 5-year aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg. F. respectively; and
as follows:
1. Type IV, 1.6 lb./cu. ft. mm, density, unless otherwise indicated-
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 5 and 165, respectively.
D. POLYISOCYANUR.ATE BOARD INSULATION: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation
with glass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and aluminum foil
facing laminated to both sides; complying with ES HH-I-1972/1, Class 2; aged r-values
of 7.2 and 8 at 40 and 75 deg. F. respectively, and as follows:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum values for flame spread and smoke
developed of 20 and 150, respectively.
E. LOOSE GRANULAR PERLITE INSULATION: Expanded perlite complying with
ASTM C 549, Type H (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture
absorption) or IV (surface treated for water repellency and limited absorption), r-values
of 3.3.2.8 for densities of 4.1 - 7.4 lbs. per cu. ft. at 75 deg. F.
F. LOOSE GRANULAR VERMICULITE INSULATION: Expanded vermiculite
complying with ASTM C 516, Type H (surface treated for water repellency and limited
moisture absorption); Grade 1, 2, or 3; r-value of 2.3 at 75 deg. F.
INSULATION
07200-2
7
L
G. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation
manufacturer, and complying with fire-resistance requirements.
2. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown, or if not shown, as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.01 INSPECTION:
A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which insulation work
is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.
' Do not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
' 3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. GENERAL:
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation
in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project
conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for speck
recommendations before proceeding with work
2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstructions, and'fill voids with insulation. Remove projections
which interfere with placement.
3. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown
or required to make up total thickness.
4. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying
mastic or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into
place. Fill voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant.
5. Set vapor barrier faced units with vapor barrier to warns side of construction,
1 except as otherwise shown. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for
firestopping.
.6. Tape joints and - ruptures in vapor barriers, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure vapor-tight installation.
B. LOOSE-FILL INSULATION:
I . Close off openings in cavities to receive poured-in-place insulation, sufficiently to
prevent escape of insulation.
2. Provide bronze/stainless steel screen (inside) where openings must be maintained
for drainage or ventilation.
3. Pour granular insulation into cavities as shown, to completely fill void spaces.
Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each
pour area Close ports after complete coverage has been confirmed. Limit fall of
INSULATION
07200-3
.1
insulation to one story in height, but not to exceed 20'-0".
4. Screed horizontal applications to uniform thicknesses required.
5. Provide either perlite or vermiculite type granular insulation at Contractor's
option-
END OF SECTION
TNSULATTON
07200
11
II
' SECTION - 07316
METAL ROOF TILES
PART 1
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
' A. Formed metal roofing panels with colored stone chip finish. (Metro ROMAN Tile)
B. Battens used only on Hip, Ridge and Rake areas.
C. Associated metal flashings_
' 1.2 RI
A.
B.
' C.
D.
;LATED SECTIONS
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing
d
Section 07610 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
Section 074M- Gutters and Downspouts.
Section 15575 - Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks.
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM A792/A792M - Sheet Steel, Aluminum - Zinc alloy coated by the Hot-Dip
Process
structural (physical) quality
,
.
' B. ASTM E 109 - Test for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Material.
C. UL 1897 Tests for wind uplift resistance of roof assemblies.
D. ASTM C 920-86 - Specification for Electrometric Joint Sealant.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with guidelines as set out by Metro Roof Products
installation instructions.
'
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Installer - Company specializing in performing the work of this section shall be
experienced in the installation of the roofing system or trained in it's application by a
manufacturer's representative.
07316-1
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes.
1.6 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. During shipment, finished surfaces shall be protected from abrasion.
B. Accept metal roofing on site in packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Job site storage shall be in a clean, dry area out of direct contact with the ground, under
cover or sloped for drainage, protected from traffic, contamination by corrosion and
staining materials.
D. Stored materials and unfinished work shall be secured against damage by wind.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide owner with a fifty (50) year written fully transferable, limited warranty for
defects from Metro Roof Products as the roofing material manufacturer-
B. A written guarantee on labor and workmanship will be supplied by the installer in
connection with this contract-
PART 2
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Metro Roof Products
3093 `A' Industry Street
Oceanside CA 92054
Phone: (760) 435-9842 Fax: (760) 435-1162
E-Mail: infoCa)metrQroofproducts.com
Internet: www.smaftroofs.com or www.metroroofs.com
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Panel: Metro ROMAN Tile Pressure formed aluminum-zinc alloy coated sheet
steel ASTM A792/A792M; 26 gauge thick steel 52 1/4 inches long X 16 inches wide
nominal size with five (5) individual concave tile under-pans and five (5) convex tile
over-pans. Acrylic resin coated, colored stone chip finish. Architect shall select color
from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Hips, Ridges and Rakes: Barrel Trim of same color and surface finish as Metro panels.
07316-2
1-1
C. Flashing - Stone-Coated. V-Bat Riser Flashing, Fascia Flashing, Head-Wall Flashing, Z-
Bar Flashing, Tile-Rake Metal Flashing and Valley Cover Flashing of same color and
surface finish matching roof panels.
D. Flashing - Painted: Provide as necessary for specific job various shaped metal flashing
sections for transition areas with construction & Stone-Coated steel roof.
E. Nails: Corrosion resistant full round headed flathead, Ring Shank nails, 8d, 2-3/8-inch
' long X .131-inch diameter as approved by manufacturer with minimum 1,000 hours salt
spray resistance to ASTM B 117.
F. Screws: #40 X 2"inch (Back heel of panel) & #-10 X 2-1/2" inch (Front downturn nose
of panel) long corrosion resistant steel, moulded hex head screws or as approved by
manufacturer. Color coat to match panel color. Minimum 1,000 hours salt spray
resistance to ASTM B 117.
G. Valley and other Flashings: Aluminum zinc alloy coated sheet ASTM-A792/A792M or
G-90 Galvanized. NOTE: Capper and lead flashings_shall not be used due to metal
incompatibility -
2.3 ACCESSORIES
' A. Battens: Nominal 2-inch X 2-inch standard grade Douglas Fir (or equal) or better along
Hips, Ridges and Rakes.
B. Batten Nails: Common smooth 16d, 31/4-inch long.
C. Alternate Battens. Galvanized steel hat section; 25 gauge.
D. Screws: Hot Dip galvanized steel; No. 10 by 2-inch long corrosion resistant steel screws
' or as approved by manufacturer.
E. Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C 920-86.
F. Pipe Jack Flashings: Metro SMARTjack 3-in-1 (Fit pipes from 1-1/4" -- 3") or 3-in-4 (Fit
pipes from 3" - 4") rubber gasket pipe jacks stone coated to match the Metro panel
finish. 26 gauge galvanized or aluminum/zinc alloy steel. Clean, prime and paint to
' match roof color. NOTE: Lead pipe flashing shall not be used
G_ Pipe Sleeve Covers: Metro SMART-Sleeves (For pipes from 3/4" up to and including 4"
' diameter) and are designed to be used in conjuration with a Metro SMART-Jack pipe
flashing.
1
07316-3
PART 3
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify roof structure for correct framing prior to placing battens and Metro roof panels.
B. Verify roof penetrations and plumbing vent stacks are in place and flash to roof surface-
C. Exterior stucco accessible from roof is to be completed prior to roofing panel installation.
D. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor that roof access by other trades be
limited during installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION - BATTENS
A. Install 2-inch X 2-inch (or 1-inch X 4-inch) battens across roof frame at 14'/2-inches from
the front face of one batten to the next. Stagger ends.
B. Install 1-inch X 4-inch counter-battens spaced at 24-inch centers vertically over roof
framing member. Stagger ends.
C. Nail all battens in place with 16d common nails as per manufacturer's instruction.
D. Install additional battens to support and provide fastening points for flashings and trim-
E. Install Metro Stone-Coated Fascia Metal across bottom batten at the fascia.
3.3 INSTALLATION - VALLEY
A. Valleys shall be installed with minimum 6-inches overlap in the direction of flow.
B. Fasten in place minimum 24-inches centers through outer flange section of valley
flashing. Or use hold tabs. Fasteners shall be either sealed or have a rubber washered
head to prevent leaking.
C. Metro Roof Products roof panels shall be cut and accurately bent down into valley.
Panels on opposing sides of valley shall form a straight and even line over the valley.
D. Install new valley flashing on all re-roofing applications.
3.4 INSTALLATION - Metro ROMAN Tile
A. Install Metro ROMAN Tile with alternating courses staggered.
07316-4
B. Fastened at not less than eight (S) points (four across the nose & four across the back
flange) for regular conditions and twelve (12) points (six across the nose and six across
the back flange) for High Velocity Hurricane Zones (HVHZ) areas.
C. Fastener points shall be, along the back flange and across the front downturn nose of each
panel at the overlap, and at two other intermediate positions.
3.5 INSTALLATION - Metro Trim
A. Place flashing and trim over locations as specified for their use by the manufacturer,
B. Fold exposed ends of ridges and hips neatly and cap with similar roof material.
C. Seal folds with sealant as required by manufacturer and secure with additional approved
fasteners.
END OF SECTION
07316-5
1
1
SECTION 07460
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING & PANELS
GENERAL
L GENERAL
A. Work under this section is subject to the provisions of the contract documents which in any
way affect the work specified herein.
1.1 Scope
i
1
1
A Furnish and install Hardipanel fiber-cement siding, Harditrim fascia and
moulding and accessories where shown on drawings or as specified herein.
B. Coordinate this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequence
of installation.
C. Work in other sections affecting this work.
1. Steel framing and bracing 13122
2. Wood framing and bracing 06100
3. Sheathing 06100
4. Insulation 07210
1.2 Quality Assurance
A. Submittals: within sixty (15) days of owner's notice:
1. Submit three 6 inch x 6 inch pieces of Hardipanel claddings in texture and widths
shown and specified herein.
2. Submit three copies of specifications, installation data and other pertinent
manufacturer's literature.
1.3 Product Handling
' A. Stack Hardipanel claddings on edge or lay flat on a smooth, level surface. Protect edges and
corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
1 .4 Job Conditions
A. Nominal 2 inch x 4 inch wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local
building codes, including the use of weather-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where
required. Minimum 11/2 inch face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly
aligned.
B. Install weather-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
C. Repair any punctures or tears in the weather-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the
' siding.
D. Protect siding from other trades.
1.5 Warranty
A. James Hardie's limited product warranty against manufacturing defects in Hardipanel vertical
siding for 50 years.
B. Workmanship: application limited warranty for 5 years.
07460-1
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Hardiplank / Hardipanel / Hardie Shingleside Cladding / Harditrim Fascia and Moulding
A- Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to comply with ASTM Standard Specification C1 186 Grade
K Type A-
B, Siding to meet the following building code compliance National Evaluation Report No. NER
405 (BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI); City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862; Metro Dade
County, Florida Acceptance No. 94-1234.04; US Department of Housing and Urban
Development Materials Release 1263a; California DSA PS-019; and City ofNew York MEA
223-93-M.Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to be non-combustible when tested in
accordance with ASTM test method E136.
C. Type: Smooth Vertical siding panel 4' x 9'_
D. Trim Type:
James Hardie Building Products, 1-800-9-HARDIE
2.2 Fasteners
A. Wood framing: 0.091" shank x 0.221" head x 1 1/2" corrosion resistant siding nails.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Surface Conditions
A. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work-
3.2 Installation - Harditrirn Fascia and Moulding
A. Install flashing around all wall openings.
B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must
penetrate minimum 3/4 inch or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required
to ensure adequate security.
C. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch and no further than 2 inch from side edge of trim board
and no closer than 1 inch from end. Fasten maximum 16 inch on center.
D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
E. Trim inside corner with single board.
F. Install single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of
first comer board. Do not fasten Hard itrim board to Harditrim board.
G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding.
H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.
I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
J. Install Harditrim fascia over structural subfascia.
3.4 Installation - Hardipane Siding
A. Block framing between studs where Hardipanel siding horizontal joints occur.
B. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from panel edges and 2 inch from panel corners.
C. Allow minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge of siding.
07460-2
D. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
E. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in National Evaluation
Service Report No. NER-105.
3.6 Finishing
A. Finish unprimed siding with minimum one coat high quality, alkali-resistant pruner and one
coat of either 100% acrylic exterior grade topcoat or two coats high quality, alkali-resistant,
100% acrylic exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation.
Follow paint manufachi er's written product recommendation and written application
instructions.
James Hardie Building Products
26300 La Alameda, Suite 250
Mission Viejo, California
92691 1 -888-J-HARDIE
www.jameshardic.com
' END OF SECTION
1
1
1
07160-3
1
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
' A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. EXTENT of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on the Drawings
and by provisions of this section.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. COORDINATE WORK of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper
sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability
of the work and protection of materials and finishes.
' PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALS:
A. SHEET METAL FLASHING/TRIM (Mt-Fl):
1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A 525, G90
' hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for paint; 0.239" thick (24 gage) except as
otherwise indicated.
a. Provide finish as indicated.
2. Aluminum (Alum): ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, 0.032" thick (20 gage)
except as otherwise indicated.
a. Provide finish as indicated.
B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:
1. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer.
2. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous
mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per
coat.
' 3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
nonmigrating sealant.
07600-1
11
4. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
5. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
6. Elastic Expansion Joint: Where indicated provide flexible, closed cell rubber or
plastic looped bellows mm. 3/8 thick, 5" to B' wide and with metal flanges of
.032" aluminum, 3" to 4" wideformed to profiles indicated. Provide standard
corner and intersection units and splicing materials. Provide mineral fiber
insulation in expansion joint below bellows.
2.02 FABRICATED UNITS:
A. GENERAL METAL FABRICATION:
1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and
with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate with waterproof and weather-
resistance performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to
fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and
recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning,
buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal
other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form
aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where
required.
3. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not
less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
4. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are required for proper
performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with industry standards.
5. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or
corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with
bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer/fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for
thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be
07600-2
1
permanently watertight and weatherproof
B. UNDERLAYMENT: Where aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a course of paper slip sheet and a course of polyethylene
underlayment.
C. BED FLANGES of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required
for waterproof performance.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
CLEAN EXPOSED METAL surfaces, removing substances which might cause
corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.
PROTECTION: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance
and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that
work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
07600-3
SECTION 07700
ROOF SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. PROVIDE roof accessories as required.
B. EACH ITEM MOUNTED ON ROOF shall be supported on a curb unit, unless
otherwise indicated.
' C. PIPE PENETRATIONS thru roof shall be through a pipe seal or pipe curb assembly.
D. ROOF CURBS for roof top air conditioning units are to be supplied with the units and
are not required by this Section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. SUBMIT manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions.
'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
' 2.01 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND PIPE SEALS:
A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:
1. Products by the Pate Company are specified, comparable products by Thybar
Corporation, Custom Curb, Inc., or an approved equal will be acceptable.
2. Provide products manufactured from prime steel (except for pipe seals).
' a. Structural quality: ASTM A 446.
b. Zinc coating: ASTM A 525, G90.
B. PREFABRICATED CURB UNITS:
1. Construction: Box section design of 14 ga. galvanized steel construction,
continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed
treated wood nailers, and insulated with 1-1/2" thick, rigid fiberglass board
insulation.
07700-1
1 Size: Furnish units with inside dimensions as required for each roof opening.
Verify sizes required.
3. Height: 12 inches.
4. Style: PC-la or lb, PC-2a or 2b, PC-5a or 5b (as required by deck construction) as
manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal
C. PIPE SEALS:
1. Construction: Spun aluminum base having a minimum 5 inch roof surface flange,
stepped neoprene rubber boot to be secured to base and penetrating pipe with
adjustable stainless steel clamps.
2. Size: As required for size of penetrating pipe.
3. Style: Pate Pipe Seal as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal
D. PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY UNITS:
1. Construction: 18 gage galvanized steel, unitized construction with integral base
plate, insulated with 3 pound density insulation, 2 x 2 treated wood nailer, acrylic
clad ABS plastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step neoprene boots with
stainless steel band clamps.
2. Style: PCA-l, PCA-2, or PCA-5 (as required by deck construction) as
manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. GENERAL: Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units,
and with roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of
the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and
weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates.
B. FLANGE SEALS: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a
thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal.
END OF SECTION
07700-2
SECTION 07715
GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART1-PRODUCTS
1.01 MATERIALS
A. Metal material used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be 0.050" mm finish
' aluminum unless specifically designated otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Gauges of metal used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be as specifically
' designated on the Drawings. When the Drawings omit specifying a particular gauge,
such shall be of the gauges set forth in the following descriptions of particular metals.
C. Aluminum: Sheets or strips of 3003 or 3004 alloy of the producer's standard finish.
0.050" gauge:
1. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive two (2) coats of
' water-white methacryt lacquer.
2. Isolate aluminum from other materials, including wood, by a protective
bituminous coating not less than 15 mils dry mil thickness; or, by SBS modified
' bituminous sheet felts, rubber or other techniques approve by the Project
Architect.
D. Provide downspout adapters as supplied by ADS for sizes as indicated on Drawings.
E. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM - 153 latest edition, or
' cadmium plated, (or stainless steel used in stainless steel construction)- Fastenings
shall match particular sheet metal materials to which applied. Nat Is and screws shall
have sufficient length to penetrate all metal and fabric materials and into wood
support by 3/4" minimum and shall be capable of 40 lb. each minimum Initial
1 withdrawal.
1. Flashing nails shall be a minimum of 11 gauge, barbed, with 5/8" diameter
heads, by 2" with tin caps.
' 2. Galvanized tin caps shall be of 1" or 2" diameter and 28-30 gauge flat sheet
metal.
3. Integral capped flashing nail (simplex type) with round head, galvanized, 7/8"
minimum.
F. Gutters shall be fabricated as detailed, in such a manner that: the outer Up (top edge)
' Is lower than the interior Up: so the interior bottom of the gutter sloping positively,
no less than 1/16" per lineal foot towards its discharge drain (such shall be
accomplished by a separate interior lining or bottom in a manner whereby the visible
' appearance of the gutter appears true and level horizontally: shall be supported
07715-1
1
1
frequently and adequately; shall be separately fabricated from any metal work built
into the roofing system (such as a gravel stop); shall be of special detailed
configuration to match the Drawings and details (i.e. shall not be of standard "Ogee"
or molded configuration, but of rectangular design; and shall be fabricated of
sufficiently short lengths to avoid problems with expansion and contraction.
1. Gutters shall be formed of 0.050 mill finish aluminum in accordance with
SMACNA. Plate 14-A. Gutter brackets shall be formed of 0.125 aluminum.
Gutter spacers shall be formed of 0.062 inch by I inch aluminum.
G. Downspouts shall be fabricated as detailed of rectangular shape and shall not be of
"standard off the shelf' configuration with corrugated indentions or ribs, and shall be
supported adequately at uniform and frequent vertical spacing.
1. Downspouts, elbows and downspout hangers shall be formed of 0.050 mill
finish aluminum. Downspouts shall be 4 inch by 6 inch rectangular and formed
in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 32-B. Hangers shall be formed in
accordance with SMACNA. Plate 34-G. Fasteners for gutter hangers shall be a
non-corrosive, compatible with aluminum, pan head fastener.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 INSPECTION
A. The installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the flashing and
sheet metal is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this phase of the work. Do not
proceed with this phase until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of the conditions by this
Contractor.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Workmanship shall conform to the best trade standards. Materials shall be the same
and tike materials. Do soldering slowly with heavy well heated soldering coppers of
Blount design, properly tinned before use. Tin edges of each item to be soldered with
best grade pure metal. 1-1/2 inch on both sides with rosin as flux.
B. Sheet metal counterflashing normally an integral part of fan housings (air
conditioning housing and tike items) wit I be furnished as part of such work by other
Sections of these Specifications. Other counterflashing items shall be as detailed and
specified in the Section. Transitions from roof curbs to gravity vents, fans or other
work shall be of specified metal, of low profile design with transitions sloped 45
degrees maximum. Extend counter flashing four (4) inches over base flashing.
11
C. Penetration of the roof membrane shall be with techniques other than pitch pocket '
pans where possible. However, where such must be used form "pitch pocket pans" of
07715-2
size to clear items protruding through roofing membranes by three (3) inches on all
' sides, of 0.050 aluminum, with four (4) inch horizontal (approximate) deck flange
and with a six (6) inch height.
D. Strainer units halt be fabricated from minimum 0.062" diameter non-corrosive,
Compatible wire or wire mesh, with 1/2" maximum spacing of wires of are movable
beehive design.
R Welding: Comply with requirements for welding as set forth elsewhere in these
Specifications.
' F. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanitic corrosion where they touch.
PART 4 - INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Installation shall comply with "the SMACNA Manual" recommendations for
installation.
2. It shall be required that the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently
watertight and shall not deteriorate in excess of published limitations of the
manufacturer.
B. Thermal expansion shall be provided for in al l exposed sheet metal work exceeding
10-0" in running length, except where otherwise indicated:
L On flashing, gravel stops, coping caps and trim, expansion capability shall be on
' 10"-0" maximum spacing, and located T-0" from corners and intersections.
2. Gutters shall be provided with expansion capability at intervals no greater than
501-011.
C. Fasteners and expansion provisions shall be concealed wherever possible.
D. Fill "pitch pocket pans" as follows. Install and tightly pack oakum around pipes or
other penetrating materials. Install one (I") inch of quick setting cementatious grout
above the oakum, pour hot bitumen to a level 3/4" to 1-1/2" from the pitch pan. F1 I 1
pitch pan to top with asphalt plastic roofing center.
END OF SECTION
1
07715-3
iI
SECTION 07900
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
JOINT SEALERS
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of each type of joint sealer is indicated on the Drawings, sometimes by
abbreviations as indicated herein.
B. THE REQUIRED APPLICATIONS include, but are not necessarily limited to the
' following:
I . Exterior wall joints.
2. Isolation joints between structure and other elements.
3. Flashing joints.
4. Interior wall joints around frames and between different types of materials.
5. Joints in concrete paving.
r C. "ELASTOIVIERIC SEALANT" shall apply to materials and work to seal and make
watertight all joints on the exterior of the building and joints on the interior of the
building that may be expected to expand and contract or are subject to water or
dampness.
D. CAULKING COMPOUND shall apply only to materials and work in connection with
the filling or closing of interior joints where expansion or contraction are of no
consideration and where filling and closing of these interior joints is primarily for
appearance.
E. GLAZING: Refer to Division 8 sections for sealants and other compounds and gaskets
required for installation of glass.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
IA. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations
and installation instructions for each type of material required.
07900-1
1
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. THE INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the joint surfaces and backing, their anchorage to
the structure and the conditions under which the joint sealer work is to be performed,
notifying the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work and performance of the sealers. Do not proceed with the joint
sealerwork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to the Installer.
B. WEATHER CONDITIONS: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse
weather conditions or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's
recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted
weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond
strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install
elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's
recommended installation temperature range.
1.05 SEALANT WARRANTY:
A. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY, signed by Manufacturer and Contractor; agreeing
to, within warranty period, replace/repair defective materials and workmanship defined
to include: instances of significant leakage of water or air: failures in joint adhesion,
material cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion-from joint
resistance, migration resistance„ strain resistance, or general durability failure to
perform as required as clearly specified in manufacturer's published product literature
as an inherent characteristic of the sealant material. Warranty includes responsibility for
removal and replacement of work (if any) which conceals or obstructs the replacement
of sealants. Warranty covers the following types of sealants on this project, for the
following periods of time.
1. Elastomeric sealants of every type.
2. Warranty period of 2 years after date of substantial completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL:
A. COLORS: For exposed materials, provide standard color which most closely matches
adjacent surfaces. For concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best
overall performance characteristics.
B. COMPATIBILITY: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its
compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in the joint system. 1
1
07900-2
t
1
1
1
2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
A_ FOR BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the following:
1. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant:
a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International.
b. Sikaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp.
C. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn.
d. Dynatrol I; Pecora.
2. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant (2 Pu-S):
a. Vulkem 227; Mameco International.
b. Sonolastic NP2; Sonneborn.
c. Dynatrol H; Pecora.
d. Dymeric; Tremco Mfg. Co.
B. ISOLATION JOINTS BETWEEN STRUCTURE AND OTHER MATERIALS,
provide one of the following:
I. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant (I Pu-S):
a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International.
b. S-kaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp.
c. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn.
d. Dynatrol I; Pecora.
2.03 FLASHING AND COPING JOINTS:
A. NON-SKINNING MASTIC SEALANTS, provide one of the following:
I . Polybutene Mastic Sealant.
a. Trem Tape; Tremco, Inc.
1 Polyisobutylene Mastic Sealant.
a. Curtain Wall Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
2.04 INTERIOR WALL JOINTS (CALKING), provide one of the following:
A. ACRYLIC-EMULSION SEALANT:
1. AC-30 Acrylic Latex; Pecora Corp.
2. Conolac; Sonneborn.
1 VIP Ter-Polymer; VIP Products.
4. Acrylicalk; Standard Drywall Products.
2.05 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS. PAVEMENT EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the
following:
A. TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT.
1. Vulkem 245; Mameco International.
2. Sikaflex 12 SL; Sika Chemical Corp.
3. Urexpan NR 200; Pecoa Corp.
1
07900-3
r
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. JOINT CLEANER: Provide type of joint cleaning compound recommended by sealant
or calking compound manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be cleaned.
B. JOINT PR1 MER/SEALER: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the
sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
C. BOND BREAKER TAPE: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by
the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surface where bond to the
substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-
adhesive tape wherever applicable.
D. SEALANT BACKER ROD: Compressible rod stock of extruded, closed cell
polyethylene foarn polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other material as
recommended by compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size
and shape of rod which will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of
sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and
provide a highly compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when
joint is compressed. Provide one of the following, or an approved equal.
1. Green Rod; Nomaco, Inc.
2. Dow Ethefoam; Dow Chemical Co.
E. JOINT FILLERS, PAVEMENT TYPES: Provide resilient, self-expanding and non-
extruding type premolded cork units complying with ASTM D 1752, Type III; ES HH-F
341, Type II, Class C; or AASHTO M153, Type III.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
A. COMPLY with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical
representative directs otherwise.
3.02 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. CLEAN JOINT SURFACES immediately before installation of sealant or calking
compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would
interfere with bond of sealant or calking compound.
B. PRIME OR SEAL THE JOINT SURFACES wherever shown or recommended by the
sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining
surfaces.
07900-4
1
I
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. INSTALL SEALANT BACKER ROD for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where
shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by seal ant manufacturer for the
application shown. Take precaution not to puncture backer rod during installation.
B. INSTALL BOND BREAKER TAPE wherever shown and wherever required by
manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform
property.
C. INSTALL PAVEMENT TYPE JOINT FILLERS below sealant and backer rod as
recommended by manufacturer of sealant being used-
D. APPLY SEALANT MATERIAL PRIOR TO application of paint, sealers or water
repellants to adjacent surfaces.
E_ EMPLOY ONLY PROVEN INSTALLATION TECHNIQUES, which will ensure that
sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets,
with complete "Wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as
otherwise indicated, tool sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
' adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical
surface, fill joint to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
F. INSTALL SEALANTS TO DEPTHS as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by
the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the
center (thin) section of the bead:
I. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and
subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth
equal to 75% of joint width, and neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8"
' deep.
2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic,
fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep
nor less than 1/4" deep.
3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds, fill joints
to a depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width.
G. SPILLAG: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining
surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by
whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.
3.04 CURE AND PROTECTION:
A. CURE SEALANTS and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive
strength and surface durability. Advise the Contractor of procedures required for the
cure and protection of joint sealers during the construction period so that they will be
1
07900-5
1
without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering at the lime of
Project acceptance.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
n
07900-b
1
1
f]
F1
1
1
1
r
1
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel doors
B. Steel frames
C. Steel architectural stick systems
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B. Section 08710 -Door Hardware
C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A 924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic
Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
3. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, High Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
4. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
5. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSIIDIU A115 - Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel
Doors and Frames.
2. ANSI/DH A115.IG - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
3. ANSI A156.7 - Hinge Template Dimensions.
4. ANSI A 250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance
for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.
6. ANSI A 250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
08110-1
6. ANSI A 250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
7. ANSI A 250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
8. ANSI/SDI 250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
C. SDI - Steel Door Institute
1. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames.
2. SDI 111 - Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames and Accessories.
3. SDI 112 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
4. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. SDI 118 - Basic Fire Door Requirements.
6. SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
7. SDI 124 - Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
D. NAAMM/HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
I. HMMA 840 - Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
2. IIlVIMA 820 TNO1- Grouting Hollow Metal Frames
3. HM[MA 820 TN03 - Guidelines for Glazing of Hollow Metal Transom, Sidelight
and Windows
E. Building Code references
1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective's.
2. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other
Opening Protective's
3. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
4. ANSI/UL IOC - Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies
5. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
6. UL - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc
7. WH - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International Inc.
8. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 361 Guidelines
9. Miami - Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202 and PA 203.
10. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203
1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:
A. Doors and frames: conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this
specification that door hardware and its application comply or exceed the standards for
labeled openings. In case of conflicts in required fire protection ratings, provide fire
ratings as required by NFPA and UL.
08110-2
i
B. Fire door assemblies in exit enclosures and exit passageways: maximum transmitted
' temperature end point of not more than 250°F (121 °C) above ambient at the end of 30
minutes of the standard fire test exposure.
r 1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review six (6) complete copies of the hollow metal shop drawings covering
complete identification of items required for the project. Include manufacturer's
names and identification of product. Included six (6) complete copies of catalog cuts
and/or technical data sheets and other pertinent data as required to indicate compliance
with these specifications.
1. Shop Drawings: submit complete and detailed with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance, and design criteria, materials and similar data
to enable the Architect to review the information as required.
B. Indicate frames configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for
hardware, reinforcement, to ensure doors and frames are properly prepared and
coordinated to receive hardware.
C. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for glass
lights and louvers.
'
D. s installation instructions, including a current copy of ANSI
Submit manufacturer
A250.11 as part of the shop drawing submittal.
E. Shop drawings, product data, and samples: stamp with Contractor's stamp verifying
they have been coordinated and reviewed for completeness and compliance with the
contract documents.
F. Shop drawings submitted without the above requirements will be considered
incomplete, will NOT be reviewed, and will be returned directly to the Contractor.
G. Follow the same procedures for re-submittal as the initial submittal with the
appropriate dates revised.
H. Provide evidence of manufacturer's membership in the Steel Door Institute.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Select a qualified hollow metal distributor who is a direct account of the manufacturer
of the products furnished. In addition, that distributor must have in their regular
employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), a Certified Door
Consultant (CDC) or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC), who will be
available to consult with the Architect and Contractor regarding matters affecting the
door and frame opening.
1 08110-3
B. Conform to requirements of the above reference standards. Submit test reports upon
request by the Owner or Architect.
C. Underwriters' Laboratories and Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey, labeled
fire doors and frames:
1. Label fire doors and frames listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories
standard UL I OC, and Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with applicable issue of
ANSI/NFPA 80.
3. Manufacture Underwriters' Laboratories labeled doors and frames under the UL
factory inspection program and in strict compliance to UL procedures, and
provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic loading
capability indicated by the opening class.
4. Manufacture Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey labeled doors and
frames under the ITS/WH factory inspection program and in strict compliance to
ITS/WH procedures, and provide the degree of fare protection capability indicated
by the opening class.
5. Affixed physical label or approved marking to fire doors and/or fire door frames,
at an authorized facility as evidence of compliance with procedures of the labeling
agency. Labels to be metal, paper or plastic. Stamped or die cast labels are not
permitted. Labels are not to be removed, defaced or made illegible while the door
is in service as covered in NFPA Pamphlet 80.
6. Conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification
that hardware and its application comply or exceed the standards for labeled
openings. In case of conflict between types required for fire protection, famish
type required by NFPA and UL.
D. Severe Storm Products:
1. Hurricane Doors: Door systems required to comply with the Miami-Dade County
Product Control Approval System or the Florida Building Code Approval System
meeting the requirements of Miami-Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202,
PA 203 and Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS
203.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Steel Door Institute.
F. Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in
this Section.
08110-4
u
1.07 SAMPLES:
A. If requested by the Architect, submit a 18" X 24" cut-away sample door with
provisions for lockset, hinge and corner section of frame.
1. Construct door sample to show vertical edge construction, top and bottom
construction, insulation, face stiffeners, hinge, and other applied hardware
reinforcements. Include louver sections and glazing stop where applicable.
2. Construct frame sample to show frame profile, welded corner joint, welded hinge
reinforcement, dust cover boxes, floor anchors and wall anchors. Include panel
and louver sections and glazing stops where applicable.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of Doors
1. Store doors vertically in a dry area, under proper cover. Place the units on at least
4" high wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid
storage in non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber
and promote rusting. If the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove
protective wrapping immediately. Provide a 4" space between the doors to permit
air circulation. Proper storage is required to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI
A250.10 and HMMA 840.
B. Storage of Frames
1. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover on 4" wood
sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-
vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote
rusting. Store assembled frames in a vertical position, five units maximum in a
stack. Provide a 2" space between frames to permit air circulation.
2. Provide proper storage for doors and frames, to maintain the quality and integrity
of the factory applied paint, and maintain the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10
and HMMA 840.
3. Sand, touch up and clean prime painted surfaces prior to finish painting in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or
fabrication of internal cutouts and reinforcement for door hardware, electric devices
and recessed items.
B. Coordinate work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation.
C. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware.
1 08110-5
D. Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers for doors and frames specified are listed below. Only the
products of the listed manufacturers will be accepted. No alternates will be accepted.
1. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio
2. Curries, Mason City, Iowa
B. Provide steel doors and frames from a single manufacturer.
2.02 DOORS:
A. Construct exterior/interior doors to these designs and gages:
1. Exterior Doors: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class
A60, 16 gage Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, with closed tops.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements
with galvannealed doors.
b. Close tops of exterior swing-out doors to eliminate moisture
penetration. Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted.
2. Interior Doors: Cold-rolled steel, A 1008 18 gage
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements
with galvannealed doors.
3. Grain-Tech factory finished doors indicated on door schedule as HMGT.
4. Factory prime painted doors indicated on door schedule as HM.
5. Hardware Reinforcements:
a. Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges: minimum 7 gage [0.180"
(4.7mm)].
b. Lock reinforcements: minimum 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)].
c. Closer reinforcements: minimum 14 gage [0.067" (1.7mm)], 20" long.
d. Galvannealed doors: include galvannealed hardware reinforcements.
e. Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the door.
08110-6
1
1
1
1
1
f
1
f. Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required.
6. Glass moldings and stops (both labeled and non-labeled doors):
a. Fabricate glass trim from 24 gage [.6mm] steel conforming to:
1 Interior openings ASTM designation A 366 cold rolled steel
2 Exterior openings ASTM designation A 424 Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated galvannealed steel with a zinc coating of 0.06 ounces per
square foot (A60) for exterior openings.
b. Install trim into the door as a four sided welded assembly with mitered,
reinforced and welded corners.
c. Trim.: identical on both sides of the door.
d. Exposed fasteners are not permitted. Labeled and non-labeled doors: use
the same trim.
e. Acceptable mounting methods:
1. Fit to a formed area of the door face, not extending beyond the
do face, and interlocking into the recessed area.
2. Ca the cutout not extend more than 1/16" [1.6mm] from the
do7 face.
B. Full Flush Type Doors Construction
1. ANSI-A250.4 criteria and tested to 5,000,000 operating cycles.
2. Approved door core constructions:
a. Honeycomb: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated
with impregnated Kraft honeycomb core completely filling the
inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels
using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb
core. Acceptable products:
b. Steelcraft: L Grain Tech® Doors: Fabricated from steel that has
an embossed wood grain pattern extending the full height and
width of the door. Provide doors with continuous vertical
mechanical inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with
visible edge seams. The wood grain embossment minimum .005"
deep. The wood grain face sheets must be cleaned, phosphatized
and prime painted with a stain absorbing primer. Vertical edges
must be stained using conventional stains to achieve a (select 1)
[ash, birch, mahogany, maple, oak, walnut,] color. After staining,
08110-7
the door must be clear coated with W inhibitors. Applied grain
pattern or material will not be permitted Acceptable products:
1 Steelcra$ GrainTech
2 Curries: Curristain
3. Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-
locking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams, or a one piece full
height 14 gage channel. Apply a continuous bead of structural epoxy in the
internal vertical connection.
a. Welded Vertical Edges (W): Continuous vertical mechanical
interlocking joint; edge seams welded, epoxy filled, and ground
smooth.
1 Steelcra$ LW edge option
2 Curries: T edge option
4. Bevel hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mrn)_ Square
edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not acceptable.
5_ Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gage, welded to both
panels.
C. Hurricane Doors: Designed to resist the cyclic pressures, static pressures and missile
impact loads as detailed in the Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval System
of the Florida Building Code Approval System and meets the requirements of Miami -
Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202, PA 203 and Florida Building Code test
protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203.
2.03 DOOR FRAMES:
A. Construct exterior and metal door frames to these profiles, designs and gages;
1. Exterior Frames: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class
A60, 16 gage Interior Frames in Masonry: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed
steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60,16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] galvannealed steel.
B. Flush Frames: knocked down for field assembly or set-up and welded with temporary
shipping bars. Factory die-mitered corner connections reinforced with four integral
tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head. Unless otherwise indicated, frame will
have 2" faces and 5/8" stops. Frame depths per the architectural door schedule.
1. Provide frames with a minimum of six wall anchors and two adjustable base
anchors of manufacturer's standard design. Acceptable products:
a. Steelcraft: F
b. Curries: M
2. Provide welded 3 sided frames as follows:
a. Full profile welded-
08110-8
I Weld miter joints between head and jamb faces completely
along their length either internally or externally.
2 Internally weld perimeter profile joints full length of soffit
and rabbets with hairline seams on external meeting
surfaces. Grind and finish face joints smooth.
b. Weld-in base anchor attaching plate in each jamb for field
installation of loose base anchors to allow proper anchoring at
base of frame. Acceptable products:
1 Steelcraft: DW
2 Curries: C with P0087
C. Dimpled holes and face screw application. Acceptable products:
1 Steelcraft: K
2 Curries: C
C. Prepare flames to receive inserted type door silencers (3) per strike jamb on single
doors, and (2) per head for pair of doors. Stick-on silencers are not permitted.
' D. Frame Hardware Reinforcements
1. Mortise hinge reinforcement: minimum 7 gage [0.180" (4.7mm)].
a. Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement for top hinge on all
exterior, cross corridor, and stairwell frames, in accordance with
SDI 111-H, Example "A" Application, where full mortise hinges
are specified.
2. Strike reinforcements: minimmu 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] and prepared for an
ANSI-A115.1-2 strike.
3. Closer reinforcement: minimum 14 gage [0.067" (1.7mm)] steel.
4. Projection weld hinge and strike reinforcements to the door frame.
5. Provide metal plaster guards for all mortised cutouts.
6. Provide adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required.
7. Include galvanized hardware reinforcements in all galvannealed frames.
2.05 FABRICATION:
I A. Face Welded Frames:
1. Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces along their
length either internally or externally. Grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face
joints with no visible face seams.
08110-9
2. Externally weld, grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints at meeting
mullions or between mullions and other frame members per a current copy of
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
3. Provide two temporary steel spreaders (welded to the jambs at each rabbet of door
openings) on welded frames during shipment. Remove temporary steel spreaders
prior to installation of the frame.
2.06 FINISH:
A. Doors, frames and frame components are required to be cleaned, phosphatized, and
finished with one coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the
ANSI/SDI A250.10 "Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
PART 3 EXECUTION:
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute's recommended erection
instructions for steel frames ANSI A250.11.
B. Install label doors and frames in accordance with NFPA-80.
C. Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation, of frames.
D. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align and brace until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is complete, remove temporary wood spreaders.
1. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.
Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on
exposed faces.
E. Provide full height 3/8" to 1-1/2" thick strip of polystyrene foam blocking at frames
requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified. Apply the strip to the back of
the frame, where the hinge is to be installed, to facilitate field drilling or tapping.
F. Where grouting is required in masonry, provide and install temporary bottom and
intermediate wood spreaders to maintain proper width and avoid bowing or deforming of
frame members. Refer to ANSI A250.11-2001, Standard.
2. Hollow Metal Frames to receive grouting: comply with a current copy
of ANSI/SDI Standard A250.8, paragraph 4.2.2, whereby grout will be
mixed to provide a 4" maximum slump consistency and hand toweled
into place. Do not use grout mixed to a thinner, pumpable consistency;
this practice is not recommended and not permissible. Refer to
1 A04A 820 TNO1 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames.
G. Provide a vertical wood brace during grouting of frame at openings over 4'0" wide, to
prevent sagging of frame header.
08110-10
L'
it
1-1
1
1
1
11
H. Glaze and seal exterior transom, sidelight and window frames in accordance with
HMMA-820 TN03.
1. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers' instructions and Section
08710 FINISH HARDWARE of these Specifications. Install hardware with, only factory-
provided fasteners. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and
jambs, to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.
3.02 ADJUSTING:
A. Final Adjustments: Adjust operating doors and hardware items just prior to final
inspection and acceptance by the Owner and Architect. Leave work in complete and
proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or
frames that are damaged, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat, and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective measures required throughout the construction period to ensure that
door and frame units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal
weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
08110-11
Section 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as
hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those
items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. Aluminum Doors and Frames
C. Wood Doors and Frames
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified
herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building.
B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary,
as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume
all responsibility for correct quantities.
C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having
jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict
therewith in these specifications.
D. FIRE-RATED OPENINGS:
1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU)
Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL I OC.
This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware.
Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and
sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and
doorframe labels.
2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide
supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped
with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire
Exit Hardware"_
E. FASTENERS:
1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared
for machine screw installation.
2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically,
all exposed screws installation.
1
08710-1
3. Insofar as practical, famished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that
have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished
to match adjacent hardware.
4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts
(sex bolts).
F. HURRICANE OPENINGS
Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction.
This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware.
Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the
types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the
door and door frame.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished
and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This
person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general
contractor at reasonable times during the course of work.
B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies
of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the
numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit
the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected
schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of
the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility
for furnishing correct quantities.
C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted
to the architect and written approval received.
D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by
manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate
fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate
progress of work.
E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate
the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor
of the products specified.
F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a
post-installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any
adjustments or replacements of hardware as required.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing
contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance
of hardware to job; store in designated location.. Each item shall be clearly marked
with its intended location.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer
as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits.
08710-2
1
' B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against
failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years
commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of
failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one
manufacturer.
B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues
of the following manufacturers.
PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE
' 1) Hinges Hager Stanley, Bommer
2) Locks & Latches Best Schlage
3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best None (No Substitution)
4) Exit Devices Von Duprin None (No Substitution)
5) Door Closers LCN None (No Substitution)
6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson
7) Push Button Access Schlage CO series None (No Substitution)
8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics Sentronics
9) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Stops, Flushbolts
10) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Quality
11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard Pemko, Zero
12) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Trimco
13) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control
C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal,
is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days
prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum.
2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE:
A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome
(26D). Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Exit
Devices to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D),
Flat Goods to be Satin Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds
to be Mill Finish Aluminum.
08710-3
r
Z03 HINGES AND PIVOTS:
A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be
furnished with non-removable pins (NRP).
B. Interior butts shall be as listed.
C. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt
for each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per
leaf.
2.04 KEYING:
A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system.
B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. Lock manufacturer shall issue Bittings,
directly to the city only.
C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master
keys, two (2) construction and two (2) permanent control keys.
D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The
city will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores
become the property of the city upon completion of the work.
2.05 LOCKSETS:
A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in
"35H" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction
"93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design
2.06 EXIT DEVICES:
A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All
devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of
Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must
have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories.
B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a
BHMA certified testing laboratory- A written certification showing successful
completion of a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath
to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to
prevent latch bolt tampering.
D. Vertical rob exit devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim
exit devices preferred.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (No Substitution)
08710}
' 2.07 DOOR CLOSERS:
A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel
arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and
adjustable spring to provide up to 501o increase in spring power. Closers shall be
furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public
spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall
conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated.
B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low
wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All
door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA
certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a
minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature
ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring
seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated
doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the
standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.
' D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot
design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have
separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and
hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the
swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to
' protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are
not acceptable.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (No Substitution)
2.08 TRU%4 AND PLATES:
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish.
Kick plates to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2)
inches less full width of door.
B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in
the hardware schedule.
2.09 DOOR STOPS.
A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware
from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series
are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or
FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops,
furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series.
08710-5
2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP:
A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule.
2.11 DOOR SILENCERS:
A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal
frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware
schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.
B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but
not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are
not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a
pre-installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's
instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make
any final adjustments to the finish hardware.
3.03 PROTECTION:
A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a
covered and dry place.
B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the
construction phase.
END OF SECTION
08710-6
r
SECTION 08711
r
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
r
Hardware Group No. 01
For use on door(s):
' 01 02 04 05
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK CO-200-MS-70-KP-RHO-BD 626 SCE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 H 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE
I SET SEALS 1885 BLK ZER
I EA THRESHOLD 65A AL ZER
r Hardware Group No. 02
For use on door(s):
03
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080B 06A 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
I EA KICK PLATE 4041
8400 10" X 2" LDW 689
630 LCN
IVE
I EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS
1 EA THRESHOLD 188S
65A BLK
AL ZER
ZER
Hardware Group No. 03
For use on door(s):
06
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr
3 EA HINGE 5BB 14.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK CO-200-MS-70-KP-RHO-BD 626 SCE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE
08711
r
I SET SEALS 1885 BLK ZER
Hardware Group No. 04 EXTRA
For use on door(s)-
EXTRA
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr
1 EA HANDHELD DEVICE HHD KIT SCE
END OF SECTION
08711 2
SECTION 09200
LATH AND PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. TYPES OF WORK INCLUDE:
1. Metal support, furring and lathing.
2. Portland cement plastering.
B. RELATED WORK:
1. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 06113.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING STANDARDS: ANSI A 42.2 AND A42.3
B. LATHING, FURRING AND SUSPENSION STANDARD: ASTM-C 841.
C. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/4" in 8'-0" for bow
or warp of surface, and for plumb or level.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation
instructions for each material, including other data as may be required to show
compliance with these specifications.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. DELIVER, STORE AND PROTECT manufactured materials to comply with
referenced standards.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. PROTECT CONTIGUOUS WORK from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and
other harmful effects which might result from plastering.
09200-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL SUPPORT, FURRING, LATHING AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
A. GENERAL:
1. Metals and Finishes:
a_ Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized finish on all materials except as
otherwise indicated.
b. Exposed Plastering Accessories: Provide zinc alloy accessories for exterior
work unless otherwise indicated.
c. Heavy Gage Members (Rolled Channels, etc.): Provide with rust-inhibitive
paint finish in non-exposed interior areas and galvanized finish in non-
exposed areas.
2. Wire Ties: Galvanized soft steel wire,
B. METAL LATHING MATERIALS:
1. General: Where not otherwise indicated, comply with MLFA "Technical Bulletin
101" and ASTM C 841 for selection of metal lath for each application indicated.
a. Product Standards: Comply with FS QQ-L-101.
2. Self Furring Diamond Mesh Lath: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd., std., mesh sheet with 1/4"
deformations.
3. Diamond Mesh Lath: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
C. CEILING/SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEM:
1. Size following components to comply with reference standards unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Main Runners: Hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel.
b. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 galvanized.
2. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, inserts, or other devices
applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and
whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction
practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated hanger loading
except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated hanger loading.
a. Channel Cross Furring: Hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel channels.
D. METAL PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND REINFORCEMENT:
1. General: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats of
plaster to be applied.
2. Square-Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer's standard with expanded or short
flange to suit application, zinc alloy.
3, Control Joints: No. 15 sized to full plaster thickness, expanded flanges, zinc alloy.
4. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate penetration of
the substrate.
09200-2
2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS:
A. GENERAL: Provide either neat or ready-mixed (where applicable) materials, at
Installer's option, complying with ANSI A42.2.
B. BASE-COAT CEMENT: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or IA.
C. BASE---COAT LIME: Special finished hydrated lime, Type S.
D. BASE-COAT AGGREGATE: Sand.
E. PREPARED FINISH COAT: Factory-prepared finish for portland cement plaster, type
recommended by the manufacturer for texture indicated.
1. Texture: Sand-float finish for painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. GENERAL: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations where other more stringent requirements are not indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES:
A. ANCHOR EACH FLANGE of accessories 8" o.c. to plaster base.
B. MITER OR COPE accessory corners and install with tight joints accurately aligned.
C. SET ACCESSORIES plumb, level and true to line, with a tolerance of 1/8" in 10'-0".
D. INSTALL CASING BEADS at terminations of plaster work, except where plaster is
' indicated to pass through other work, and be concealed by lapping work, and except
where special screeds, bases or frames act as casing beads.
E. INSTALL PREFABRICATED CONTROL JOINTS of one-piece design where shown
as "Control Joint" or as required to control plaster cracks. Back control joints with 2"
wide butyl tape applied to the sheathing. Install joints with flanges under self-furring
' lath and attach with Bostitch 9/16" "G" staples or equal, spaced 6" apart on each flange.
Break supporting members, sheathing and metal lath behind control joints. Apply
sealant at all splices, intersections and terminals.
303 APPLICATION OF METAL LATH:
' A. EXTERIOR LATH OVER GYPSUM SHEATHING: Apply self-furring metal lath over
gypsum sheathing and No. 15 asphalt felt with long dimension across steel studs, with
09200-3
r
ends lapped I" and staggered in adjacent courses, with sides lapped 1/2". Screw-attach
lath through gypsum sheathing to steel studs and runners with 1 1/4" Type 5-12
Pancake Head Cadmium-plated Screws 8" o.c.
B. EXTERIOR LATH OVER FURRING CHANNELS: Apply diamond mesh lath, as
specified, over furring channels where indicated. Apply with long dimension across
supports, with ends lapped 1" and staggered in adjacent courses, with sides lapped 1/2".
Where laps occur between supports, they shall be laced or tied with 18 gage tie wire.
Secure lath to all supports at intervals not exceeding 6"_
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLASTER:
A. MECHANICALLY MIX PLASTER materials at the project site. Do not hand mix
except where small amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster.
B. SEQUENCE PLASTER installation properly with the installation and protection of
other work, so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the work.
C. PLASTER FLUSH WITH built-in or accessories which act as a plaster ground, unless
otherwise shown.
D. THICKNESSES and number of coats of plaster:
1. Provide 2-coat plaster installation over masonry.
2. Provide 3-coat plaster installation over metal lath on furring.
3. Provide 3/4" thickness over metal lath.
4. Provide 1/2" thickness over masonry.
E. TEXTURE OF PLASTER FINISHES: Except as otherwise indicated, apply finish-coat
as follows:
1. Sand-float finish.
F. CURE PORTLAND CEMENT plaster by maintaining each coat in a moist condition
for 2 days following application; keep enclosed and fog-spray (after initial set) as
required to prevent dry-out-
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. CUT, PATCH, POINT-UP AND REPAIR PLASTER as necessary to accommodate
other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to
eliminate blisters, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, and
similar defects, including areas of the work which do not comply with specified
tolerances, and where bond to the substrate has failed.
09200-4
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION and enclosures of other work. Promptly
remove plaster from surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair walls and other
surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering
work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers and
equipment.
B. TNSTALLER shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of plaster
from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction work.
END OF SECTION
09200-5
' SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this
Section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. TYPES of work include:
' I. Gypsum drywall including screw-type support system.
2_ Gypsum drywall applied to wood furring.
3. Drywall finishing (joint tape-and-compound treatment).
ANCE
ASSU
1.03 :
QUALITY
R
A. GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD: Comply with ASTM C 840 for application and
finishing of gypsum board.
B. METAL SUPPORT STANDARD: ASTM C 754.
C. MANUFACTURER: Obtain gypsum boardproducts from a single manufacturer, or
' from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.
D. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4"
' in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
' A. CERTIFICATION: Contractor shall submit Certification that all metal studs installed in
project, as work of this section, comply with ASTM C 645 Standard and gage indicated.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. DELIVER, IDENTIFY, STORE AND PROTECT gypsum drywall materials to comply
with referenced standards.
09250-1
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Comply with referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
101 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS:
A. PARTITION SUPPORT MATERIALS:
1. Studs: ASTM C 645; 25 gage unless otherwise indicated. U.S. gypsum products or
equal,
a. Depth of Section: 3-5/8", except as otherwise indicated.
b. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and
ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work.
C. Stud System Accessories: Provide stud manufacturer's standard clips, shoes,
ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as needed for a complete
stud system.
2. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 25 gage, hat-shaped.
B. CEILING/SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEM:
1. General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C 754, unless
otherwise indicated. U.S. Gypsum products or equal
2. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold-rolled.
3. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
4_ Angle-Type Hangers: Not less than 7/8" x 7/8" x 16-gage galvanized steel formed
angles, with bolted connections and 5/16" diameter bolts. (Provide where required
by Code or by heavy loading or by exceptional uplift resistance).
5. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast-in-place concrete inserts or
other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling
hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard
construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load
supported except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads.
6. Furring Members: ASTM C 645, 0.0179" mm. thickness of base metal, hat-shaped.
7. Furring Members: ASTM C645, 0.179" mm. thickness of base metal, C-shaped
studs. (Provide for spans of more than 4").
8. Furring Anchorages: 16-gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-
type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and
complying with C 754.
2.02 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:
A. EXPOSED GYPSUM BOARD (GypBd): (Also known as gypsum wallboard). Regular
type with tapered long edges.
1. Edge Profile: Special rounded or beveled edge.
2. Thickness: 1/2" except where otherwise indicated.
3. Sheet Size: Maximum length available which will minimize end joints.
09250-2
1
s
1
1
1
1
t
4. Type X: Provide where required (fire-resistive).
5. Water-Resistant Type (WR-): Provide in wet areas. U.S. Gypsum products or equal
103 TRIM ACCESSORIES:
AGENERAL: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for
drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either
knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for
concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim-
beads, and one-piece control joint beads.
2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
GENERAL: ASTM C 475; type recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated, except as otherwise indicated.
B. JOINT TAPE: Perforated type.
C. JOINT COMPOUND: Ready-mixed vinyl-type for interior use.
1. Grade: 2 separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling
depressions, and one for topping and sanding.
2. Provide water resistant type for treatment of water resistant boards: Sheetrock
Brand W/R Compound by U.S. Gypsum Co.
2.05 NUSCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. GENERAL: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of type and grade
recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board.
B. GYPSUM BOARD FASTENERS: Comply with ASTM-C 840.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
1. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be
adequately supported on gypsum board alone.
2. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where
gypsum drywall stud systems abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, extend partition stud system through acoustical
ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to the structural support or substrate above the
ceiling. (Where partitions are supported from overhead construction, support them
from structural elements and not from metal decks, if any).
4. Space studs 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.
5. Frame door openings with vertical studs securely attached by screws at each jamb
09250-3
either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frame; install runner track
sections (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Provide runner tracks of same gage as jamb studs. Space jack studs same as
partition studs.
b. Install 20 gage studs at each jamb for all doors 2'-8" wide to 4'-0" wide
weighing not more than 200 lbs., and for all doors less than 2'-8" wide
weighing more than 100 lbs., but not more than 200 lbs.
b. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door
openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required
above door heads.
7. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring blocking and bracing at openings
and terminations in the work, and at locations required to support fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishing and similar work which cannot be
adequately supported directly on gypsum board alone.
3.02 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A PRE-INSTALLATIONCONFERENCE: Meet at project site with installers of related
work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to
be concealed by gypsum drywall has been accomplished, and that supplementary
framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed.
B. INSTALL WALL/PARTITION BOARDS vertically to avoid end-butt joints wherever
possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.
C. DO NOT INSTALL IMPERFECT, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a
light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards.
Do not force into place.
D. LOCATE EITHER EDGE OR END JOINT over supports, except in horizontal
applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided
behind end joints. Position boards so that both tapered edge joints abut, and mill-cut or
field-cut end joints abut. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger
vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
E. ATTACH GYPSUM BOARD TO FRAMING AND BLOCKING as required for
additional support at openings and cutouts.
F. SPACE FASTENERS in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and I
manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
3.03 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION:
A. SINGLE-LAYER FASTENING METHODS: Apply gypsum boards to supports
as follows:
1. Fasten to metal studs with screws.
09250-4
1
2. Fasten to wood supports with nails or screws.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. GENERAL: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as
required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing
or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. INSTALL METAL CORNER BEADS at external corners of drywall work.
C. INSTALL METAL EDGE TRIM whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be
exposed or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with
face flange to receive joint compound. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted
I to other work.
105 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL FMSHING:
A. GENERAL: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim
accessories, penetrations, fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to
prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using
type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
I. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessory is
indicated.
2. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and
sand between last two coats and after last coat.
3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK:
A. INSTALLER SHALL ADVISE CONTRACTOR of required procedures for protecting
' gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction
period.
1
END OF SECTION
09250-5
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS.
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A_ EXTENT of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings, in schedules and
as specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURER Provide eachtype ofresilient flooring and accessories as produced
by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants.
1_ Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by
a single manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. SAMPLES: Submit 3 samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring
required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full-size tile units.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. MAINTAIN NM411VIUM TEMPERATURE of 65°F in spaces to receive resilient
flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less
than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55°F
in areas where work is completed.
& INSTALL RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES after other finishing
operations, including painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs
and environmental conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of
products being installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
09650-1
A. MANUFACTURER, COLORS AND PATTERNS: Armstrong "Excelon" or equal
products as approved and in colors and patterns as selected from manufacturer's
standards.
B. RESILIENT FLOORING:
1. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) ES SS-T-312, Type IV.
a. Size: 12" x 12" x 1/8".
C. ACCESSORIES:
1. Resilient Base: Provide base complying with ES SS-W-40, Type II vinyl, with
matching end stops and preformed or molded comer units, and as follows:
a. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 1/8" gage.
c. Style: Standard top-set cove, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition,
tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected from standard
colors available; not less than 1" wide.
3. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
4. Concrete Slab-Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE areas and conditions under which resilient flooring
and accessories are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. BROOM CLEAN OR VACUUM surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor, Start of
flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility
for completed work.
1. Use leveling compound as recommended by floor manufacturer for filling small
cracks and depressions in subfloors.
2. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are
sufficiently cured and ready to receive .flooring.
3. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
09650-2
A. GENERAL:
I- Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, and edgings. Scribe
around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend
' flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and similar openings, and under furnishing
and equipment.
1 Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items
occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to
perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
' 3. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure
' adhesion.
4_ Tile in each room shall be laid so that grain in tile is laid in alternate directions,
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
' B. TILE FLOORS:
1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
' offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as
necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile
square to room axis, unless otherwise shown.
2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
C. ACCESSORIES:
1. Apply resilient base to walls, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where
base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed
corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside
corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with
continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
I2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive.
Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
104 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A- REMOVE ANY EXCESS ADHESIVE or other surface blemishes, using neutral type
cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with
heavy Kraft paper or other covering.
B. FrMSHING: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work,
thoroughly clean floors and accessories.
END OF SECTION
1
' 09650-3
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 oa=f !i'iciuded
A. Work described in this section includes surface preparation and installation of Silikal reactive resin industrial floor system.
B. See drawings for locations and quantities.
1.02 Related Work - Specified elsewhere
A. Gast-in-place concrete (Section 03300)
1. See Paragraph 1.08 - Requirements for New Concrete.
B. Painting (Section 09900)
1.10,3, Systern Description
' A. The Silikal 61 CQ is a 4-6mm (3/16"-1/4") thick troweled surfacing composite of Silikal 100% reactive binder resin and
Silikal colored quartz aggregate with specified Silikal primer and topcoat.
B. The Silikal coating system shall cure completely and be available to normal operations in no more than 90 minutes at
Temperatures as low as 0 °C. after application of the final coat.
C. The finished Silikal floor coating system shall be uniform in color combinations, texture, and appearance. All edges
that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and
cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking
' technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges.
D. See Paragraph 3.04 and/or 3.07 for number and thicknesses of each coat/layer in each system.
E. All resins must be manufactured and tested under an ISO 9001 registered quality system and ISO 14001 ecology
management system.
1,0 Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Acceptable manufacturer: Silikal GmbH, Germany.
B. Applicator Qualifications:
' 1. Pre-qualification requirements: Only approved applicators, licensed by Silikal shall be considered for qualifcatilon. In no case
will Silikal permit the application of any of its materials by untrained, non-approved Contractor or personnel.
2. Each approved applicator shall have been qualified by the Manufacturer as knowledgeable in all phases of
surface preparation.
3. Each approved applicator must have three (3) years experience of installing resinous flooring systems and submit a fist of five
projects/references as a prequialification requirement. At least one of the five projects/ references must be of equal size, quan-
tity, and magnitude to this project as a prequaGfiration requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projects/ref-
erences to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalftation requirement.
C. Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. The only approved and specified subcontractors for this resurfacing work shall be for shot-blast cleaning of the
concrete substrate.
D. Acceptance Sample:
1. Representative sample of the specified flooring system shall be submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the
project. All bidders shall inspect the "acceptance sample" before submitting their bids.
2. The installed flooring system shad be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective filmlayers, color,
' texture, overall appearance and finish.
Silikal America -
®609-B Fertilla Street Carrollton, GA 30117 E19 &7 Ali = 6i'GQ ,
xa Cede Specification
v 888.830.1404 770.830.9213
Q www.silikalamerica.com @ rnfo®silikalamerica.com ) tfa ]; of 8
R ?
E. Bond Testing:
1. Surface preparation efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior to application of the
flooring system(s).
2. See paragraph 3.03 - B or consult with Material Manufacturer for speck procedure-
F. Pre-Job Meeting
1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator, and Material
Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this specification,
application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules.
Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner.
1.05 Reference Standards
A. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
B. ACI 302.1 R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and (Food and Drug Administration (FDA) authorization) for
incidental contact with foodstuffs.
1.06 Submittals
A. Acceptance Sample: As required by owner, one foot square (1 ft. by 1 ft.) sample of the specified acrylic flooring system
applied to hardboard or similar backing for rigidity and ease of handling.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive data and specific recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and
application of materials.
C. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each respective product to be used.
D. Cleaning and Maintenance
1.07 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
A. All material shall be delivered in original Manufacturer's sealed containers with all pertinent labels intact and
legible.
B. Store materials in dry protected area between 25° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight. Protect from
open flame; keep all containers grounded.
C. Follow all Manufacturer's specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling.
1.08 PtojeettSite Conditions
A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 32° to 85° Fahrenheit during application and cure,
unless a special formulation is being used and Manufacturer has been consulted.
B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface
temperature shall be at least 5 degrees above the dew point.
C. Conditions required of new concrete to be coated.
1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully cured
for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture testing.
2. Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be used.
3. Concrete shall have a "rubbed" finish; float or derby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is neither
necessary nor desirable).
4. Drains should be set to the concrete grade rather than raised to the finished grade of the topping.
Silikal America 87 zs -s?.Co
to 609-B Fertilla Street Carrollton, GA 30117
t 888.830.1404 14 770.830.9213 k?ida'_Specfficatk-
® www.silikalamerica.com @ mfoftlikalamerimcom , Page. 2-af 8
1
L
D. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as
determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing. Concrete R/H must be 85% or less as measured by protimeter. Readings
greater than 5 by the Calcium Chloride method or 85% by protimeter, may require a preliminary treatment with
Silikal RE40.
E. Foodstuffs are the responsibility of the Owner and shall have been removed from the area of application by the
Owner or his representatives.
F. Vapor barriers and/or suitable means shall have been installed beneath grade slabs to prevent vapor
transmission. Consult technical dept.
1.0 Warrant.?r
A. Silikal warrants that materials shipped to buyers are at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and
will perform substantially according to Silikal published literature if used strictly in accordance with Silikal's prescribed proce-
dures and prior to expiration date.
8. Silikal's liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchased.
C. Silikal has no responsibility for the application and processing of products and is under no circumstances liable to any
third party whatsoever.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Silikal GmbH, Germany
2.,02 Materials
A. Silikal 61 CQ Decorative Quartz Flooring
1. Moisture Vapor Treatment (if required)
Silikal RE40
2. Saturating Primer/Sllikal Coat:
Silikal R41 with Additive 1
3. Patching/Sloping (If required)
Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete
4. Caving (if required):
Silikal HK20 with Silikal filler CQ
Prao'
Moisture Ilapar
1'reabnent- READ
5. Topping:
Silikal R61 Quartz, consisting of Silikal R61 resin and Silikal Filler
6. Topcoat(s):
Silikal R81 Colorless Silikal Topcoat Resin.
7. Silikal CQ for broadcasting: Color/s to be chosen by owner.
8. Aluminium Oxide (if required)
2.02.01 Product Performance Criteria
A. Silikal RE40
1. Percentage Reactive Resin ............... ...........................100%
Percentage Solids ...........................................................................................100%
2. Water Pressure Resistance (3 days at 72 pail .......................................... Passed
3. Resistance to Diffusion Against H20 ...............................................0.3g/m2 • day
4. Tensile Bond Strength ...............................................................................475 psi
T,
S!llkal America ..
iR 609-B Fertrlla Street Carrollton, GA 30117 t79 ti7 6i CQ
v 888.830.1404 770.830.9213 eciiicatron
® www.silikalamerica.com Ca lnfo@Wiikalamerica.com E'ag 3 of 8. -
1
. 'This diagram sm ld be used only as a iwsual arcL
B. SiliW-FW1 Wilk Additive I
1. Percentage Reactive Resin .........................................................................100%
Percentage Solids ...........................................................................................100%
2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): ....................................... less than 0.06
3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) ................................................. .......3,550 psi.
4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): ...................... ..................2.1
5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): .... ........ 0.000035
6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257):
Volume Resistance, ohm-cm; ............................................................ ................1015
Surface Resistance, ohm ................................................................... ................10,2
7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122), g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10.8: 1.4
C. Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete
1. Percentage of reactive resin ...........................................................................100%
2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .......................................................0.02
3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) ........................................................4,000 psi.
4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): .................. ................ ..... 1.2
5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./inJdeg. F (ASTM D696) psi x10'6:.........18
6. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C39) ................................................ 9,200 psi.
(ASTM C109) ................................ ....... ........... .......................................... 11,000 psi.
D. Silikal R61 CO Topping
1. Percentage of reactive resin: ............................................................ .......... 100%
Percentage of solids: ............................................................................ ..........100%
2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .......................................... ............. 0.04
3. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C109): ..................................6,000-8,000 psi.
(ASTM D695): ............................................................................... ............ 6,000 psi.
4. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): ............................................... ... .... 3,625 psi.
5. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): ................................................... 720,000 psi.
6. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): ................................... ............. ... .3,500 psi.
7. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696):....... .....0.000019
8. Electrical Resistivity, (ASTM D257) Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: . . .. . ........ 1014
9. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543:
Effect of weak acids: ............................................................................ ............none
Effect of strong acids: ............................................................................ ........... slight
Effect of alkalis: ................... ................................................................. ............ none
Effect of salt solutions: ............................. ................. .......................... ............ none
Effect of oil, grease: ............................................................................... ............ none
Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): ............................................................ ............ none
E. Silikal R81 Colorless To coat Resin
1. Percentage Reactive Resin: ............................................................... .......... 100%
Percentage Solids: ................................................................................. ..........100%
2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): ........................ ................. ............... 0.5
3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): ................................................... ....3,555 psi.
4. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): ................................................... 210,000 psi,
5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) inAn./deg. F: ......... ..... 0.000035
Silikal America
9%67.26 = 61 CQ
®609-B Fertilla Street Carrollton, GA 30117 uideSpecircation
<888.830.1404 X770.830.9213
® www.silikatamerica.com @ info@siiikaiamerica.com FV. ge 4 of 8
t
6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257):
M? ?,? nom.
Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: ........................... --- ..... ....... ---- ................... 1015
Surface Resistance, ohm: ................................................................................... 1012
7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9____________________ 1.43
8. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543:
Effect of weak acids: ................................................................................... ......none
Effect of strong acids: .................... ................................................................. slight
Effect of alkalis: .......... ................................... - .... -- ..... ............... ................. none
Effect of salt solutions: ........................ ............................................................. none
Effect of oil, grease: .................... 6....................................................... - ......... ..none
Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): ................................................................ ...... none
2.02.02 Product Installation & Application Criteria
A. All Silikal Material Systems Excepting Moisture Vapor Treatment:
1. Pot Life at 68° F.: ............................................................................ 10-15 minutes
2. Cure Time at 68° F.: ............ .................................60 minutes
3. Recoat Time at 68° F.: ................................... ................................ 60-90 minutes
' 2.03 Mixes
A. Follow manufacturer's prescribed procedures and recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.01 Firework. Brlspection
A. Examine all surfaces to be coated with Silikal material systems and report to the Owner and/or Engineer any
conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these coating systems and that cannot be
' put Into acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified In Paragraph 3.03.
B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the
Engineer.
C. In the event that Applicator has employed all acceptable methods of surface preparation and cannot remedy
adverse conditions that would lead to failure of the installation, Applicator shall withdraw from the contract and
Owner will be financially responsible only for preparation efforts.
1-1
x.02 General
A. Material storage area must be selected and approved by Applicator and Owner or his representative.
B. Owner will furnish V v Phase electricity and water for use by Applicator.
C. If existing ventilation is inadequate, Applicator will provide sufficient ventilation to allow complete air exchange
every five (5) minutes.
D. Owner shall provide means for disposal of construction waste.
E. Applicator will protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or covers. Owner's equipment shall
be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials.
Silikal America py:r7 26 -tT1 CG!
to 609-8 Fertilla Street Carrollton, GA 30117
` 888.830.1404 770.930.9213 :;hide Sp6crficatiori
a www.silikalamerica.com infoftfikalamerica.com 1'a 5 qf,.s
1
3.0-3 prepaFatite n
A. Surface Preparation - General
1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry
surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blowdown.
2. New concrete: See 1.08 - C for requirements.
3. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other
appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation
prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper.
4. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as
determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing and no more than 85% R/H as measured by Protimeter
B. Bond Testing
1. The applicator shall evaluate all surface preparation by conducting bond tests at strategic locations.
2. Mix six (6) ounces of the primer to be used in the application with 5% by volume Silikal Powder
Hardener. Add #10412 mesh, dry quartz sand until an easily trowelable mixture is obtained. Apply palmsized
patties 1/8" to 1/4" thick.
3. After one (1) hour at (68° F.), patties must be cured tack-free and cooled to ambient temperature of
concrete. Remove patties with hammer and chisel and examine fracture/delamination plane. Concrete with
fractured aggregate must be attached to the entire underside of the patty.
4. If only laitance or a small amount of concrete is attached or if interface between patty and substrate is
tacky, further substrate preparation is required.
5. If further surface preparation is required, bond tests shall be conducted again when this has been completed.
6. It no amount or kind of surface preparation produces satisfactory bond tests, the applicator shall report that
to the Owner, Engineer, and Manufacturer.
C. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning
1. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned using a mobile steel shot, dust
recycling machine such as BLASTRAC®, or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations
of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface
characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit
sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate.
2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same
degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarpers, needle guns,
scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment.
3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall
be removed with brush or vacuum.
4. Conduct Bond Tests to check adequacy of surface preparation. See Paragraph 3.03 - B (Bond Testing).
5. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or other
contamination of the surface occurs.
3.04 Installation
A. Application of Silikal 61 CQ flooring system consists of:
1. applying moisture vapor treatment (if required)
2. applying the primer,
3. applying coving (d required),
4. performing patching and sloping with polymer concrete (if required),
5. re-priming polymer concrete areas
6. applying the topping, broadcasting the quartz
7. applying the topcoat(s),
Time for curing (45 - 60 minutes) shall be allowed between each coat.
Thicknesses are specified below and/or in Paragraph 3.07.
Silikal America 09 61GQ
to 609-B Fertilla Street Carrollton, GA 30117 fauid?i s`perlf crUon
%. 888.830.1404 770.830.9213
® www.silikalame&a.com @ infoOsilikalamerica.com p?9e;Fraf8
1
' ° 44.01 WjoFstl.?re Vapor "?'t°eatl?aef?t (if required)
A. Mix moisture vapor treatment products as recommended by manufacturer.
S. Pour out all resin onto the concrete surface and spread it with a squeegee. After a short operating time
(appr_ 10 minutes) the excess must be removed with the squeegee. The remaining resin can be rolled out with
a lint free resin proof roller.
Resin films as well as the building of puddles have do be avoided!
The waiting time between the coats depends on the absorbency of the substrate and is normally between
' one and three hours. Before applying the second coat if required, the impregnation of the first coat into the
substrate should be evident.
C. If required, repeat the above process.
During application of the treatement take care that there is no film building at the surface.
The surface texture has to be maintained after every step.
3. 4.02 Pritne 'oat
A. Mix primer components according to manufacturers instructions.
B. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9" or 18" wide, 1/2" - 3/4" thick-napped, solvent resistant
' paint roller to roll out the material at a rate of 100 sq. ft./ gal. to form a uniform, continuous film,
ensuring that all crevices, cracks, other surface discontinuities have been saturated and coated. Use a paint
brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10 -15
minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations.
C. Allow the primer coat to cure.
D. If any of the concrete has absorbed all of the primer or if the concrete still has a dry look, reprime these areas
before applying the next layer.
3.04.03 C oving (if required)
1. Surface Preparation
A. If concrete walls are to be painted prior to installation of cove base, the bottom portion of the walls shall remain
' uncoated to the height of the cove base to insure a proper bond to the concrete wall.
B. If walls are constructed of a non-compatible material or if a coating exists, a backer board of 1h" cement board
cut to the desired height of the cove base needs to be installed. The top of the backer board should be cut at a
45° angle to create a "beveled" edge.
C. If a backer board needs to be installed it shall be fastened using a high grade construction adhesive as well as
counter sunk screws or concrete masonry anchors.
2. System Description
A. Cove base shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall be:
1. Application area requires prime coat according to 3.04.02
2. Trowel-On Cove Base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a termination strip installed at the
top of the base.
B. Cove base will receive a broadcast and top coat consistent with flooring system.
3.04.04 Patching/Sloping (if Required)
A. Mix polymer concrete components as recommended by the Material Manufacturer.
B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to slope any areas as needed.
C. Once cured, material must be re-primed before next layers applied.
Silikal America
0967 2s=fsl::cQ
' ® 609-8 Fertilia Street Carrollton, GA 30117
A. 888.830.1404 Guido 5pecifiration
* 770.830.9213 e 7 df
® www.sihkgJamerica.com g mfoftlikalamerica.com 8
1'i l1
e
D
corative Quartz Flooring
3.04.05 Topping
A. Size the batches, and mix according to Manufacturer's instructions. The entire batch should be poured and
spread at once, i.e., do not let material set in pail.
S. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 1/8". Lightly trowel to a uniform thickness of 1/8" '
as necessary.
C. If necessary, roll with a porcupine roller to release trapped air.
D. Broadcast colored quartz into the fresh material before it begins to cure. Broadcast by hand, or use a backpack type
blower or sand blast pot to achieve an even broadcast. The quartz must 'rain' down and not be thrown into the wet base coat. ,
E. Allow the topping to cure.
F. Remove excess quartz by sweeping, "blow-down", and/or vacuuming.
3.04.06 Top Gaut
A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as
described in Paragraph 3.04.02. '
B. (If Required) Broadcast aluminium oxide, or other suitable material into wet topcoat resin; size and
rate as determined by owner.
C. Allow topcoat to cure. Floors without aluminium oxide broadcast may be lightly sanded if required.
Vacuum all dust, paying particular attention to edges and comers. ,
3.04.07 Second Top Goat
A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 100 - 125 sq. ftJgal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as ,
described in Paragraph 3.04.02.
S. Allow topcoat to cure.
3.05 Field Quafty Contra6r nspection
A. Applicator shall request acceptance of surface preparation from the Engineer before application of the
prime/seal coat.
B. Applicator shall request acceptance of the prime coat from the Engineer before application of subsequent
specified materials.
3.06 Cleaning
A. Applicator shall remove any material spatters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove
masking and covers taking care not to contaminate surrounding area.
9. Applicator shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort.
3.07 Coating Schedule
A. Moisture vapor treatment shall be Silikal RE40 application rate shall be approximately 220 sq. ft_ per gallon (approx. 7 mils)
B. Primer shall be Silikal R41 with Additive I Application rate shall be approx. 100 sq.ft. per gallon (approx. 16 mils). '
C. Patching/Sloping material shall be R17
D. Coving shall be Silikal HK 20 per manufacturers recommendations.
E. Body coat shall be Silikal R61 CO, applied with a gauge rake set at 1/8" for a rate of 40 sq. ft. per batch.
Colored quartz to be broadcast into the uncured topping (optional). Broadcast the quartz at the rate of 0.5 - 0.75
pounds per sq. ft.
F. Clear topcoat shall be Silikal R81; apply at the rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft. per gallon for the first coat and 90 -120
sq. ft. per gallon for the second application.
Please refer to'the rJata sheets for the Yi l-
t evant,Silikal`resins forthe guideline recipes,
material consumption„hardener quantities
Silikal America _
B7 2S .61 C(7
® 609-8 Fertilta Street Carrollton, GA 30117
t 888.830.1404 le 770.830.9213 GuideSpeciticatian ,
0 www.silikalametica.com @ info@silikalamerica.com , - P3ge8 of 8
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Painting contract and conditions shall be attached and becomes part of this specification
and shall be binding in every respect. This shall spell out payments; Workman's
Compensation, painting licenses, insurance, bond requirements, and any other
predetermined stipulations.
1.2 Only licensed contractors holding a valid license issued in their own name by the
appropriate county licensing board are qualified to bid on this project.
1.3 The contractor shall provide insurance certificates and maintain insurance coverages,
i.e. workmen's compensation, bodily injury, property damage and automotive damage,
for this project.
1.4 The contractor shall comply with all fire and safety regulations.
1.5 The contractor shall obtain all permits required (when applicable).
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
' 2.1 Work in general includes surface preparation, surface repair, caulking, sealants, patching
and application of the paint coating to the substrates and systems outlined
in this specification.
3.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.1 Painting contractor shall review all work to be accomplished with project representative
to preclude misunderstandings.
3.2 Painting contractor shall furnish all services, tools and equipment as needed.
3.3 Painting contractor shall furnish and install all materials and labor necessary to paint the
surfaces as specified herein.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP AND APPLICATION CONDITIONS
4.1 Paint only in dry weather when temperature is 50 degrees Fahrenheit or higher. Stop
exterior work early to permit paint film to set up before condensation caused by night
temperature drops occur. Do not begin painting until surfaces are moisture free.
11-0506A 1
4.2 Do not varnish or enamel in direct sunlight.
4.3 Keep paint at room temperature.
4.4 Sweep dust, dirt and debris away before painting.
4.5 Execute work in accordance with label directions. Coating applications shall be made in
strict conformance to this specification and to the manufacturer's paint instructions on the
labels and product data sheets.
4.6 Paint only dry wood (less than 15% moisture). Cementicious substrates' moisture content
must not exceed 25% prior to coating application.
4.7 All work shall be accomplished by skilled workmen familiar with and trained to do this
type work; moreover, they shall be qualified to operate or use the equipment and rigging
needed to accomplish this work.
4.7.1 All equipment shall be in sound working condition and must meet all OSHA
Safety Standards. All workmen shall be aware of and trained in the operation of
all safety equipment required for this project.
4.8 Materials shall be applied evenly and free of runs, sags, pinholes or lap marks.
4.9 Only the manufacturer's thinners may be used to thin the respective products and in the
amounts prescribed.
4.10 All application tools and equipment shall be in good working order and suitable for
proper application.
4.11 All shrubbery, outside carpeting and sprinkler systems shall be fully protected against
damage during each stage of the painting project.
4.12 All exterior substrates designated not to receive paint coatings shall be kept free of paint
residue. e.g. windows, outdoor carpeting, foliage etc.._
4.13 Owner will provide water and electricity from existing facilities. Contractor shall make
and pay for modifications of either system to accommodate contract needs and shall
restore both systems to original condition-
5.0 MATERIALS
5.1 All materials used in this paint contract shall be as manufactured or distributed by Porter
Paints and delivered on the job in original, sealed containers.
5.2 The paints herein specified are known to be suitable and will be enforced as the required
standards of quality of this work.
11-0506A
1
L
6.0 COLORS
6.1 Colors will be selected from Porter Paints "Color Spectrum" Color System, unless
otherwise specified.
6.2 Color schedules shall be furnished to the painting contractor at the earliest possible time
and/or prior to the application of prime coats.
6.11 Pigmented prime coats may be tinted to approximate shade of the final coat; some
contrast is required.
7.0 STORAGE AND USE OF PREMISES
7.1 The painting contractor shall confine his apparatus, materials storage and operations of
his workmen to limits indicated by project representative. All materials used on the job
shall be stored in a single place designated by the Project Representative. Such storage
shall be kept clean and painting contractor shall be liable for damage to surrounding
areas.
7.2 Inflammable material and/or fire hazard waste shall be stored, handled and used in an
approved manner and shall be removed from the site daily.
8.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
Each surface shall be cleaned and prepared as specified. Should any surface be found
unsuitable to produce a proper paint or sealant finish, the project representative shall be
notified in writing and no material shall be applied until the unsuitable surfaces have been
made satisfactory.
CONCEALED CONDMONS
Occasionally, the contractors cleaning technique develops or reveals an unforeseen
condition which require additional labor and materials. The contractor must either
renegotiate his contract or assume the responsibility for properly correcting the condition.
CLEANING AND MILDEW CONTROL
1
1
8.1 All exterior surfaces to be painted shall be pressure cleaned to remove dirt, mildew,
chalked paint and any foreign materials deterrent to the new finish.
8.2 All surfaces to be painted shall be waterblasted at 2500 PSI or more depending upon
substrate's condition (see note) with the following solution to remove mildew, mildew
spores, and other surface contaminants.
11-0506A
Note: If a Dry-Vit type system is present a lower pressure shall be used as to not
damage the exterior wall face.
CLEANING SOLUTION
Mix 1 part bleach to 3 parts water mix thoroughly. Let solution remain on surface
15 - 20 minutes and then thoroughly rinse with potable water. If dirt remains, wash with
a non sudsing detergent (i.e. Soilax). Rinse thoroughly with potable water and allow
surface to dry before painting.
8.3 Any loose and scaling paint not removed by pressure washing shall be removed by wire
brushing or other suitable power too] cleaning.
MASONRY SUBSTRATES
8.4 Prior to any masonry patching all cracks shall be sounded out, cut out and sealed with the
specified bonding sealer.
8.5 Minor cracks (hairline) in stucco, Dry-Vit type system, exposed block, or poured
concrete shall be patched with Perma-Crete Elastomeric Patching Compound 4-1000.
Finished patches shall be closely matched to existing stucco surface.
Note: A hairline crack is defined as any visible crack no wider than 1/8 inch.
8.6 Masonry cracks repaired using Perma-Crete Elastomeric Patching Compound 4-1000
shall result in a minimum 1/8" build-up over the cracked areas. These areas shall then be
feathered and textured to match adjacent surfaces.
8.7 Masonry cracks of more than 1/8 inch in width shall be cut out, cleaned, Neoprene rope
installed, and filled with Eucolastic 1 One Part Urethane Sealant.
WOOD SUBSTRATES
8.8 Painted wood surfaces shall be carefully inspected for evidence of deterioration or
surface imperfections. Sandpaper any hard, glossy surface to ensure proper adhesion.
Fill nail holes, imperfections and cracks with putty. Edges, corners and raised grain shall
be eased by sanding.
WOOD SUBSTRATES WITH FERROUS FASTENERS
8.8.1 All rusty nail heads shall be treated with a phosphoric acid based solution
(i.e. OSPHO or Porter 479 Metalprep), counter-sunk and puttied with an oil-based
putty (Dap Painter's Putty) or spot primed to prevent further bleed.
11-0506A
1
t
FERROUS METAL SUBSTRATES
8.9 Metals showing signs of rust degradation shall be power tool cleaned per SSPC-
SP 3, treated with Porter #79 Metalprep (OSPHO may be substituted) and primed with
either PPG #6-208 Rust Inhibitive Primer (red) or #6-212 Rust Inhibitive Primer (white)
unless otherwise specified.
Note: These procedures have proven to be effective but no warranties are implied
against the reoccurrence of rust.
ALL SURFACE PREPARATIONS OUTLINED IN THE ABOVE SECTIONS ARE
"MINIMUM REQUIRED PROCEDURES," BUT MAY BE EXPANDED ON TO
ACHIEVE EXTENDED PROTECTIVE FILM LIFE.
9.0 MASONRY REPAIR, PATCHING PROCEDURE
9.1 All masonry cracks of hairline nature, 1/8" or less, shall be patched with Perma-Crete
Elastomeric Patching Compound 4-1000 to match adjacent surfaces in texture and
uniformity.
Note: A hairline crack is defined as any visible crack no wider than 1/8" or less.
9.2 All masonry cracks of more than 1/8 inch in width shall be cut out, cleaned, primed,
neoprene rope installed and then filled with Eucolastic I One Part Polyurethane Sealant
to meet federal specifications TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A, USDA and FDA
' Approved.
9.3 After the sealant has completely cured, apply Perma-Crete Elastomeric Patching
Compound 4-1000 with a minimum 1/8 inch build-up of material over the cracked areas
' to match adjacent surfaces in texture and uniformity.
9.4 Remove all tape, patching compound, caulking or sealant in any previously patched areas
' that have lost adhesion to the substrate. Repatch and repaint as specified. (Any silicone
caulking or sealant must be removed.)
9.5 Concrete primer and concrete patching material shall be approved by the Project
Representative before application.
I EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS):
10.0 EXTERIOR CONCRETE, STUCCO AND MASONRY: (Other than
concrete masonry units)
I EPS-1: 2-COAT ACRYLIC FINISH
(SEMI-GLOSS)
1 11-0506A
'THEO. *TBEO. °THEO_
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS T'HICKNESS
5
10.1 COAT 1: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO SEMI- 4.0 1,2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series.
10.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter ACRI PRO SEMI- 4.0 1.2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM TMCKNESS 2.4
MHS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
11.0 EXTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
EPS-4: 2-COAT ACRYLIC EMULSION *THEO. *THEO. *THSO.
(SEMI-GLOSS) OVER FILLER COAT SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
11.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex 4.0 to 8.0 0.7 to 13
Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
11.2 COAT 1: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO SEMI- 4.0 1,2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series.
11.3 COAT 2: PPG Porter ACRI PRO SEMI- 4.0 1.2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 2.2-2.8
(excluding Block Filler) MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES .
12.0 EXTERIOR CURB & PAVEMENT PAINT:
EPS-5: 2-COAT CHLORINATED RUBBER *THEO. *THEO. *THEO.
ALKYD, FS TT-0-115, TYPE III SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
12.1 COAT 1: PPG ZONELINETM Traffic & 15.0 8.6
Zone Marking Paint 11-53 Series.
12.2 COAT 2: PPG ZONELINETM Traffic & 15.0 8.6
Zone Marking Paint 11-53 Series.
11-0506A 6
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 17.2
MILS
Note: Chlorinated rubber has been discontimded
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
13.0 EXTERIOR GENERAL PAINTED WOOD
EPS-7: 2-COAT ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) "THEO. *17ffio. 'THEO.
FINISH OVER PRIMER SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
13 1 COAT 1: PPG SEAL GRIP 4.0 1.5 to 2.0
Interior/Exterior Universal Alkyd Primer
17-941 Series.
13.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDHIDE® 4.0 to 4.6 1.4 to 1.6
Interior/Exterior WS Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
13.3 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDHIDE® 4.0 to 4.6 1.4 to 1.6
interior/Exterior WS Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.3-5.2
MRS
ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
14.0 EXTERIOR GENERAL PAINT WOOD:
EPS-8: 2-COAT (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *THFO. *11?Eo. *THEO.
OVER PRIMER SPREAD WET FILM DRY FU M
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
14.1 COAT 1: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO Acrylic 4.0 1.2
Primer 335.
14.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO SEMI- 4.0 1.2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series.
14.3 COAT 3: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO SEMI- 4.0 1.2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029
Series-
11-0506A 7
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 3.6
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
15.0 EXTERIOR PAINTED WOOD TRIM:
EPS-9: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) FOR DEEP *THEo. *TIEo_ *THEO.
COLORS SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE 'T'HICKNESS THICKNESS
15.1 COAT 1: PPG SEAL GRIP 4.0 1.5 to 2.0
Interior/Exterior Universal Alkyd Primer
17-941 Series.
15.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDHIDE® 4.0 to 4.6 1.4 to 1.6
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
15.3 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDHIDE® 4.0 to 4.6 1.4 to 1.6
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 3.8-4.8
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE 'T'EXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
16.0 EXTERIOR PAINTED PLYWOOD:
EPS-11: 2-COAT (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *THEO. *TIEO. *THEO.
OVER PRIMER SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
16.1 COAT 1: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO Acrylic 4.0 1.2
Primer 335.
16.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter ACRI PRO Acrylic 4.0 1.2
Primer 335.
16.3 COAT 3: PPG Porter ACRI PRO SEMI- 4.0 1.2
GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029 Series.
16.4 COAT 4: PPG Porter ACRI-PRO SEMI-GI 4.0 1.2
Exterior Acrylic Paint 6029 Series
11-0506A 8
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.8
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES-
17.0 EXTERIOR FERROUS METAL:
EPS-16: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) ENAMEL: *THEO. *THEO_ *TSEO.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE TI-RCE NESS THICKNESS
17.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust 3.0 to 3.5 1.5 to 1.8
Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series.
17.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDH DEO 4.0 to 4.6 1 A to 1.6
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
173 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDHDEO 4.0 to 4.6 1.4 to 1.6
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 3.0-6.8
MILS
18.0 EXTERIOR SILICONE ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH:
EPS-19 SILICONE ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) *THEo. *THEO. *TBEO.
FINISH SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
18.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Zinc 3.0 to 3.5 1.5 to 1.8
Chromate Primer 6-204.
18.2 COAT 2: PPG Sil-Shield Silicone Alkyd 2.4 to 2.9 1.5 to 2.5
Enamel High Gloss 95-5000 Series.
183 COAT 3: PPG Sil-Shield Silicone Alkyd 2.4 to 2.9 1.5 to 2.5
Enamel High Gloss 95-5000 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM TMCKNESS 3.0-6.8
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
19.0 EXTERIOR ZINC COATED METAL:
EPS-20: ALKYD ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) *THEO. *T jm *THEO_
I 1-0506A 9
FINISH SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RA"['E THICKNESS THICKNESS
9.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedf ide Int/Ext 2.7 3.6
Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209.
19.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDHIDE® 4.0 to 4.6 1.5 to 2.5
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series.
19.3 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDFMEO 4.0 to 4.6 1.5 to 2.5
Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss
6-1510 Series_
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 6.6-8.6
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS):
20.0 INTERIOR CONCRETE AND MASONRY:
IPS-2: ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *THEO. *THEO_ *THEO.
SPREAD WET k"II.,M DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
20.1 COAT 1: PPG PERMA-CRETEO 3.2 to 4.0 1.2 to 1.5
Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer
4-603.
20.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
203 COAT 3: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.2 to 4.5
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
21.0 INTERIOR CONCRETE AND MASONRY: (Other than concrete units
11-0506A 10
IPS-4 (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *THEO. *THEO. *THEO.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
21.1 COAT 1: PPG PERMA-CRETEC 3.2 to 4.0 1.2 to 1.5
Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer
4-603.
21.2 COAT 2: PPG Pitt-Glaze WB Water 5.4 to 8.2 2.0 to 3.0
Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series.
213 COAT 3: PPG Pitt-Glaze WB Water 5.4 to 8.2 2.0 to 3.0
Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FII M TMCKNESS 5.2 to 7.5
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
22.0 INTERIOR CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
IPS-6: ALKYD ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) *THEO. *THEO_ *THEO.
FINISH SPREAD WET FIIM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
22.1 COAT l : PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex 4.0 to 8.0 0.7 to 1.3
Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
22.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDHIDE® Interior 4.0
Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil 6-1110X1
Series.
223 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDH DE® Interior 4.0
Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil 6-1110X1
Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS
(excluding Block Filler)
Note: Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
2.1
2.1
4.2
MRS
11-0506A 11
23.0 INTERIOR CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
i'PS-7: ("TE E-LIKE") FINISH *TITEO_ *THEO. *THEO.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
211 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex 4.0 to 8.0 0.7 to 1.3
Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
23.2 COAT 2: PPG Pitt-Glaze WB Water 5.4 to 8.2 2.0 to 3.0
Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series.
23.3 COAT 3: PPG Pitt-Glaze WB Water 5.4 to 8.2 2.0 to 3.0
Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.0 to 6.0
(excluding Block Filler) MRS
IPS-7: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH FOR KITCHEN *THEo. *THEO_ *THEO_
AND BATHROOMS SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE TICKNESS THICKNESS
23.4 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex 4.0 to 8.0 0.7 to 1.3
Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
23.5 COAT 2: PPG Aquapon WB Water Base 5.3 to 7.9 2.0 to 3.0
Epoxy 98-1 Series.
23.6 COAT 3: PPG Aquapon WB Water Base 5.3 to 7.9 2.0 to 3.0
Epoxy 98-1 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.0 to 6.0
(excluding Block Filler) MILS
Note: Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSrFY LOSSES.
24.0 INTERIOR GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEMS:
IPS-11: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) ODORLESS *THEo. =THEO. *TBEO-
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
24.1 COAT 1: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.1
2000 Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 867.
11-0506A 12
24.2 COAT 2: PPG SPEEDHIDEO Interior 4.0 2.1
Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil 6-1110X1
Series.
24.3 COAT 3: PPG SPEEDEME® Interior 4.0 2.1
Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil 6-111 OM
Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FR,M THICKNESS 5.3
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
25.0 INTERIOR FERROUS METAL:
IPS-20: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *TI-IE°. *THFO- *TFMo.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RK F. THICKNESS THICKNESS
25.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust 4.0 2.3
Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series.
25.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
253 COAT 3: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 5.3
MILS
First coat not required on items delivered shop
primed
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
26.0 INTERIOR ZINC COATED METAL:
IPS-23: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *THEO. *THEO. *TIEo.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FIIMM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
26.1 COAT 1: PPG Speedhide Int/Ext 17 3.6
Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209.
11-0506A 13
26.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
26.3 COAT 3: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 6.6
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
27.0 INTERIOR PAINTED WOODWORK AND HARDBOARD:
IPS-25: 3-COAT (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH *Txr•,o. *THEO. *TBEO_
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
27.1 COAT 1: PPG SEAL GRIP@ Interior 4.0 1.2
Primer/Finish 17-951-
27.2 COAT 2: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
27.3 COAT 3: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 4.0 1.5
SEMI-GLOSS Interior Latex Wall &
Trim Paint 6139 Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 4.2
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
28.0 INTERIOR PAINTED WOODWORK AND HARDBOARD:
IPS-26: 3-COAT (FULL GLOSS) FINISH *TfIEO. *THEO. *THEO.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY F]I.M
RATE THICKNESS THICKNESS
28.1 COAT 1: PPG SEAL GRIP® Interior 4.0 1.2
Primer/Finish 17-951.
28.2 COAT 2: PPG PITT-TECH Int/Ext High 5.5 to 8.3 15
11-0506A 14
Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-374
Series.
283 COAT 2: PPG PITT-TECH Int/Ext High
Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-374
Series.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS
5.5 to 8.3 1.5
1.5
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
29.0 INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR:
IPS--31: CLEAR FINISH °T1TEo. *T11E0. •TTEo.
SPREAD WET FILM DRY FILM
RATE THICKNESS TIECKNESS
29.1 COATI: PPG PERMA-CRETE® Plex- 0.92
SealTm WB Interior/Exterior Clear Sealer
4-6200.
29.2 COAT 1: PPG PERMA-CRETE® Plex- 0,92
Seal"' WB Interior/Exterior Clear Sealer
4-6200.
TOTAL SYSTEM DRY FILM THICKNESS 1.84
MILS
*ALLOW FOR APPLICATION, SURFACE TEXTURE AND POROSITY LOSSES.
11-0506A 15
1
1
SECTION 09963
WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for
the application of PROI~ESSIONALO Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant for projects
involving either old or new construction. Any substantial deviations shall be referred to
the manufacturer or authorized representative.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04-2200 [04220] - Concrete Masonry Units: Concrete Block walls to receive
water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant.
B. Section 09-2400 [09220] -- Portland Cement Plaster: Cement plaster wall finish to
receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant.
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330- Submittals-
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for the specified water
repellents, graffiti resistant coatings and cleaners. Submit description for protection of
surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final
cleaning.
C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator; stating applicator has a
minimum of 3 years experience using the specified or a similar products. Provide a list of
several most recently completed projects, including project name and location, names of
owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, and method of
application.
D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable environmental regulations.
E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellent and graffiti resistant
coatings furnished comply with regulations controlling content of volatile organic
compounds (VOC).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
N
A_ Applicator Qualifications:
SECTION 09963
1. 1. Experience in the application of the specified or similar products.
2. 2. Employs persons trained in the application of the specified products or similar
products.
B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks before the start
of application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Require attendance of
parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect,
Applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas' representative. Review environmental
regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry
surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, warranty
application procedures, and coordination with other work.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations.
1,06 TEST PANELS
A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine
the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each water repellent and
graffiti resistant coating to test panels to determine appropriate strengths, coverage rates,
compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired
results.
B. Apply graffiti resistant coatings to test panels in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions. Allow a minimum of 5 days curing time prior to applying graffiti
paint to test panels. Apply graffiti paint to test panels and allow at least 24 hours or
longer for paint to cure. Apply cleaner to evaluate ease of graffiti removal. Repeat cycles
of cleanings as directed by Architect. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels
are inspected and approved by the Architect.
C. Submit Sections 1 & 2 of Manufacturer's warranty application using information
resulting from test panel application. These sections must be submitted to Manufacturer
for approval prior to project commencement. Section 3 to be completed and submitted at
project completion.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened
containers, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the
product matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel.
B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry place. Keep away from
sparks and open flame. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
1
i
1
1
SECTION 09963 2 1
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Surface Preparation: Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a
clean, dry substrate free from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence, form release agents or any
i
other coating, which may inhibit penetration and adhesion of water repellent and graffit
resistant coating. This requirement applies to new construction, renovation or remedial
projects. Substrate must be completely dry prior to applying product.
B. Environmental Requirements:
1. Temperature: Product may be applied at any temperature providing that there is no
' frozen moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40
degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperature range
for application is between 40° F (5° C) or below 95° F (35° Q.
' 2. Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture- Allow
substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or 72 hours after power washing.
3. Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected
within 12 hours.
' 4. Do not commence application under windy conditions.
C. Protection:
' 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building.
Heating and air conditioning, ventilation systems, and fresh air intakes should be
' turned off and covered.
and other building hardware from overspray.
vehicles
metal
glass
Protect shrubs
2
,
,
,
,
.
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 2.01 MANUFACTURER
' Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., 4456 S. Clifton, Wichita, KS 67216, (800) 676-
7346, (316) 522-9300, Fax (316) 522-9346
' 2.02 WATER REPELLENT AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
A. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffltiant, Super Strength: First coat in the two-
coat process. Depending on the porosity of the substrate, it may be used for the second
coat as well. Penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating for use on vertical
concrete, brick, sandstone, limestone, stucco, split face block, concrete block, and fluted
block. Non-sacrificial, will withstand repeated cycles of graffiti tagging and removal with
no requirement to reapply the sealant. May enhance or darken some substrates. Will not
form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic, it is not affected by W rays, salts, acid rain, etc.
Breathable, it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration-
' Flexible, it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides a graffiti
barrier as well as waterproofing protection.
1. Form: Liquid
' 2. Color: Clear
SECTION 09963 3
1
3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber
4. Percent Active Material. 15%
5. Flash Point: 105°
B. ProfessionalO Water Sealant & Anti-Grafitiant, Extra Strength: May be used as the
second coat in the two-coat process. Porosity of substrate is the determining factor.
THE SECOND COAT IS TO BE APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE TO
ACHIEVE WATER REPELLENT PROTECTION IN ADDITION TO GRAFFITI
PROTECTION.
L Form: Liquid
1 Color: Clear
3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber
4. Percent Active Material: 8%
5. Flash Point: 105°
C. The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard of quality.
Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with results achieved
in test panels and manufacturer's application instructions.
1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and
performance standards. Products must be penetrating, permanent treatments using a
silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes.
Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of
elongation. Products must be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging
and cleaning without the requirement to reapply the sealant.
2.04 CLEANERS
A. CLEANER: Phase II Cleaner (for graffiti removal), manufactured by Professional
Products of Kansas, Inc. No other product will be accepted as they may void the
warranty.
B. Extra Material: provide one gallon Phase 11 Cleaner, manufacturer's instructions,
MSDS and product data to Owner.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the following:
1. 1. The required joint sealants have been installed.
2. 2. New masonry and mortar have cured a minimum of 28 days.
3. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry, and contains no frozen moisture.
4. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application.
SECTION 09963 4
11
1
f
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians,
vehicles, and non-masonry surfaces during the work from contact with water repellent
and graffiti resistant coatings.
B. Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building.
Heating and air conditioning ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned
off and covered.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, efflorescence, form release agents or any
other coating or material from surfaces that may interfere with penetration, performance,
adhesion, or aesthetics of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Thoroughly
remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of water
repellent and graffiti resistant coatings.
B. Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as
approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application
of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings.
C. Seal all open joints.
D. Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repointed surfaces to cure for a
minimum of 28 days before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, environmental regulations, and application
procedures determined from the test panel results approved by the Architect. Graffiti
protection requires a two-coat application. In most cases, the first coat will be Super
Strength. The second coat will be either Super or Extra, depending on the porosity of the
substrate.
B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by Architect.
C. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute.
D. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces.
E. Do not apply to painted surfaces.
F. Do not apply anti-graffitiant to horizontal surfaces.
G. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates.
SECTION 09963
5
H. Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene, which may be affected by
the solvent carrier-
I. Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-60
psi), with solvent resistant fittings. Foam roller, or brash of natural bristle or foam may be
used in areas where spray application is not appropriate-
1. Vertical Applications: Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to
obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown of product from the point where the spray makes contact
with the surface. Work all the way down the building covering the rundown as you
go. Avoid excessive overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying
second coat. Apply the second coat in the same manner.
a. Extremely dense substrates may require back rolling after product is applied to
smooth out any rundown lines.
b. Brush any excess product that may accumulate on ledges and other areas that
may hold excess material.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent and graffiti resistant coating work with the
contractor, Architect, applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas representative, and
compare with test panel results approved by the Architect. Determine if the substrates are
suitably protected. Allow the test panel to cure for 5 days prior to applying graffiti paint
for testing purposes.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized
field representative to verify specified products are used; protection, surface preparation,
and application of graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions; the test panel has been approved by the Architect.
C. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering material performance for a period
of five (5) years for graffiti protection and Ten (10) years for Vertical water repellent
applications from the date of project completion.
3.06 FINAL CLEANING
A. Upon completion of all work covered in the specification, the Contractor shall remove
all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable
condition. Dispose of coating containers according to state and local environmental
regulations.
B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all materials,
landscaping, and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and
graffiti resistant coatings.
SECTION 09963 6
B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all materials,
landscaping, and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and
graffiti resistant coatings.
Professional Products of Kansas, Inc.
4456 S. Clifton
Wichita, KS 67216
(800) 676-7346
(316) 522-9300
Fax (316) 522-9346
www.watersealant.com
1
1-1
1
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09963
7
1
SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid phenolic.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1."Toilet Room Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, feminine napkin
disposal units, and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified.
Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation.
Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen
assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment mounted
toilet accessories.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of
sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for each type of compartment or screen indicated.
3. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish
required, prepared on 4_inch (10C_mm) square Samples of same thickness
and material indicated for Work.
1.4 PROTECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
10155-1
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports,
adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (no substitution nor or equals).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and
smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on
finished units are unacceptable.
B. Solid Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing on both
sides, fused to substrate without visible glue line or seam. Provide units with
eased edges and with minimum 3/4 inch (19 :mm) thick doors and pilasters and
minimum '/z inch (13 mm) thick panels and screens. Provide melamine color as
follows:
1. Color: One color in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors. No more than three colors shall be
selected for any one building's toilet partitions.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel,
not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to
match hardware.
1. For solid plastic, polymer resin pilasters, in lieu of stainless steel pilaster
shoes and sleeves, manufacturer's standard plastic pilaster shoes and
sleeves may be provided.
D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U brackets for attaching panels
and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear
anodized aluminum.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Material: Chrome plated brass.
10155-2
1
' E. Full Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching
panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
' 1. Material: Clear anodized aluminum.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating
hardware and accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded aluminum head
rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
'
H. s standard continuous, extruded aluminum strip in
Heat Sink Strip: Manufacturer
manufacturer's standard finish.
'
I. s standard exposed fasteners of stainless
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer
steel or chrome plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft
resistant type heads. Provide sex type bolts for through bolt applications. For
concealed anchors, use hot dip galvanized or other rust resistant, protective coated
steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for
compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive
compartment mounted hardware, accessories, and grab.bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Overhead Braced and Floor Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's
standard corrosion resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors
at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing
continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Wall Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and
finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 inch (610 mm) wide in swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and nominal 32 inch (813 mm) wide out
swinging doors with a minimum 32 inch (813 mm) wide clear opening for
compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self closing type that can be adjusted to
hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface mounted latch unit
with combination rubber faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency
10155-3
access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber tipped
bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment mounted
accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber tipped bumpers at out
swinging doors or entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out swinging doors.
Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be
handicapped accessible.
2.5 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating
finishes.
1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured,
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long
dimension of each piece.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard No. 3 or No. 4 directional polish.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install
units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/4
inch (6mm) between doors and pilasters, 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and
panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Clearance at
vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom. Secure units in position
with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets
attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for
wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters
with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead Braced and Floor Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor
and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with
not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with
overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
10155-4
3.2
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to
resist lateral impact.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in swinging doors to hold
open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges
on out swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully
closed position.
B. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments
and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
10155-5
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work
specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of each type of toilet accessory is shown on the drawings and schedules-
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. DELIVER ACCESSORIES to the job in protective cartons; store in a safe place
protected against damage.
1.04 COORDINATION:
A. COORDINATE with Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry for the accurate location of all
wood blocking required for the anchoring of toilet room accessories.
PART-PRODUCTS
101 MATERIALS:
A. TOILET ACCESSORIES: Provide toilet room accessories as specified on the Drawings
by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or an approved equal by Bradley Corp.,
Accessory Specialties, Inc., or approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which accessories are
to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
10800-1
3.02 INSTALLATION-
A. :PROVIDE anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach accessories
securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed.
& INSTALL concealed mounting devices and fasteners where possible, fabricated of the
same material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. INSTALL exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories.
Use theft-resistant fasteners.
D_ SECURE ACCESSORIES to adjacent walls and partitions complying with the
manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.
END OF SECTION
10800-2
SECTION 10811
ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Warm air, self-contained electric hand dryers.
B. Warm air, self-contained electric hair dryers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
t
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in stud partitions for mounting
hand dryers.
B. Section 16 00 - Wiring Methods: Electrical supply, conduit, wiring, boxes,
and wiring devices for hand dryers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A ICC/ANSI A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable
Buildings and Facilities; 1998.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,
including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Operating instructions and performance.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings showing dimensions, method of attachment, and required
supports.
D. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit
will be met:
E. Electrical wiring diagrams for connection of hand dryers.
F. Warranty for review by Architect.
G. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10811- 1
A_ Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing electric
hand dryers with 10 years minimum experience.
B. Equipment certified by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc-, with UL labels-
C. Comply with ICC/ANSI; Al 17.1.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for period specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Excel Dryer Inc., which is located at: 357 Chestnut
St. P. O. Box 365 ; East Longmeadow, MA 01028; Tel: 413-525-4531; Fax.-
413-525-2853; Email: request info; Web: www.exceldrver.com
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions
of Section 01600.
2.2 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
A. Hand Dryer: Warm air, rapid drying electric hand dryer; Xlerator; surface
mounted; entire dryer internally grounded.
1 _ Warranty Period: 5 years; limited warranty.
2. Controls- Automatic, activated by infrared optical sensor. Operates
while hands are under blower. Shut-off within 2 seconds when hands
removed, or in 35 seconds if hands not removed.
3. Cover: Chrome steel with polished finish.
4. Image: Custom digital image as selected by Architect.
5. Air Intake: Inlet openings on bottom of cover.
6. Air Outlet: Delivers focused air stream at average hand position of 4
inches (102 mm) below air outlet.
7. Noise Reduction Nozzle: 1.1 noise reduction nozzle.
8. Wall Plate: Injection molded, rib reinforced plate with metal L
brackets to attach cover, with ten 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter holes for
surface mounting to wall and three 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter holes for
electrical wiring; bottom hole suitable for surface conduit.
9. Nominal Size: 11-3/4 inches (298 mm) wide by 12-11/16 inches (322
mm) high by 6-11/16 inches (170 mm) deep. Weight: 16 pounds (7.3
kg).
10. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 12.5 amp, 60 Hz
11. Power Source: 208 volt, 7.0 amp, 60 Hz
12. Power Source: 220/240 volt, 6.5 amp, 60 Hz
13. Power Source: 277 volt, 5.5 amp, 60 Hz
14. Power Source: 220/240 volt, 6.5 amp, 50 Hz
15. Combination Motor and Blower: Series commutated, through-flow
discharge, vacuum type; 5/8 HP, 20,000 RPM. Air flow rate: 16,000
10811-2
r
linear feet per minute (81 meters per second) at air outlet, 14,000 linear
feet per minute (71 meters per second) at average hand position of 4
inches (102 mm) below air outlet.
r 16. Heater: Nichrome wire element, mounted inside blower housing to be
vandal proof.
17. Heater Safeguard: Automatic resetting thermostat to open when air
flow is restricted and close when air flow is resumed.
18. Air Temperature: 135 degrees F (55 degrees C) measured at average
hand position of 4 inches (102 mm) below air outlet. Air Heater
Output: 900 watts.
19. All metal parts coated according to Underwriters Laboratories, 1 nc.
requirements.
20. Mount dryers at heights indicated on Drawings.
21. Mount at the following heights above floor surface:
a. Men's Toilets: 45 inches (1143 mm).
b. Women's Toilets: 43 inches (1092 mm).
C. Teenagers' Toilets: 41 inches (1041 nun).
d. Young Children's Toilets: 35 inches (889 mm).
e. Toilets for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 37 inches (940
mm).
B. Hand or Hair Dryer: Warm air electric hand dryer; push-button; Hands On
series; entire dryer internally grounded.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years; unlimited warranty.
1 Controls, Hand Dryers: Push button; electronic timer with adjustable
time cycle; set to 30 seconds.
3. Controls, Hair Dryers: Push button; electronic timer with adjustable
time cycle; set to 3 minutes.
4. Cover: One piece, heavy duty, rust-resistant, rib-reinforced, die-cast
' zinc alloy. Recessed instruction plate.
5. Finish: Electrostatically applied, chip resistant, white paint.
6. Finish: Bright chrome plated.
T Finish: Custom color as selected by Architect.
8. Nozzle: Fixed, die-cast, chrome plated, zinc alloy nozzle.
9. Nozzle: 360 degree revolving, die-cast, chrome plated, zinc alloy
nozzle.
' 10. Push Button: Die-cast, chrome plated, zinc alloy push button.
11. Air Intake: Perforated metal screen fixed to cover; designed to keep
foreign objects out of dryer.
12. Mounting: Surface, mounted on cast zinc alloy wall plate, with four
5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter holes for surface mounting to wall and three
7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter holes for electrical wiring; bottom hole
suitable for surface conduit.
a. Nominal Size: 10-3/4 inches (273 mm) wide by 8 inches (203
mm) high by 10-1/8 inches (257 mm) deep including nozzle.
b. Weight: 18 pounds (8.1 kg).
13. Mounting: Semi-recessed, mounted on cast zinc alloy plate in wall box
with concealed mounting bolts; two 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter holes
for electrical wiring.
a. Nominal Size: 12-1/2 inches (318 mm) wide by 9-3/4 inches
1
10811-3
1
(248 mm) high by 7-1/8 inches (181 mm) deep including nozzle.
b. Weight: 20 pounds (9.0 kg)_
14. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 15 amp, 60 Hz.
15. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 20 amp, 60 Hz_
16. Power Source: 208/230 volt, 10 amp, 60 Hz.
17. Power Source: 277 volt, 8 amp, 60 Hz.
18. Power Source: 220 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
19. Power Source: 240 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
20. Motor: 60 Hz. Capacitor-initiated; brushless, for longer life and quiet
operation; 1/10 HP, 3,450 RPM; self-lubricating bearings; self-resetting
thermal protection.
21. Motor: 50 Hz. Universal brush, 1/10 HP, 4200 RPM; sealed ball
bearings; insulated by resilient mounting and thermally protected.
22. Blower Fan: Single inlet centrifugal, 150 cubic feet per minute (0.071
cubic meters per second); mounted on motor shaft; insulated with
resilient rubber mounting to obtain maximum sound and vibration
dampening.
23. Heater: Nichrome wire element, side mounted on blower housing to be
vandal proof.
24. Heater Safeguard: Automatic resetting thermostat to open when air
flow is restricted and close when air flow is resumed.
25. Air Temperature: 145 degrees F (63 degrees Q.
26. All metal parts coated according to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
requirements.
27. Mount dryers at heights indicated on Drawings.
28. Mount hand dryers at the following heights above floor surface:
a. Men's Toilets: 40 inches (1016 mm).
b. Women's Toilets: 38 inches (965 mm).
C. Teenagers' Toilets: 36 inches (914 mm).
d. Young Children's Toilets: 30 inches (762 mm).
e_ Toilets for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 32 inches (813
mm).
29. Mount hair dryers at the following heights above floor surface:
a. Men's Showers: 64 inches (1626 mm).
b. Women's Showers: 58 inches (1473 mm).
C. Teenagers' Showers: 56 inches (1422 mm).
d. Young Children's Showers: 43 inches (1092 mm).
e. Showers for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 45 inches (1143
mm).
C. Hand Dryer: Warm air electric hand dryer; automatic; Hands Off series;
surface mounted or semi-recessed; entire dryer internally grounded.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years; limited warranty.
2. Electronic Controls: Activated by infrared optical sensor. Operates
while hands are moving under blower. Shut-off in 90 seconds if hands
not removed.
3. Cover: One piece, heavy duty, rust-resistant, rib-reinforced, die-cast
zinc alloy. Recessed instruction plate.
4. Finish: Electrostatically applied, chip resistant, white paint.
5. Finish: Bright chrome plated.
10811-4
6.
7. Finish: Custom color as selected by Architect.
Mounting: Surface, mounted on cast zinc alloy plate, with four 5/16
inch (8 mm) diameter holes for surface mounting to wall and three 7/8
inch (22 mm) diameter holes for electrical wiring; bottom hole suitable
' for surface conduit.
a. Air Intake: Inlet openings on bottom of cover.
b. Air Outlet: Cast alloy grating fixed into blower housing.
C. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) wide by 9-3/4 inches (248
mm) high by 8 inches (203 mm) deep. Weight: 17 pounds (7.3
kg).
d. Air Temperature: 130 degrees F (54 degrees Q.
8. Mounting: Semi-recessed, mounted on cast zinc alloy plate in wall box
with concealed mounting bolts; two 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter holes
for electrical wiring.
a. Air Intake: Vandal resistant metal grill on bottom of casting.
b. Air Outlet: Chrome-plated, die-cast zinc nozzle, fixed to front of
cover.
C. Nominal Size: 12-1/2 inches (318 mm) wide by 9-3/4 inches
(248 mm) high by 7-1/8 inches (181 mm) deep including nozzle.
Weight: 20 pounds (9.0 kg).
d. Air Temperature: 145 degrees F (63 degrees Q.
9. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 15 amp, 60 Hz.
10. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 20 amp, 60 Hz.
11. Power Source: 208/230 volt, 10 amp, 60 Hz.
12. Power Source: 277 volt, 8 ainp, 60 Hz (maximum 2,400 W).
13.
14. Power Source: 220 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
Power Source: 240 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
15. Motor: 60 Hz. Capacitor-initiated; brushless, for longer life and quiet
operation; 1/10 HP, 3,450 RPM, self-lubricating bearings; self-resetting
thermal switch.
16. Motor: 50 Hz. Universal brush, 1/10 HP, 4200 RPM; sealed ball
bearings; insulated by resilient mounting and thermally protected.
17. Slower Fan: Single inlet centrifugal, 180 cubic feet per minute (0.085
cubic meters per second); mounted on motor shaft; insulated with
resilient rubber mounting to obtain maximum sound and vibration
dampening.
18. Heater: Nichrome wire element, side-mounted on blower housing to be
vandal proof.
19. Heater Safeguard: Automatic resetting thermostat to open when air
flow is restricted and close when air flow is resumed.
20. All metal parts coated according to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
requirements.
21. Mount dryers at heights indicated on Drawings.
21 Mount surface mounted hand dryers at the following heights above
floor surface:
a. Men's Toilets: 43 inches (1092 mm),
b. Women's Toilets: 41 inches (1041 mm).
C. Teenagers' Toilets: 39 inches (991 mm).
d. Young Children's Toilets: 33 inches (838 mm).
1
10811-5
e. Toilets for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 35 inches (889
mm).
23. Mount semi-recessed hand dryers at the following heights above floor
surface:
a. Men's Toilets: 40 inches (1016 mm).
b. Women's Toilets: 38 inches (965 mm).
C_ Teenagers' Toilets: 36 inches (914 mm).
d. Young Children's Toilets: 30 inches (762 mm).
C. Toilets for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 32 inches (813
mm).
D. Hand Dryer: Warm air electric hand dryer; Lexan series; surface mounted;
lightweight; entire dryer internally grounded.
1 _ Warranty Period: 5 years; limited warranty.
2. Controls: Push button, chrome-plated, on cover; sealed electronic timer
with adjustable cycle, set for 30 seconds. (Hand On)
3. Controls: Automatic; activated by infrared optical sensor. Operates
while hands are moving under blower. Shut-off in 90 seconds if hands
not removed. (Hand Off(r))
4. Cover: One piece, molded Lexan 940; uniformly white throughout.
Recessed instruction plate.
5. Wall Plate: Cast zinc alloy plate, with four 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter
holes for surface mounting to wall and three 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter
holes for electrical wiring; bottom hole suitable for surface conduit.
6. Air Intake: Inlet openings on bottom of cover.
7. Air Outlet: Chrome-plated, die-cast zinc grating; fixed to blower
housing; designed to keep foreign objects out of dryer.
8. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) wide by 9-3/4 inches (248 mm)
high by 8 inches (203 mm) deep. Weight: 13 pounds (5.9 kg).
9. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 15 amp, 60 Hz.
10. Power Source: 110/120 volt, 20 amp, 60 Hz.
11. Power Source: 208/230 volt, 10 amp, 60 Hz.
12. Power Source: 277 volt, 8 amp, 60 Hz.
13. Power Source: 220 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
14. Power Source: 240 volt, 10 amp, 50 Hz.
15. Motor: 60 Hz. Brushless; 1/10 HP, 3,400 RPM; self-lubricating
bearings; self resetting thermal switch.
16. Motor: 50 Hz. Universal; 1/10 HP, 4,200 RPM at rated loads; sealed
lubricated ball bearings; self resetting thermal switch.
IT Blower Fan: Single inlet centrifugal, 180 cubic feet per minute (0.085
cubic meters per second); mounted on motor shaft; insulated with
resilient rubber mounting to obtain maximum sound and vibration
dampening.
18. Heater: Nichrome wire element, side-mounted on blower housing to be
vandal proof.
19. Heater Safeguard: Automatic resetting thermostat to open when air
flow is restricted and close when air flow is resumed.
20. Air Temperature: 130 degrees F (54 degrees Q.
21. All metal parts coated according to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
requirements.
10811-6
22. Mount dryers at heights indicated on Drawings.
23. Mount at the following heights above floor surface:
a. Men's Toilets: 43 inches (1092 mm).
b. Women's Toilets: 41 inches (1041 mm).
C. Teenagers' Toilets: 39 inches (991 mm).
d. Young Children's Toilets: 33 inches (838 mm),
e. Toilets for Persons with Physical Disabilities: 35 inches (889
mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .I EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C_ Coordinate requirements for blocking to ensure adequate means for support
and installation of hand dryers.
D. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit, disconnect switches and
wiring.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install dryers at specified heights.
C. Install dryers securely to supporting substrate so that fixtures are level and
aligned with each other. Use type and length of fastener as recommended by
manufacturer for type of substrate.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each dryer to
verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
B. Protect installed driers until completion of project.
C. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10811-7
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS;
A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of plumbing work is indicated on the Drawings.
B. IN GENERAL, the work consists of, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves,
fittings, etc.
2. A system of soil, waste and vent piping.
1 Plumbing fixtures and trim-
4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof.
5. Connections of equipment furnished by others.
1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA:
A. SUBMIT to the Architect for approval, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of
brochures, technical data and/or shop drawings of the following:
1. Plumbing fixtures with trim.
2. Floor drains.
3. Hose bibbs with vacuum breaker.
1.04 CHANGES:
A. THE DRAWINGS indicate generally the locations of plumbing fixtures, apparatus,
piping, etc., and while these are to be followed as closely as possible, if before
installation it is found necessary to change the location of same to accommodate the
conditions at the building, such changes shall be made without additional cost to the
Owner and as directed by the Architect.
1.05 PRODUCTS & INSTALLATION:
A. THE PLUMBING MATERIALS, FIXTURES AND INSTALLATION shall comply
with all requirements of Florida State Board of Health's Sanitary Code, Chapter 17C
entitled "Plumbing", the Local Plumbing Code and State and County Energy
Efficiency Code.
15400-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING:
A. ALL MATERIALS shall comply with latest ASTM specifications in each instance that
ASTM has specifications and standards relating to such material.
B. DRAINAGL WASTE AND VENT PIPING: One of the following:
1. ABS-DWV Pipe and Fittings .ASTM D 2661.
2. PVC-DWV Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2665.
C. SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS (outside buildings): One of the following:
1. ABS, ASTM D 2751.
2. PVC, ASTM D 3033 or D 3034.
D. SOLVENT CEMENT for Plastic Pipe):
1. ABS-DWV Solvent Cement ASTM C 2235.
2. PVC-DWV Solvent Cement ASTM D 2564.
E. DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Copper Tubing Type `W' (ASTM B 88) with Bronze or
Wrought Copper solder joint fittings.
F. FURNISH AND INSTALL dielectric or isolation fittings at all points where copper
pipe connects to wrought iron or steel pipe.
G. EXPOSED PIPE IN TOILET ROOMS: Chrome plated brass, American Brass Co., or
equivalent. Furnish and install chrome plated wall plates.
H. LAVATORY AND SIMILAR WASTE ARMS: Type M or L copper water tube,
Mueller, or equivalent.
102 PIPE HANGERS:
A. ADJUSTABLE wrought clevis type hanger and rods: Grinnell Company, or equivalent.
2.03 CLEANOUTS:
A. FLOOR CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes.
1. Exterior: Josam Y-300-17.
2. Interior: Josam Y-100-B with nickel bronze top, or equivalent Wade or Zurn,
unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
B. WALL CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes.
1. Ferrule: Cast iron with a brass plug.
2. Plug: Drilled and tapped to receive cleanout screw.
3. Access Cover: Round polished cast brass with countersunk brass screw. Josam Y-
15400-2
120-B, or equivalent Wade or Zurn.
2.04 VALVES:
A. GATE VALES: 150 pound, screwed, all brass. Crane Co. No_ 431, or equivalent.
B. UNIONS shall have brass to metal ground joint seat.
2.05 TRAPS:
A. FOR LAVATORIES AND SINKS: Brass, chrome plated.
B. FOR SERVICE SINKS: Cast iron, enameled inside.
C. FOR FLOOR DRAINS: Cast iron traps not integral with the floor drain.
2.06 PIPE SLEEVES:
A. GALVANIZED STEEL Size to allow minimum clearance between pipe and sleeves or
insulation and sleeves.
2.07 ESCUTCHEON PLATES;
A. PROVIDE chrome plated escutcheon plates where exposed pipe passes through walls,
floors, or ceiling in finished area.
2.08 FLOOR DRAINS:
A. JOSAM AS SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS: Wade or Zurn equivalent approved.
2.09 FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS:
A. PROVIDE all items of brass and chrome plated finish except where otherwise noted.
B. FOR FASTENING on masonry, use expansion bolts or screws.
C. ALL PIPING that serves fixtures and is exposed beyond the face of the finished wall:
Brass and chrome plated.
D. BRACKETS, ANCHORS AND CLEATS: Furnish and install where required for
support; conceal behind finished wall.
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. FURNISH AND INSTALL all plumbing fixtures as shown on the Drawings. Fixtures
shall be as specified, or equivalent quality fixtures by American Standard, Kohler,
15400-3
Crane or Eljer.
B. HOSE BIBBS: As indicated on the Drawings.
111 PLUMBING STOPS:
A. CHROME PLATED BRASS with renewable valves, seats and stem seals.
2.12 PROTECTIVE COATING:
A. COAL-TAR ENAMEL, AWWA-C-203.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING:
A. ON VERTICAL sanitary drain lines, connect all soil and waste inlets through sanitary
tees, wyes, or wyes and eighth bends. Short radius fittings may be used for vent piping.
On horizontal lines, connect all waste and soil connections through wyes, or wyes and
eighth bends. Double branch fittings may be used on vertical lines and horizontal runs
providing proper grades can be maintained-
B. LAY HORIZONTAL DRAIN PIPES to uniform grade; riser pipes, vertical. Make
changes in directions of drain pipes with long bends.
C. LAY ALL SEWERS and branches, where practicable, on undisturbed earth cut at
oroper grade- Where laid on fill, provide adequate supports to maintain pitch of the line.
D. PITCH all horizontal drains 1/8" per foot minimum.
E. MAKE JOINTS IN PLASTIC PIPE using the specified solvent cement. Install
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
F. SIZES ORRISERS and mains of water system piping shall be as designated on the
Drawings. Verify any omitted sizes before installation. In general, pipe shall be sized
to insure adequate flow in the branches, especially in regard to flush valves. Pitch hot
water lines to facilitate drainage at fixtures.
G. COVER PIPE openings at all times that the work is not in progress at that point.
H. CUTBRASS AND COPPER pipe by means of hacksaw. Remove all burrs and metal
chips, dirt. etc., before joining pipe. Chrome plated pipe shall show no wrench marks
after installation; no threads shall show.
I. SOLDER COPPER WATER PIPING JOINTS witha 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Provide
15400-4
sweat solder joints made so that the solder ring is visible completely around the joint-
Do not use acid core flux.
J. ADEQUATELY SUPPORT all piping above floors inside the building from or on the
building structure. Support piping suspended from the building structure by means of the
specified pipe hangers and rods. Make maximum spacing between pipe supports as
follows:
' Nominal Pipe Size Maximum Span
3/4"and under 5'
1" 7'
1-1/4" 7'
1-1/2" 9'
2" 10'
2-1/2" 11'
3" 12'
4" 14'
' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
' A. ISOLATE ALL MAJOR PIPING assemblies as shown on the Drawings and as required
for proper operation and maintenance. All valves shall be accessible. Provide valve
boxes and access panels where required for accessibility.
B. PLACE SHUT-OFF VALVE on each water main service. Place valve near the building
where indicated on the Drawings, in concrete or cast iron box with a removable cast
iron plate cover.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRAPS:
A. TRAP EACH FIXTURE by water sealing trap placed as near the fixture as possible.
B. VENT ALL TRAPS and place within 5 feet of the fixture which it serves, unless
otherwise noted.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES:
A. INSTALL PIPE SLEEVES at all locations where pipe passes through walls, floors, or
ceiling above or below grade.
B. WHERE SUBJECT to moisture or weather, seal sleeves with watertiqht sealant-
3.05 INSTALLATION OF AIR CHAMBERS:
A INSTALL an air chamber at each fixture or group of fixtures. Make air chambers 20
pipe diameters long and of the same diameter as the pipe to which it is connected. In no
case shall an air chamber be less than 18" long. Air chamber must be installed
15400-5
vertically above the horizontal pipe to which it is connected.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS;
A. INSTALL THE FIXTURE trim and fittings specified, taking care to properly anchor I
each fixture.
B. WHEN THE USE of a wrench is necessary on chromium plated piping, protect the pipe
from marring by use of felt or cloth wrapping beneath wrench jaws. ,
3.07 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATING:
A. COAT METAL PIPE buried in the earth or concealed with heavy coat of coal tar
enamel.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PIPE INSULATION:
A. INSULATE ALL HOT WATER piping above and below grade in accordance with ,
manufacturer's printed instructions. Use 1/2" Armaflex or equal.
3.09 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:
A. MAKE ALL WATER and air tests of the piping systems in the presence of and to the
satisfaction of the Architect or his designed representative. Conduct these tests at such
places and with timing to permit work to proceed with as little interruption as possible.
Make tests before work is concealed.
B. TEST WATER piping to hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi and hold for 24 hours.
C. AFTER THE INSTALLATION of sanitary piping and before the pipe is concealed or '
the fixtures are installed, cap or plug the ends of the system and fill all lines with water
to top of vents above roof and allow to stand until a thorough inspection has been made.
Should leaks appear, repair and repeat the tests until the system is tight.
3.10 STERILIZATION:
THE STERILIZATION PROCESS shall comply with all governing regulations and ,
with the sterilization procedures recommended by the American Water Works
Association. The chlorination process may be simplified by first flushing the system
thoroughly clean, then charging with water containing a minimum of 50 parts per
million of chlorine, allowing this to stand for 24 hours, then thoroughly flushing. After
sterilization and final flushing, the local health authority is to be notified, and their
approval obtained in writing.
END OF SECTION
15400-6
SECTION 15500
AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND VENTILATING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK:
A. THE EXTENT of the mechanical work is indicated on the Drawings.
B. IN GENERAL, the work consists of but is not limited to the following:
1. Air Conditioning and heating units.
1 Ceiling exhaust fans.
3. Grilles, registers and diffusers.
4. Controls.
5. Ductwork.
6, Flashing.
7. Electric heaters.
1.03 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION:
A. ELECTRICAL WIRING, including control wiring, starters and disconnects are
specified in Section 16000 Electrical.
1.04 SUBMITTAL DATA:
A. SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT for approval in accordance with Section 01340, copies
of the equipment brochures, technical data and/or shop drawings of the following:
1. Air Conditioning and heating units.
2. Ceiling exhaust fans.
3. Grilles, registers and diffusers.
4. Controls.
5. Insulation.
6. Electric heaters.
7. Dampers.
15500-1
1.05 NOISE AND VIBRATION:
EQUIPMENT SHALL OPERATE quietly and the design of the base shall be such that
the operation of the equipment shall cause no perceptive vibration in the flooring
adjacent to the equipment, nor cause, directly or indirectly, vibration or objectional
noise in any other portion of the building and/or in the building structure itself.
1.06 FLASHING:
A. ALL SPECIAL FLASHING required for penetration of roof surfaces by HVAC vents,
pipes, etc. shall be furnished by this contractor for installation by roofing contractor.
Flashing shall be in accordance with the Roofing Section of the Specifications, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1.07 FOUNDATIONS:
A. FURNISH ALL FOUNDATIONS for equipment covered in this Specification, as a part
of this Section. unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS:
A. FURNISH 2 SETS of complete operating instructions covering entire heating,
ventilating and air conditioning system. Include a copy of the Control Diagrams and a
complete description of the operation of the Control System. Instruct designated
representative in proper operation and care of system.
1.09 WARRANTIES:
A FURNISH a 5 year warranty onall compressors and a one year service (including labor)
and guarantee on all controls, equipment and material.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK:
A. SUPPLY SHEET METAL WORK in the heating, air conditioning and/or ventilation
systems in accordance with ASHRAE Standards.
B. ROVIDE OFFSETS, elbows and transformations in ductwork where necessary, whether
or not shown.
C. CONSTRUCT ductwork of galvanized sheet steel.
D. USE WEIGHTS, bracing, joints and all details in accordance with ASHRAE
recommendations.
15500-2
1
E. RECTANGULAR ducts over 12- wide shall be cross broken except where ductwork is
to be insulated.
F_ MAKE INTERIOR of ducts smoothand joints air tight. Where necessary to insure
tightness, caulk joints. Make the entire installation rigid with ductwork free from rattles
and air noises when in operation.
G. MAKE ELBOWS with inside radius equal to the width of the duct except where
otherwise specified or necessitated by unavoidable space conditions. Where inside
radius is less than three-fourths the duct width, multiple turning vans shall be provided.
Provide square elbows with Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns" or Barber-Colman "Airturns".
H. INCLUDED angle of divergence for enlargement is not to exceed 15° where space
conditions permit. Included ANGLE OF CONVERGENCE for contracting is not to
exceed 30'-
1, PROVIDE flexible duct connections in ducts as indicated; make with woven fiberglass
cloth collars not less than 2" long. Secure fiberglass cloth to the duct and fan
connections by galvanized channels. Provide a braided copper bridge strap across
flexible connections.
7. INSTALL REGISTERS, grilles and diffusers as indicated
K. SUPPLY Barber-ColmanCo. "Deflectrols", or Tuttle & Bailey "Santrols" with all
diffusers, registers and where otherwise indicated.
L. WHERE EXHAUST REGISTERS open from the same duct into two or more rooms,
they must be offset or baffled to prevent transmission of light or sound.
M. DIMENSIONS indicated on drawings are free area. Where ducts are lined, increase
dimensions to accommodate insulation thickness.
2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCT:
1. Install only where indicated.
2. Install in fully extended condition free of sags or kinks. using only minimum length
required to make connection. Bend greater than 90 degrees not allowed.
3. Do not exceed 12 feet in length from supply air duct.
2.03 FIBROUS GLASS DUCT: NOT PERMITTED
2.04 MANUAL DAMPERS:
A. PROVIDE MANUAL louver dampers where shown on the Drawings and where
15500-3
necessary for the proper regulation of the air handling system, and so locate as to be
accessible after the building is completed, i.e., by removing a marked tile, access panel
or other approved method. Dampers shall be Air Balance No. 116, or approved
equivalent.
B. MANUAL LOUVER dampers shall have rigid channel frames; #16 U.S. gauge
galvanized blades not over 10" wide; bronze sleeve bearings and interlinkage.
C. WHERE LOUVER dampers or splitter dampers are located in concealed ducts, provide
with model 301, 302, 900 or 914 operators, as required. Manufacturer: Young
Regulator Company or approved equivalent.
D. FOR ALL OTHER manual dampers, provide a hand lever with a quadrant and set screw.
Provide bearings at both ends of the shaft. Clearly mark all damper operators to indicate
"open" and "closed" positions. Mark outside air dampers to show outside air settings.
2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings):
A. PATTERN, arrangement and size indicated on the Drawings are Titus. Tuttle & Bailey
or Barber-Colman of equivalent appearance and performance will be acceptable.
Performance shall be certified by Air Diffusion Council.
B. DIFFUSERS: Titus TDC-S4, with V.C.D. and air deflectors.
C. RETURN AIR GRILLES: Titus TH50 aluminum.
D. DOOR GRILLES: Titus CT-700-BF aluminum.
2.06 DUCT INSULATION:
A. INSULATE all sheet metal supply and return ducts with 2" foil-Faced flexible
fiberglass. Apply insulation as per manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be taped
and sealed.
2.07 BOLTS, INSETS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS:
A. INSTALL INSERTS, bolts, expansion shields, beam clamps and hangers for supporting
pipes, ducts, etc. Where placed in new slabs, cooperate in placement before slab is
poured. Bean clamps, hangers, etc; Grinnel or approved equivalent-
B. INSTALL sleeves where pipes pass through walls or floors. Sleeves: Preformed VC
galvanized steel or wrought iron pipe. Cut sleeves passing through walls and floors
above grade flush with the wall. Install sleeves of sufficient diameter to allow for
expansion and contraction and pipe covering.
C. INSTALL SLEEVES passing through floor slabs of sufficient size to allow for packing
15500-4
with Oakum and pouring with hot tar_
D. SLEEVE INSTALLATION shall comply with the regulations of the National Board of
Fire Underwriters, with National Fire Protection Association, or local authority.
' E. PROVIDE pickle plated, cast iron escutcheons where pipes pass through floors, ceiling
or walls in finished areas.
2.08 MOTORS:
A. MOTORS for all equipmentcovered by this Section of the Specifications shall be
furnished and installed by this Contractor.
' B. MOTOR H.P., voltage, etc_ as indicated on the Drawings.
C. OPEN FRAME MOTORS shall be rated on a 40° C. temperature rise basis: totally
' enclosed motor shall be rated on a 55° C. temperature rise basis. The load to which each
motor is connected shall not cause the motor running current to exceed the nameplate
amperage.
' D. MOTORS: Induction type of design suited to the service for which they are used unless
otherwise specified.
E. MOTORS: General Electric, or approved equivalent.
109 CEILING EXHAUST FANS:
A. As indicated or approved equivalent.
2.10 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:
A. TRANE or Carrier. Compressorsshall have 5 year warranty. Provide roof curb,
thermostat, down-flow section, two sets of filters, and low-ambient down to 20° F.
Furnish roof mounted units complete with factory fabricated roof curbs.
2.11 ELECTRIC HEATERS:
A. PROVIDE electric heaters as indicated on the Drawings.
B. HEATERS SHALL BE COMPLETE with terminal block, control contactors, automatic
reset hi-limit, manual reset hi-limit, fuse blocks and back-up contactors. All components
shall be in metal enclose and factory wired.
C_ HEATERS SHALL HAVE maximum of 48 amps per circuit and each such circuit shall
be provided with fuse block and back-up contactor. Back-up contactor shall break all
underground lines, shall be operated by the manual reset-hi-limit thermostat and shall
override all other safety controls.
15500-5
1
D. HEATERS SHALL BE U.L. labeled and shall meet national and local electrical codes.
Heaters shall be full area of duct.
E. HEATERS SHALL BE as manufactured by Electric Heaters, Inc., or equivalent IL,G,
Tennessee Plastics, or Valley Industries, Inc.
2.12 CONTROLS:
A. AS SPECIFIED on the Drawings and furnished with air conditioning and heating units.
213 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES & EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
A. AS SPECIFIED in Section 07800.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCTWORK:
A. INSTALL in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. INSTALLATION SHALL BE rigid and ductwork free from rattles and air noise when
in operation.
C. FLEXIBLE DUCT:
L. Install only where indicated.
2. Install in fully extended condition free of sags or kinks. using only minimum
length required to make connection. Bend greater than 90 degrees not allowed.
1 Do not exceed 8 feet in length from supply air duct.
3.02 SUPERVISION OF ELECTRICAL WORK:
A. THIS CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for supervision of all wiring (including
control wiring) of equipment included in this Section and shall furnish all necessary
diagrams required, including control wiring diagrams.
3.03 PIPING, EQUIPMENT, ETC.:
A. ENTIRE INSTALLATION shall be in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications
and applicable requirements of the manufacturers of the equipment and shall perform
satisfactorily at the completion of the work.
B. ALL PENETRATIONS of roof by piping shall be made through pipe curb assemblies or
within roof mounted equipment factory fabricated curbs.
15500-6
1
1
1
C. ALL MECHANICAL equipment located on the roof, including A/C units and
refrigeration condensing units (if any), both Contractor and Owner supplied, shall be
installed on factory fabricated curbs, prefabricated equipment support units or
combination equipment basis, as appropriate.
3.04 PAINTING:
A. EXCEPT as specified herein, all painting will be done under other sections of
specifications. Leave work free from rust, dirt, grease and plaster.
B. EQUIPMENT with factory applied finish shall have scratches, chips. etc_ primed and
touched-up with materials which will protect the surface and match adjacent areas-
3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS.
A. DURING CONSTRUCTION, install proper filters as necessary and replace upon
completion of work and if the systems are operated, replace filters every 30 days and
again prior to start-up. Contractor to provide the Owner with the date of start up and
maintain a log of the filter replacements during construction.
B. UPON COMPLETION of work, clean, oil and grease all fans, motors, other running
equipment and apparatus and make certain that all such apparatus and mechanisms are in
proper working order and made ready for test.
C. PRIOR to turning the system to the Owner, replace all filters with new.
3.06 TEST AND BALANCE:
A. EACH SYSTEM shall be balanced to assure design performance- After final installation
of all equipment, a complete test and balance shall be performed on all air distribution.
B. FURNISH a letter from equipment manufacturer that all controls have been checked for
operation and calibration and that the system is operating as intended.
C. PROVIDE a certified air balance report for system performed by a member of
Associate Air Balance Council.
END OF SECTION
15500-7
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
' A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAI PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. FURNISH ALL LABOR, materials, equipment and accessories necessary to install a
complete and properly operating electrical system which includes all electrical work as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. EXTEND SERVICE from the point of service attachment, furnishing all protective
devices, starters, conductors, supports, raceways, pipe curbs, etc. to provide complete
interior and exterior electrical systems to serve motor loads, lighting loads and
miscellaneous electrical loads.
1.03 SERVICE:
A. PERMANENT electrical service and metering will be supplied by the local utility
company at voltage indicated on the Drawings.
1.04 CODES:
A. COMPLY with the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code,
and applicable rules and regulations of local and state laws and ordinances.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. SUBMIT a list of principal material items, giving manufacturers names and catalog
numbers. Approval of the list shall be obtained from the Architect before orders are
placed. Submit shop drawings for panelboards_ Submit catalog cut sheets of all lighting
fixtures.
B. SUBMIT in accordance with Section 01340.
1.06 BALLAST WARRANTY:
A. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY to the Owner stating that any ballast that becomes
16000-1
1
defective within a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion shall be
replaced at no cost to the Owner for labor or materials. 1
B_ WARRANTY MUST BE SIGNED by the General Contractor and Electrical
Subcontractor. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
101 GENERAL: Provide Square D equipment and materials only.
A. IN GENERAL, materials and apparatus shall comply with applicable tests, ratings,
specifications, and requirements of the IEEE and NEMA and shall bear the approved
device label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
2.02 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A. UNLESS OTHERWISE indicated, branch circuit protective device enclosures shall be '
NEMA Type 1, general purpose type. Circuit protective devices installed outdoors or
exposed to the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.
2.03 PANELBOARDS: ,
A. PANELBOARDS shall be dead front safety type. The bus size, the number of branch
circuits, their ampere rating and number of poles, etc., for each panel board is noted on
the Drawings. Solderless lugs or connectors shall be provided on mains, on the load
side of each branch circuit, and on neutral bars. All busses shall be 98%conductivity
copper, except main switchboards may have aluminum bus bars, if called for on the '
Drawings. Cabinets shall be fabricated of code gauge sheet steel and shall be galvanized
orcadmium plated inside and out. Fronts shall be sheet steel with a grey paint finish over
a rust inhibitive primer. Doorsshall be hinged and shall be equipped with suitable I
latches.
B_ PANELBOARDS shall be connected in a manner to equally distribute phase loads, with ,
circuit numbering as indicated on the Drawings. Panel boards shall have a typewritten
circuit directory card mounted in a frame with plastic cover mounted on the inside of
the door. ,
C. PANELBOARDS which have branches that will serve as normal switching means for
area lighting shall be equipped with handle protective devices on all breakers which '
serve lighting circuits with local switches, receptacles, appliances, water coolers, and
similar non-lighting loads to prevent inadvertent interruption of these services when
switching lighting. Handle protective devices shall be the non-padlocking type
especially designed for this use and shall be suitably fastened in place.
D. CIRCUIT BREAKERS for panel boards shall be molded plastic case type. Breakers '
shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and multi-pole breakers shall have a common trip
16000-2
unit so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles of each breaker.
Breakers shall be trip-free and trip-indicating and shall have quick-make, quick-break
contacts. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, I.T.E., Square
D or Westinghouse.
E. LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS: Square D
2.04 SAFETY SWITCHES:
A. SAFETY SWITCHES shall be general-duty type, NEMA Type "GD". Switch
mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break. Cover shall be interlocked with
mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the "OFF" position. Enclosures shall
be "bonderized" or equal, and primed and finished to resist rusting and corrosion.
Switches shall be General Electric, I.T.E., or Westinghouse.
2.05 FUSES:
A. FUSES for safety switches shall be standard National Electrical Code cartridge type,
unless otherwise indicated. Furnish and install proper size fuses where required for all
fusible equipment. Provide dual element fuses for all motors.
2.06 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS:
' A. RIGID CONDUIT: Hot dip galvanized, inside and out and on the threads. Prior to
galvanizing, surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared for zinc coating. Surplus zinc
adhering to the threads shall be removed, after which conduit shall be dipped in a
chromic acid or clear enamel lacquer bath, and then baked. Furnish in 10 foot lengths,
with one made up coupling per length, Standard Taper Pipe threads on each end.
' B. EMT: Galvanized, electrical metallic tubing, furnishing in 10 foot lengths, marked and
conforming in all respects to UL and NEMA standards.
' C. FLEXIBLE METALLIC RACEWAY: Use Sealtite liquid tight flexible metallic
raceway for all connections to rotating or vibrating equipment, in lengths not to exceed 6
feet.
D. PVC: Use EPC-40 polyvinyl chloride raceway for all encased work, under-ground work
or work under slabs on grade. Raceways shall be furnished in 10 foot lengths and shall
conform to all applicable UL and NEMA Standards. Turn through slab with rigid steel.
Pull additional bond wire if PVC is used.
2.07 BOXES:
A. CEILING outlet boxes shall be 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep for exposed work or f i red
ceiling work, and 3 inches deep for concrete work. All boxes for concrete work shall
be of the type especially designed for this construction. Plaster rings and/or fixture
16000-3
studs shall be provided where required.
B. FLUSH MOUNTED wall outlets shall be 4 inch square boxes or gang boxes, not less
than 1-1/2 deep. Boxes shall be provided with extension rings and/or covers with
sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the finish wall.
C. BOXES for flush mounting in exposed concrete block or tile work with one or two
devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion of the cover. The
covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be flush with the face of the block or
tile. Covers shall be Steel City 52-C series. Boxes for more than two devices shall be
Steel City "GW" gang boxes-
D. WALL PLATES for flush mounted wall boxes shall be 0.10 inch plastic of the
"Uniline" design. Plates shall be non-conducting, non-combustible material in ivory
color, Bryant 92000 series or equivalent.
E. OUTLET BOXES for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation shall be cast
metal type "ES" or "FD" boxes with suitable galvanized sheet steel covers.
F. FLOOR OUTLET BOXES shall be round, watertight cast metal type with fully
adjustable tops- Floor plates shall finish flush with the finished floor surface. The exact
location of boxes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Boxes shall be Steel City 600
series with aluminum floor plates or equivalent. Receptacle outlets shall be catalog No.
SFH-40 with one duplex receptacle as specified in Paragraph B-6. Telephone outlets
shall be catalog No. SFL-10.
2.08 CONDUCTORS:
A. ALL CONDUCTORS shall be copper, shall conform to applicable ASTM
specifications as to conductivity, and shall be free from kinks and defects when
installed. Stranding shall be IPCEA Standard. Conductors No. 10 AWC and smaller
shall be solid and all others stranded.
2.09 CONDUCTOR INSULATIONS:
A. UNLESS otherwise indicated herein or on the Drawings, all branch circuit conducts
shall have a moisture resistant thermoplastic insulation, Underwriters' Type
THWN/THHN.
B. FOR FEEDER and for conductors #8 AWG and larger, the conductors shall have a
moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic insulation, Underwriters' Type
THWN/THHN.
C. FIXTURE WIRE shall be Type THHN, extended from fixture to fixture through the
fixture channel, unless more stringent methods are required by local code or ordinance.
2.10 WUUNG DEVICES
16000-4
1
A. RECEPTACLES: All receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounding type with
ground connection made through an extra pole which shall be permanently connected to
1 the raceway system.
B. TUMBLER SWITCHES: Local tumbler switches shall be of the type as indicated on
the Drawings, rated 20 amperes at 120 volts or 20 amperes at 277 volts, Underwriters'
approved without de-rating for tungsten lamp loads or inductive loads.
2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURES:
'
A. FURNISH COMPLETE in all respects all lighting fixtures indicated on the Drawings.
Verify the ceiling finishes and suspension systems for selection of the proper type trim
and support arrangements of the fixtures.
2.12 BALLASTS:
A. BALLASTS for fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, high efficiency, Type 8, high
power factor type and shall bear the CBM and UL labels.
' B. ALL BALLASTS shall be individually fused and shall be equipped with internal
thermal protection. Fuses shall be installed on the line side of the ballasts and shall be
sized to prevent overheating in event of lamp or ballast failure.
2.13 LAMPS:
A. FLUORESCENT LAMPS shall be of one manufacture and shall be as indicated on the
Drawings, and shall be high efficiency type.
' B. INCANDESCENT LAMPS shall be 130 volt, general purpose type with brass base.
C. LAMPS shall be manufactured by General Electric, Syvania or Westinghouse.
2.14 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES:
IA. PROVIDE pipe curb assemblies or pipe seals specified in Section 07800, for all conduit
penetrations through the roof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A. UNLESS otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of cabinet
or enclosure 6'-6" above finished floor, properly aligned and adequately supported
independently of the connecting raceways. All steel shapes, etc., necessary for the
16000-5
1
support of the equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor where the
building structure is not suitable for mounting the equipment directly thereon.
102 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
A. RIGID CONDUIT: Cut all conduit square, ream smooth and thread properly to receive
couplings or fittings. Fit all raceway ends at cabinets, panels, pull boxes, outlet boxes,
fixtures, etc. with approved locknuts and bushings. Make up joints with white lead
applied to the male threads only. On galvanized conduit which has been field cut and
threaded, protect ends and threads with "ZRC" compound, applied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. EMT: Cut all raceways square and ream smooth. Connect to couplings or fittings with
indenter type connections, using not less than 3 indents per connection. Use proper
adapter fittings at all boxes, panels, pull boxes, etc., together with approved bushings.
C. PVC: Cut raceways square, deburr ends, and wipe clean of dust, dirt and plastic
shavings. Wipe raceway end clean and dry, and apply a full, even coat of approved PVC
cement, covering the area to be inserted in the socket. Firmly push raceway and fitting
together, and rotate to distribute the cement evenly. Avoid cement build-up inside
raceway. Wipe joint to remove excess cement and let dry at room temperature. Provide
socket male adapter fittings at all boxes, pull boxes, panels, etc., together with approved
bushings.
D. CONCEAL all raceways, except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. Run
exposed raceways, where permitted, parallel and perpendicular to the building lines and
to each other. Offset raceways where entering boxes or outlets and run flat against
surfaces.
E. DURING CONSTRUCTION, cap all open conduit ends, using T & B 91460 Series
capped bushings. Seal all underground raceways to exclude moisture. Cap all empty
raceways that do not terminate in a covered box, cabinet, or similar enclosure. Route
raceways to avoid trapped runs, or make provision to drain moisture by installing
approved drains or breathers. Install seals on raceways entering air conditioning plenum
chambers.
F. COAT ALL UNDERGROUND steel raceways with Koppers #50 Bitumastic before
backfilling_ Apply direct from the container without dilution.
G. INSTALL approved expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints.
H. FURNISH ALL CONDUIT stub-ups into panels, boxes, equipment housings,
equipment bases and lighting standards with insulating grounding type bushings, Steel
City Type GB. Furnish Steel City Type Bi bushings for all other conduit terminations.
1. INSTALL 412 AWG galvanized pull-wire in all empty raceways.
16000-6
r_
1 103 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:
A. SYMBOLS on Drawings are approximate locations only. The Architect reserves the
right to make minor changes in location prior to roughing, without extra cost to the
Owner. Properly center outlets with respect to the architectural feature of the buildings.
Locate outlet boxes for switches at the lock side of doors.
l
ill
t
t
d
h
moun
es w
at covers or p
a
so t
B. SET ALL BOXES securely in position, mounte
flush with the finished construction. Furnish and install extension or plaster rings where
required, and to avoid additional raceway offsets.
C. SAW CUT OPENINGS in concrete block or masonry walls with an opening tolerance
of 1/8" on all sides, with the bottom of the opening at the masonry joint nearest to the
dimensions indicated.
D. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY indicated otherwise, mount all outlets at the following
heights above finished floor, measured to the center of the box:
1. Switches -48".
2- Receptacles -12".
3- Bracket Lights 90".
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS:
A. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, all branch circuit conducts shall be No. 12 AWG.
Any branch circuit run over 100 feet in length of the circuit to the panel, shall be No. 10
AWG to the first outlet.
B. SPLICES, taps and attachment fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically
secure and solder less lugs and connectors shall be used. Lugs shall be used for
conductors sizes No. 8 AWG and larger. Provide sufficient slack cable in boxes, outlets
and cabinets to ensure that there is no binding at the bushings. All lugs shall be of the
correct sizes for the conductors joined and in no case shall strands be cut from a
conductor in order to fit the conductor into a lug. Taping of joints shall be with vinyl
plastic electrical tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined.
C. ALL CONDUCTORS shall be color coded as required by the NEC and further
identified and coded as specified hereinafter. Color coding shall be by means of colored
insulating material, colored braid of jacket over the insulation or means of suitable
colored, permanent non-aging, insulating tape applied to conductors at each outlet,
cabinet or junction point. The color coding shall be accomplished as the conductors are
installed. The following system of color coding shall be strictly adhered to: (1) Ground
leads, green; (2) grounding neutral leads, white; (3) ungrounded phase wire, black, red,
and blue. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed
throughout.
3.05 GROUNDING:
16000-7
A. THE INTERIOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS shall be completely and effectively
grounded as required by the NEC and as specified hereinafter. Only a direct connection
with copper wire to either or both of the following will be considered as a "direct"
ground:
1. A 1-inch or larger mechanically and electrically continuous, underground, iron or
steel cold water line.
2. Two 5/8" diameter, copper weld rod 10 feet long, driven vertically into the ground.
All ground connections, where buried or otherwise inaccessible, shall be brazed or
welded.
B. ALL METALLIC RACEWAYS shall be mechanically and electrically secure at all
joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings, and equipment. Metallic raceways shall be
connected to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance and shall be
electrically continuous throughout the entire system.
C. EQUIPMENT CONNECTED to the conduit system by a section of flexible conduit
shall have a full size, but not larger than No. 3/0, grounding shunt installed as described
in Paragraph 3.07.C.
D. A NO. 6 ground lead, connected to a direct ground, shall be terminated in the telephone
cabinet.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES:
A. ALL FIXTURES shall be properly and carefully supported and aligned. Furnish and
install all necessary steel shapes, etc., for support of fixtures as required and/or detailed
on the Drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be clean and lamped with new lamps at the
time of final inspection, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All fixtures in
plaster ceilings shall be installed with a plaster frame. Unless otherwise noted, mounting
height for fixtures are from the finished floor to the bottom of the fixture for pendant
mounted fixtures, and to the bottom of the outlet box or recessed back box for wall
mounted fixtures.
3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. ALL EQUIPMENT shown on the Drawings which is furnished under other sections of
these Specifications and by others shall be connected under this section. This equipment
shall be considered as being furnished in place.
B. BEFORE CONNECTING any piece of equipment, check the name plate data against
the information shown on the Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect any
discrepancies thereto.
C. THE EQUIPMENT shall be connected to the conduit system by means of a short
section (18" minimum of flexible conduit unless otherwise indicated. Connections with
16000-8
1
conductors No. 6 and smaller, the grounding conductor shall be installed inside the
flexible section. The connection on the line side of the flexible section shall be made by
pulling in the ground conductor back to the nearest box, with necessary increase in
conduit size for the extra conductor, and terminating the conductor with an approved
grounding type bushing in the box. An alternate method may be by installing a "C"
conduit between the conduit and the flexible section and terminating the ground
conductor therein by means of a solder less lug bolted to the side wall of the conduit,.
Connections with conductors of No. 4 and larger, the ground conductor shall be
installed on the outside of the flexible section making the connection to the conduit with
an approved grounding clamp.
3.08 CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL WIRING:
A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, all control devices (except motor starters) such
as thermostats, firestats, relays, etc., shall be furnished under other sections of the
Specifications, and shall be wired complete under this Section. The intent of the
diagrams on the Drawings is to show the control devices and the extent of the control
?. circuiting required, and these diagrams shall not be used on the job. All control
circuiting shall be installed in accordance with diagrams furnished by the manufacturers
of the control equipment and which have been approved by the Architect. All controls
shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor.
3.09 CONDUIT ROOF PENETRATIONS:
A. MAKE CONDUIT roof penetrations only through pipe curb assemblies or pipe seals.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT:
A. IDENTIFICATION shall be provided for all electrical equipment installed by the
Contractor- Identification shall clearly describe the equipment function. Method of
identification and description shall be subject to approval of the Architect.
B. PANEL BOARD DIRECTORY cards shall be completed with a typewriter to indicate
areas and/or devices served by each circuit.
1
END OF SECTION
16000-9
REPORT OF THE
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
PRESS BOX AND CONCESSION STAND
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX
CLEARWATER, IFLORIDA
Origgers Engineering Services Incorporated
1-1
1
1
G E R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N C O R P O R A T E D
Geotechnical Engineering & Construction Materials Testing
City of Clearwater
Parks and Recreation Department
100 South Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, Florida 33756
I Attention: Mr. Leroy Chin
RE: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation
Press Box and Concession Stand, Buildings
Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex
Clearwater, Florida
Our File: DES 086173
Dear Mr. Chin:
August 31, 2010
Pursuant to your :authorization, DRIGGERS` ENGINEERING SERVICES, ..INC. has
Gornpleted.the.geotechnical investigation:in the area of the proposed new structures. Included herein
are the. results of our field and. laboratory testing together with geotechnical recommendations for
your consideration.
S CATION PROGRAM.
-. Plate I of the attachments identifies the respective positioning, of five
......
(S.PT) borings that were conducted within the areas of the proposed
S PeetrationTest
anaard
concession stand and. new press box building. Specifically, three (3) borings were performed within
the .proposed concession .stand with the. remaining two (2) borings conducted within the press box
structure. The borings were advanced to depths of 45 to.55 feet below grade in order to..allow
penetration into the underlying limestone formation. The borings were grouted in accordance with
the Southwest Florida Water.Ma. iagement.District (SWFWMD) regulations.
Sarasota Clearwater Tampa
Phone: 941.371.3949 12220 49th Street North • ciearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813.948.60 27
Fox: 94.1.371.8962 Phane: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.4090 Fax: 813.948.7645
sareffice@driggersreng.com ahvofN)e@drigge"ng.gom tpaoffice@drigger&eng.com
1
2
The Standard Penetration Test borings were performed in general: accordance with ASTM
D-1586. Logs of the test borings are presented in the report attachments reflecting visual. together
with estimated Unified Soil Classification corresponding to each sample interval. The test boring
logs also depict tabulated and plotted Standard Penetration resistance values corresponding to each
sample interval. A brief description of this method of sampling is also included in the report
attachments.
LABORATORY TESTING - A limited laboratory classification testing program was undertaken
to aid in characterizing the engineering properties of the subsurface soils. Our laboratory tests
included four (4) organic content tests, one (1) grainsize or sieve.: analysis and one (1) Atterberg
Limits determination. The results of our laboratory tests -are presented on the Summary of Test
Results in the report attachments. Also included is the graphiea..1.depictlonoftheindividual grainsize
analysis.
GENE IZED :S.UBSURFACE CONDITIONS.
SOIL CONDITIONS - The press box-and concession stand structures are.within the general
vicinity of a. landfill area which has been well documented. Based on. our discussions with you, it
is our understanding that.the,previous landfill,. material has, been removed from beneathahe structure
areas plus a margin of at least 30 feet outside the structures perimeters. The press box and.
concession stand areas are also some 5 to 7 feet higher in. elevaboh that the surrounding grades: The
soils within this.upp.er :5.to 7:feet consist of gray and brown fine sands with someeon'crete debris.
Below this additional. fill :height, the borings identified a dark brown, variably .organic fine sand.
Laboratory testing suggests this zone possesses: organic' contents ranging from less than Z.% which
is considered minimal, to approaching 7% which is considered marginal brut riot excessive.
The upper fill materials and organic seams within the proposed structure areas were underlain
by gray and brown fine' .sands 'with .trace silt fines. content to depths the of about 1.2 to 20.' feet below
i
grade. The soils in .the upper sandy strata were represented, pnmarily
by the S)? to SF'=SM Unifedd
Soil Classification. S..ystenp. (LYSC;S) designation. The >Yppersandy soils overly a green and gray clay
=it.. Within. theupper.portionofthe:clayeyunitatSB-1.ah&SB-2, wood, metal and'glass:fiagmerits
were noted within the 1.5 :to 234oot depth.interval_ The, concentration:of th.'is. debris.appeared to be
limitedbased onthe SPT sampling. Losses of drilling fluid circulation were also noted atSB-2. The
combination of debris and a loss of drilling.fluid,circulation;could. be suggestive.o:fpotential nested
voids or very weak ones within the debris-ladcn materials in the viciriity.ofthe:borehole. However,
triggers Engineering Services Incorporated
1
1 no obvious voids were detected throughout the vertical limits of the borings. At borings. SB-3, SB-4
and S11-1, no debris was noted not were there any losses of drilling fluid circulation at depth. ]Below
about 35 to 45 feet, the limestone formation was encountered at all the borings.
Standard Penetration resistance data suggests primarily a loose to medium dense relative
density within the sandy soils with an occasional seam of very loose soils identified. The clay soils
were typically soft to firm in consistency. The exception was S13-2 which identified very soft clays
below about 15 feet.
GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS - Groundwater was recorded at depths of about 6.5 feet to 8.5
below grade at the time of our investigation. It should also be recognized that the investigation took
place during a period of moderate rainfall during the wet season. Accordingly, we would expect
groundwater levels.may rise only slightly following a period ofmore pronounced rainfall during the
height of the wet season.
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION AND RECOMI«NDATIONS
DEVELOPMENT CONCEPT. - It is our understanding that the planned construction will include
a single-story concession building and a single-story press box structure with a partial second story.
Based .on the information provided by Mr. Steve Fowler, with Fowler Associates Architects, Inc.,
the concession stand will be supported primarily by.load bearing walls with: maximum service
compression loads of.2 kips-per lineal foot. According to Mr. Fowler, maximum.wall loads for the
press box building will be.2 kips per lineal foot for the. single-story portion and 4 kips perlineal foot
for the two-story portion.
We have assumed that minimal;f`ill. (Ito 2 feet) will. be.required to establish the finished floor
elevations for the structures. Should final design loads or fill requirements significantly exceed those
discussed herein, this office should be contacted to review our recommendations and effect any
necessary modifications.
FOUNDATION CONDITIONS - As discussed previously, the subject site is. within. an overall
property that has had historic landfill activity. However; we were informed that the landfill material:
had been removed back in the. late 1960's to allow construction of a field house building that has
been subsequently demolished. It is out understanding that the removal ofthe landfill material also
extendedabout,30 to 40.feet beyond the footprints ofthe proposed structures. Indeed, although trace
amounts of debris was sampled within the deeper soils of two (2) boring locations, the borings
Chiggers Engineering Services Incorporated
4
conducted during the current study did not identify significant quantities of debris. The debris
identified at depth within SB-'1 and SB-2 is likely the result of some residual debris mixed iri. with
the bottom of the old landfall rather than an indication of a zone of concentrated, void-filled debris.
However, it should be recognized that debris was in fact noted along with a loss of drilling fluid
circulation which often times is associated with nested-voids. Also, zones of very loose materials
were identified within the backfill materials which could be suggestive of poor compaction within
discreet depth intervals. Nevertheless, it is your assertion that the zones of significant debris were
removed and replaced with backfall beneath the structures plus the 30 to 40-foot margin and our
borings have not encountered conditions that would necessarily disagree with this contention.
However, the risk associated with potential deep pockets or zones of debris that may not have been
appropriately removed which could produce future structure settlement must be borne by the city in
order to enjoy the economy of a shallow foundation system. Verifying the absence of debris-laden
soils beneath the structure areas plus a inargin outside the structure perimeter would. necessitate an
additional program of tightly spaced borings within and outside the structure areas:
Your attention is also .directed.t'o the.shallow organic soils and concrete debris noted within
the upper 10 feet which have the potential to produce unacceptable total and differential settlement
depending on the concentration of debris and the'thiekness and, organic content of the organic soils
:zone. Zoneswith excessive organic,co..ntent and appreciable thickness will require over-excavation
and.replacement..Therefore, we recommend a series. ofprobes within the.foundation areas to check
for the presence of cone entrated debris or highly organic-soils that may warrant over-excavation and
replacement. Based on the. results of the borings; we would expect the need, if any, for buried
organic soil removal to be minimal.
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - With due consideration to the. above -limitations and
provided'proper s,ubgrade preparation is enacted including any necessary removal. and replacement
of shallow organic soils, shallow foundations. may be constructed based upon. an allowable soil
bearing pressure of up to 2;000 psf..Provided :proper stsbgrad.e preparation .is 'enacted, foundations
sized based upon this allowable soil bearing pressure would be expected to produce total settlements
on "the order of 0.5 inch. Due to the sandy nature of the soils within -a. depth of significant stress
imposition, the majority of- he settlement should occur quickly following the imposition of load.
Included in the report attachments are specific recommendations relative to subgrade
preparation and foundation design.
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
t
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
u
5
SLAB-ON-GRADE -Following Successful completion of the stripping and proof-rolling, the slab
may be constructed on a compacted subgrade. The subgrade and. fill soils require densification to
not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density per ASTM D-155.7. The fill soils
should also consist of fine sands comprising the SP to SP-SM Unified Soil Classification system or
otherwise as approved by the project design team. Utility trenches and ruts should be re-leveled and
uniformly compacted to avoid sharp discontinuities in bearing characteristics and slab thickness that
could induce cracking.
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. appreciates this opportunitybe of service
to you on this project. Should you have any questions concerning the results of our investigation,
please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned. at your convenience.
Respectfully submitted,.
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
Woe S. gers:, P.E,
Senior O'eot ical Engineer
VL Registration No.. 5$013 0%_
. Jaime Driggers, P.E.
D `4
t?? ?GE?S?r'•?`?t???e .
No. 5801'.3 i
do
rho --o' S
. OF =?4 S
++tSS%p`' E?G?=
President ++???` NAh a`te`
FL Registration No. 16989
D-REP\0$6173-rep
Copies submitted: (3) City of Clearwater; Attn. Leroy Chin
(1.). Fowler Associates Architects, Inc.; Attn: SteveFowler, ATA
1
I Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
1
APPENDIX
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUaBGRADE PREPARATION
AND FOUNDATION DESIGN
PLATE I - BORING-LOCATION PLAN
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SPT) BORING LOGS
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
GRAINSIZE ANALYSIS
METHOD OF TESTING
i
i
i
D
E
i
i
S
i
I
d
r
ggers
ng
neer
ng
erv
ces
ncorporate
1
1
1
1
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRA.DE PREPARATION
AND FOUNDATION DESIGN'
rl
r
1
fl
I Origgers Engineering Services Incorporated
r
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION
AND FOUNDATION DESIGN
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
1. The entire structure areas and for a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the outside footing
perimeter should be stripped of all surface vegetation, pavements, highly organic soils, root
concentrations, existing structures, concentrated shallow debris and other objectionable
material, Exact depth of stripping should be determined by a representative of the soil
engineer in the field. The foundation areas, prior to filling, should be carefully probed as
discussed in the report text to check for unsuitable soils which may warrant over-excavation
and replacement.
2. The exposed subgrade should beuniformly compacted using a heavy, vibratory roller having
a minimum static drum weight of 5 tons. Subgrade compaction should consist of no less
than ten (10) complete coverages in a criss-crossed pattern throughout the entire structure
area, plus the 5 foot margin. A qualified engineer or technician should be present during
subgrade compaction to check for the presence of soft zones which may require over-
excavation and replacement. Compaction should achieve a minimum density of no less than
95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density as established in ASTM D-1557.
3. A qualified engineer or technician should be present during initial compaction operations to
check proper compactor performance and compaction procedures. The compaction should
be performed at a speed equivalent to that of a slow walking pace.
4. Density tests should be used to control subgrade compaction. At least one (1) density test
should be performed for every 2,500 ft.Z at the surface of compaction and at a depth of 12
inches.
5. The excavated footing areas shall be compacted with a hand-guided vibratory compactor
having a minimum plate width of 24 inches or the footing width whichever is less. No fewer
than ten (10) coverages shall be effected. Compaction tests shall be conducted to check that
a density of not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density has been
maintained.
1
I
r
2
FILL OR BACKFILL PLACEMENT
1. Fill or backfill required to develop proposed grade should be inorganic, clean to slightly silty
fine sand, free ofunsuitable debris. Soils with a Unified Soil Classification of SP to SP-SM
would certainly be considered suitable.
2. The fill should be placed in lift thicknesses not exceeding 12 inches with each lift compacted
to a density of no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Moisture
content within the fill soil should be controlled to within :E2% of optimum as established in
ASTM D-1557 to help ensure development of both density and stability during compaction
operations. No fewer than six (6) to eight (S) coverages should be made on each lift using
the above specified heavy, vibratory roller.
3. Density tests should also be used to control fill placement. At least one (1) density test
should be performed for each 2,500 ft.2 per fill lift.
4. Careful inspection and compaction tests should also be performed to confirm required
uniformity of compaction prior to slab-on-grade construction.
FOUNDATION DESIGN
1. Shallow foundations maybe designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000
pounds per square foot based upon dead plus live plus wind load requirements-
2. We recommend a footing embedment of no less than 16 inches below finished grade, but
excessive embedment should be avoided to take advantage of the surficial compaction.
3. Slab-on-grade construction may be utilized. To maintain slab support, excavation for
utilities and foundations should be backfilled and compacted in lifts with a small compactor.
Before backfill is placed, all water and loose debris should be removed from the excavations.
4. A bearing wall footing width of no less than 16 inches and column width of no less than 3
feet is also recommended.
1
1
1
1
ld
PLATE I BORING LOCATION PLAN
1
r
i
1
Origgers Engineering Services Incorporated
1
N
9
z
?
a I i
-N i 5 T? ? ti ? rf. ?
L ft ...._;w 16 s p
1
ill -4
-
A' _. IT??
P 11
?II I I II
.. { i
. 1.. I
t (
1?
?
•`•II
?i
1 ji i
I.
i IIII, •`ri ?yo ,
I 'I: S'Ai ?
t
I
-??; ?t?4s?- --i.. __? ?LL?9 ?"-?? 1 :p
LFli ` _. '
I
' I
I '
i
ly
III C- y
q
t
o
ts,
u...L.. .-?...?..-4?.....
`.?w..-:..?
' .
it
x l
.
_
_ +
eMs
_
' ? ? :fir; ! - _ . ?. -'??T--•-- =- `
- -- - ? ??
• T
r
F1 x !1 i Iy?' r gg
l11 e..Ja, t4 IB 73 _
Y zR
p -3
p3 f?6Pg $e'a2 a6 ca t?q E Rr? a
CAD ENGINEER SHEET TITLE PROJECT NO.
R.D.B. / W.S.D. BORING LOCATION PLAN DES 056173
PREPARED BY PROJECT NAME SHEET NO,
I PRESSBO & CONCESSION STAND
JOE DIMAGC40 SPORTS COMPLEX
PLATE I
ORIGGERS ENGINEERING
a CLEARWATER FLORIDA
1
1
fl
1
F]
1
1
t
5
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SP-f) BORING LOGS
n
11
1
1
1
Qriggers Engineering Services Incorporated
e ?
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 ' BORING NO. SBA
Project P ressbox/Con cession Stand, Joe DiMa io S its Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R.
Completion Depth To
Depth 46.3' Date 7/29/10 Water 6.5' Time Date 7/29/10
z w M STANDARD
0
° co
J
SOIL DESCRIPTION ° a N
rn Of z PENETRATION TEST
"
CL w w BLOWS/FT. ON 2
O.D.
fL IL
o a SAMPLER-140 LB_
LU U) m m q O HAMMER, 30" DROP
SURF. EL: to 11) ?n An Rn Rn
0 : 1= Dark brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
Dark brown Fine SAND SP
r n Q: Dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM)
Dark grayish-brown slightly silty Fine SAND
5 "` F = SP-SM
cnzx
to rr.
r Medium dense dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND
with finel
divided or
anic material (SP-SM)
3/5/8
; y
g
F1 ' Loose grayish-brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
3/4/6
10 3 :,: Medium dense brown slightly silty Fine SAND
6/817
(SP-SM)
Firm green CLAY (CH) 1/3/4
Soft green sandy CLAY (CH)
15
WH/2/2
o Soft green CLAY with wood and metal fragments
(CH)
20 2/1/2
Firm to soft green to light green CLAY (CH)
25
2/4/3
30
1/2/2
Hard green cemented CLAY (CL)
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH Weight of Hammer Casing Length 20.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SBA
Project Presshox/Concession Stand, Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R.
Completion Depth To
Depth 46.3' Date 7/29/10 Water 6.5' Time Date 7/29/10
F L STANDARD
?- 0 w
SOIL DESCRIPTION 0
w PENETRATION TEST
"
a w BLOWS/FT. ON 2
D.D.
W d On. SAMPLER-140 LB.
p co cn m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP
SURF. EL: to In 2n an en stn
Hard green cemented CLAY (CL)
35 8/14/31
5'
ti
f
d
h 39
40 -100% loss o
on at
ept
.
circula 81211
Cream colored weathered LIMESTONE
Cream colored clayey LIMESTONE
45
8/12/50'
" 0.3' P
enetrati
on
so
55
60
I t -1 1
65
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 20.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-2
Project PressboxIConcession Stand, Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex, Clearwater, FL _
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R-
Completion Depth To
Depth 50.2' Date 7/29/10 Water 6.5' Time Date 7/29/10
F w ? STANDARD
`J
° w
501E DESCRIPTION 0 a PENETRATION TEST
F m a W W BLOWSIFT_ ON 2" O.D.
O 0-q' SAMPLER-140 LB.
n m d p HAMMER, 30" DROP
SURF. EL: in In lyn do AA Rn
Dark brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
a'; cb Dark brown Fine SAND with some limestone
a? fragments (SP)
Brown Fine SAND with concrete fragments (SP)
Brown Fine SAND with rock and concrete
fragments and filter fabric SP
Brown Fine SAND with concrete fragments
SP
Dark brown sli
htl
or
anic
silt
Fine SAND 3/6/6
y
g
g
,
y
SM
Medium dense dark brownish-gray 3/414
sli htl sil Fine SAND SP-SM
10
i [i1c?t Loose light brown and brown Fine SAND SP
212/2
Very loose light brown and brown
sli htl sil Fine SAND SP-SM
Loose greenish-gray clayey Fine SAND 2/3/3
- with seams of brown silty Fine SAND (SC/SM)
15 Very soft green CLAY with metal fragments
and pockets of dark gray silty,
D
CH
SMSC
WH/1/1
(
/
)
clayey Fine SAN
P
o A - 60% loss of circulation at depth 18.0'
2 ft
CLAY
0 green
Very so
glass and metal debris (CH)
with wood WH/110
Q ,
o P
Very soft to soft light green CLAY (CH)
25
1/111
30
1/212
- 90% loss of circulation at depth 33.0'
Very stiff light-green variably cemented (1)
Remarks Borehole Grouted (1) CLAY (CL)
WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 28.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-2
Project Pressbox/Concession Stand Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R-
Completion Depth To
Depth 50.2' Date 7/29/10 Water 6.5' Time Date 7129/10
Z w STANDARD
0 ? O a PENETRATION TEST
= m 501E DESCRIPTION N U) cc 2E
w w BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
IL 0C SAMPLER-'140 LB.
p U) m a; 0:
O HAMMER, 30" DROP
1.911RF- In 9n An nn Rn
Very stiff light green variably cemented CLAY
35 (CL) 3/5/10 16
40
10/8/8
Cream colored weathered LIMESTONE
45
11/4/1
- 100% loss of circulation at depth 48.0'
Cream colored LIMESTONE
50 ,. ' 0
2' P enetrati on
50 .
55
60
65
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length
28.0'
N[W I I W1 M
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING
SERVICES INCORRORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-3
Project Pressbox/Concession Stand, Joe DiMaggio Sports Comp
le
x, Clearwater, FL
_
_
Location See Plate I Foreman J, R,
Completion Depth To
Depth 56.5' Date 7130/10 Water 6.6' Time Date 7/30110
LL
a
a-
0
M
N
OIL DESCRIPTION
URF. EL: 2 to
AD-
W
LU wa
0 (
M Q O
Cn to STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" Q.D.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
0 , ; 5'-"' Light brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
Light brown Fine SAND (SP)
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
5
Dark brown and brown Fine SAND (SP)
Loose to medium dense brown Fine SAND (SP) 4/4/6
6/7/7
10
VIZ Medium dense to very loose-dark gray Fine SAND
4/6/7
with finely divided organic material (SP)
nY? trace of roots at depth 12.0' 1/1/2
15 =.. Medium dense light gray Fine SAND
i with trace of roots (SP)
4/6/5
r _
Medium dense brown Fine SAND (SP)
20
2/5/7
Stiff gray sandy CLAY (CH)
25
515/5
Firm to soft light green CLAY (CH)
30
2/2/3
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 25.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-3
Project Pressbox/Concession StandJoe DiMag9 Sports Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R-
Completion Depth To
Depth 56.5' Date 7/30/10 Water 6.8' Time Date 7130/10
W Fes- STANDARD
ii 0 O W O PENETRATION TEST
-1 . SOIL DESCRIPTION a z
ul w BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
a 00- SAMPLER-140 LB.
W N c4 i ¢ p HAMMER, 30" DROP
ClIPF F1 - W 4n in nn rn an
Firm to soft light green CLAY (CH)
35 2/2%2
Very loose light greenish-gray clayey Fine SAND
(SC)
40
1/2/2
Very stiff dark green CLAY
with seams of LIMESTONE (CL)
45
19/8/9
Very loose green and gray silty,
clayey Fine SAND (SM-SC)
50 WH/WH/
WH
Cream colored clayey LIMESTONE
55
35/7/7
60
65
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH =Weight of Hammer Casing Length 25.0'
Q
DRIGGERS
ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-4
Project Pressbox/Concession Stand, Joe DiMag, iooSSp-orts Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R.
Completion DT h To
Depth 46.2' Date 7/30/10 Water 8.6' Time Date 7/30110
F-
r`-
a_
o
m
>- co
q
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL:
U
z
W W
o a
Q O
N in STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
0 a= +=
r Dark brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
Brown Fine SAND with shell fragments SP
5 Dark bro
Fi
e SAND SP
wn
n
Dark brown or anic sil Fine SAND SM/Pt
Medium dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) 615/8
Medium dense brownish-gray Fine SAND 8/12/13
with pockets of clayey Fine SAND (SP/SC)
10 = Medium dense brown to dark brownish-gray
8/12/16
Fine SAND (SP)
5/8/13
15 Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND
with pockets of gray CLAY (SP/CH)
3/5/6
Medium dense brown silty,
20 slightly clayey Fine SAND (SM)
6/10/10
Firm green CLAY (CH)
25
2/2/3
30
2/2/3
I.X Loose greenish-gray clayey Fine SAND (SC)
I I
L
l
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length 25.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORRORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-4
Project Pressbox/Concession Stand Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex, Clearwater, FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J-R-
Completion Depth To
Depth 46.2' Date 7/30/10 Water 8.6' Time Date 7/30/10
uF-
w
p
0
tmii
-J
a-
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL: z w
D p'
w w
p 0.
m ¢ O
C en STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" Q.D.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length 25.0'
- -- Loose greenish-gray clayey twine SAND (SC)
35 -- 213/2
I
40 - Cream colored LIMESTONE= 50* * 0,5'P enetration
Cream colored clayey LIMESTONE
45 12/1$/50" * 0.2' P enetration
5p
55
60
65
N
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-5
Project Pressbox/CDncession Stand, J_o_e_ DiMaggio Sports Complex, Clearwater FL
i
Location See Plate I Foreman J. R.
Completion Depth To
Depth 45.2' Date 7130/10 Water 83' Time Date 7/30/10
x
W
A 3 N
d
¢
SOIL DESCRIPTION
URF. EL: z U
O
w W
O 0- 12.
M Q O STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
0 Dark brown Fine SAND with roots (SP)
Brown Fine SAND SP
Dark brown Fine SAND (SP)
.41'o Brown Fine SAND with concrete fragments (SP)
d ..
5 ": Li ht brawn Fine SAND SP
?M}:r Dark brown slightly organic, slightly silty
Fi
SAN
SM 314/3
ne
D SP-
Loose dark gra
slightly silty Fine SAND
y
with fine) divided organic material SP-SM 7/8/8
10 Medium dense to very loose light brown Fine SAND
(SP)
3/2/2
IT0r?; Very loose brown slightly silty Fine SAND f/UHNVH/1
H;I,_ (SP-SM)
15 Medium dense gray Fine SAND (SP)
6/7/10
Medium dense gray silty,
20 slightly clayey Fine SAND (SM)
6/9/9
Soft to firm light green CLAY (CH)
25
2!3/3
30
1/2/2
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 20.0'
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORRORATED
Project No. DES 086173 BORING NO. SB-5
Project Pressbox/Concession Stand Jae DiMa io Sports Com lex Clearwater FL
Location See Plate I Foreman J.R.
Completion Depth To
Depth 45.2' Date 7/30/10 Water 8.3' Time Date . 7/30/10
LL w H
O d y STANDARD
O W
SOIL DESCRIPTION
v, ? z PENETRATION TEST
M- a w w
O BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
w
N ¢ n. CL SAMPLER-140 LB.
"
o M Q 0 HAMMER, 30
DROP
SURF. EL:
Cl) in
In 7n An an un
Soft to firm light green CLAY (CH)
35 2/3/4
40 Cream colored clayey LIMESTONE 23/50* " 0.3' Penetration
Cream colored LIMESTONE -
'
45 50• 0.2
Penetration
50
55
60
5
6
Remarks Borehole Grouted
WH M Weight of Hammer _ Casing Length
20.0'
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
E-W
O
0
d
w
O
d
E
W E
a
Q
C E
v,
E
x
G
ui
z
0
V
0. c
F.
?
w
a
? 1 N
4
]
a ?
r
U
a?
}a
3
A
e
E ? c
v { E is K H
Vj
(a7 ?,. F F m ? ?`
?' an m w ? O ?: {ti
. - `
? A
? V A ci n
e0.i " d ' d ? o 0
cu -
eV
w Q ? m
p z w m v
i
p
v
O
L
m
F
U
U
d y
? R
h a
O ?
? O
0.
w C ?
3 ?j o
a
p ? c
o C]
U a ° Q
F-
U R. W
U ?
N
E
o h
b q
T q
'S N
°
z
u
O C G b ? ? ? C
_
v V U V e
u u n n n u n u
Y
a n a o
? a
a
G ?
O a
U C7
U
P
G OR
m
'3 A uj
u u u u n n p u
V
e v v
r? r C7 .a] Ca., vai 0. ]
1
GRAXNSIZE ANALYSIS
. Services Incorporated
Ori99ers Engineering
Cy]
i
W
U
7
Q
W
z
m
W
W
,Z
V
Z
W
N
It
IWU
V
a
1 42ia M A q ps iecD iua »ad
0
? x
b?
I
? E
0
G U
O
N ?
v C 0
$ V
?
G
} 3 C to ?-
i O L?
? V ri w
w
U ? rn ? M
` U O d
^
0
p r
x m +?
?
o o N +
- 3 co
e
(q T ur N
V W m ? V1
L o W
V a "] C? 4
- r
H U
W ?-J W
O J
? J
o d
U Ik
?
S I " o
8 ? ;
? w o
if
y C
¢
x
w
c ?
S? p ? N
N! q q
R A E
2 v
? ,?
a
N ?
a
0
? m
0
U
?
J
4
O
J
J
w
N
J
Lij
Ir O
t 2
5
N ?
D ?
J ? A t d i
N
$ 9 , ?j R p
. . UOR M A q Jv ulj ?
lua]J Pd 8
N
r7
1-.J
I
F]
t
1
1
1
1
METHOD OF TESTING
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
STANDARD PENETRATION 'VEST
WITH AUTOMATIC HAMMER
AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION
140 LB.
HAMMER
30' FALL
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM P-!586
1
In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is
used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth- A viscous
drilling fluid is circulated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the
borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out
of the borehole-
Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O_D. split-barrel
sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called, is attached to an N-
sue drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 140 pound
automatic hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surface, is
then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is
successively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using an
automated lifting mechanism. The number of blows is recorded for
each 6 inch interval of penetration or until virtual refusal is achieved.
In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18
inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of
penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value
of the particular material at the sample depth.
SPLIT BARREL SAMPLER After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground
surface where the core sample is removed, sealed in a glass jar and
transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and
storage-
WATER TABLE
FINE SAND = SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
4 "N" VALUE OR
5 BLOW COUNT Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were
MUCK visually classified as to texture, color and consistency. Soil
7 classifications are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of
21 interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the
SILTY FINE SAND approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this
transition may be gradual.
CLAYEY FINE SAND
Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear
SHELBY TUBE strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration
a- resistance values of "N" values and industry-accepted standards. "N"
SANDY CLAY values, or blowcounts, are presented in both tabular and graphical form
STRATUM on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical
CLAY CHANGE plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and
does not warrant continuity in soil consistency or linear variation
between sample intervals.
50/0.3' The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring
LIMESTONE locations and sample intervals only. Variations in subsurface
DENOTES conditions may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths
CORE RUN 50 BLOWS FOR shown represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The
0.3' PENETRATION absence of water table information does not necessarily imply that
groundwater was not encountered.
1
1
1
Southwest Florida 2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899
Water Managem ent District (352) 796-7211 or 1-800-423-1476 (FL only)
7DD only. 1-800.231-6103 (FL only)
On the Internet at WaterMatters.org
An Equal Bartow Service Office Sarasota Service Office Tampa Service Office
pO tw b
m
l
er 170 Century Boulevard 6750 Fruitville Road 7601 Highway 301 North
p
q Bartow, Florida 33830-7700 Sarasota, Florida 34240-9711 Tampa, Florida 33637-6159
(863) 534.1448 or (941) 377-3722 or (813) 985.7481 or
1.800-492-7862 (FL only) 1.800-320.3503 (FL only) 1-800-836-0797 (FL only)
Ronald E Oakley
Chair, Pasco
Hugh M. Gramling
vice Chair, Hillsborough
H. Paul Senft, Jr.
Secretary, Polk
Douglas IL Tharp
Treasurer, Sumter
Plea Courbee
Former Chair, Polk
Todd Pressman
Former Chair, Pinellas
Judith C. Whitehead
Former Chair, Hernando
Jeffrey M. Adams
Pinellas
Carlos Berrff
Manatee
Bryan K. Beswick
DeSoto
Jennifer E. Closshey
Hillsborough
Albert G.Joerger
Sarasota
MarNza Rovlra-Forhro
Hillsborough
David L Moore
Executive Director
William S, Bekarky
General Counsel
r-,
I
?J
Wad ?.
October 13, 2010
Leroy Chin
City of Clearwater Parks Department
100 South Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
Subject: Final Agency Action Transmittal Letter
ERP General Construction
Permit No.: 44033641.001/638439
Project Name: City of Clearwater - Joe DiMaggio Sports
Complex-Soccer Field
County: Pinellas
SecfTwp/Rge: 07/29S/16E
Dear Mr. Chin:
This letter constitutes notice of Final Agency Action for approval of the permit referenced
above. Final approval is contingent upon no objection to the District's action being
received by the District within the time frames described below.
You or any person whose substantial interests are affected by the District's action
regarding a permit may request an administrative hearing in accordance with Sections
120.569 and 120.57, Florida Statutes, (F.S.), and Chapter 28-106, Florida Administrative
Code, (F-A-C.), of the Uniform Rules of Procedure. A request for hearing must: (9)
explain how the substantial interests of each person requesting the hearing will be
affected by the District's action, or proposed action, (2) state all material facts disputed
by the person requesting the hearing or state that there are no disputed facts, and (3)
otherwise comply with Chapter 28-906, F.A.C. Copies of Sections 28-106.201 and
28-106.301, F.A.C. are enclosed for your reference. A request for hearing must be filed
with (received by) the Agency Clerk of the District at the District's Brooksville address
within 21 days of receipt of this notice. Receipt is deemed to be the fifth day after the
date on which this notice is deposited in the United States mail. Failure to file a request
for hearing within this time period shall constitute a waiver of any right you or such person
may have to request a hearing under Sections 120.569 and 120.57, F.S- Mediation
pursuant to Section 120.573, F,S., to settle an administrative dispute regarding the
District's action in this matter is not available prior to the filing of a request for hearing-
Enclosed is a "Noticing Packet" that provides information regarding the District Rule
40D-1.1010, F.A.C., which addresses the notification of persons whose substantial
interests may be affected by the District's action in this matter. The packet contains
guidelines on how to provide notice of the District's action, and a notice that you may use.
The enclosed approved construction plans are part of the permit, and construction must
be in accordance with these plans.
Permit No.: 44033641.0011638439 Page 3 of 3 October 13, 2010
If you have questions concerning the permit, please contact Scott S. Nickerson, P.E_, at the Tampa Service Office,
extension 2033, For assistance with environmental concerns, please contact William M. Copeland, extension
2029.
Sincerely,
Alba E. Mas, P.E., Director
Tampa Regulation Department
AEM:SSH:WMC:gjn
Enclosures: Approved Permit w/Conditions Attached
Approved Construction Drawings
Statement of Completion
Notice of Authorization to Commence Construction
Noticing Packet (42,00-039)
Sections 28-106.201 and 28-106.301, F.A.C.
cc/enc: File of Record 44033641.001/638439
Brian A_ Barker, P.E., Deuel & Associates
' SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT
ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCE
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MODIFICATION
PERMIT NO. 44033641.001/638439
t
1
E Expiration Date: October 13, 2015 PERMIT ISSUE DATE: October 13, 2010
This permit is issued under the provisions of Chapter 373, Florida Statutes, (F_S.), and the Rules
contained in Chapters 40D-4 and 40, Florida Administrative Code, (F.A.C.). The permit authorizes the
Permittee to proceed with the construction of a surface water management system in accordance with the
information outlined herein and shown by the application, approved drawings, plans, specifications, and
other documents, attached hereto and kept on file at the Southwest Florida Water Management District
(District). Unless otherwise stated by permit specific condition, permit issuance constitutes certification of
compliance with state water quality standards under Section 401 of the Clean Water Act, 33 U_S_C. 1341.
All construction, operation and maintenance of the surface water management system authorized by this
permit shall occur in compliance with Florida Statutes and Administrative Code and the conditions of this
permit.
I PROJECT NAME: City of Clearwater - Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex-Soccer Field
GRANTED TO: City of Clearwater Parks Department
100 South Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
ABSTRACT: This permit authorization is for the modification of a previously permitted surface water
management system serving a soccer field project. The modifications include two buildings and
replacement outfall structures for the pond. The project is located on the northwest corner of Drew Street
and Old Coachman Road in the City of Clearwater. As authorized previously under Environmental
' Resource Permit (ERP) No. 44033641.000, the field itself is designed to function as the pond. It is
designed to provide attenuation and water quality treatment by effluent filtration. The tracking conditions
for Operation and Maintenance Inspections are to remain under ERP No. 44033641.000.
OP. & MAINT. ENTITY: City of Clearwater Parks Department
COUNTY: Pinellas
SEC/TWP/RGE: 07/29S/16E
TOTAL ACRES OWNED
OR UNDER CONTROL: 20.00
'
PROJECT SIZE, 0.63 Acre
LAND USE: Government
DATE APPLICATION FILED: August 24, 2010
AMENDED DATE: October 5, 2010
1
1.1
Permit No.: 44033641.001/638439
Page 3 of 4
October 13, 2010 1
Water Quantity/Quality
No modifications are to be made to the existing pond; however, the existing outfall structure is to
be replaced by two new outfall structures as shown on the plans. The combined weir length is to
be the same as the previously permitted outfall structure. The existing field is designed to function
as the pond. It is designed to provide attenuation and water quality treatment by effluent filtration.
The tracking conditions for Operation and Maintenance Inspections are to remain under ERP
Permit No. 44033641.000.
A mixing zone is not required.
A variance is not required.
100-Year Floodplain
Encroachment
(Acre-f=eet of fill) Compensation
(Acre-Feet of excavation) Compensation
Type Encroachment
Result (feet)
0.00 0.00 N/A N/A
Environmental Considerations
No wetlands or other surface waters exist within the project area.
SPECIFIC CONDITIONS
1. If the ownership of the project area covered by the subject permit is divided, with someone other
than the Permittee becoming the owner of part of the project area, this permit shall terminate,
pursuant to Section 40D-1.6105, F.A.C. In such situations, each land owner shall obtain a permit
(which may be a modification of this permit) for the land owned by that person. This condition shall
not apply to the division and sale of lots or units in residential subdivisions or condominiums.
2. Unless specified otherwise herein, two copies of all information and reports required by this permit
shall be submitted to:
Tampa Regulation Department
Southwest Florida Water Management District
7601 U.S. Highway 301 North
Tampa, FL 33637-6759
The permit number, title of report or information and event (for recurring report or information
submittal) shall be identified on all information and reports submitted.
The Permittee shall retain the design engineer, or other professional engineer registered in
Florida, to conduct on-site observations of construction and assist with the as-built certification
requirements of this project. The Permittee shall inform the District in writing of the name, address
and phone number of the professional engineer so employed. This information shall be submitted
prior to construction.
4, Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the Permittee shall submit
to the Tampa Service Office a written statement of completion and certification by a registered
professional engineer or other appropriate individual as authorized by law, utilizing the required
Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity form identified in Chapter
40D-1.659, F.A.C., and signed, dated and sealed as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall
identify any deviations from the approved construction drawings.
11
1
1
1
t
1
Permit No.: 44033641.001/638439 Page 4 of 4
October 13, 2010
5. -The District reserves the right, upon prior notice to the Permittee, to conduct on-site research to
assess the pollutant removal efficiency of the surface water management system. The Permittee
may be required to cooperate in this regard by allowing on-site access by District representatives,
by allowing the installation and operation of testing and monitoring equipment, and by allowing
other assistance measures as needed on site.
6. This modification, Construction Permit No. 44033641.001/638439, amends the previously issued
Construction Permit No. 44033641.000, and adds conditions, All other original permit conditions
remain in effect.
7. If limestone bedrock is encountered during construction of the surface water management
system, the District must be notified and construction in the affected area shall cease.
8. The Permittee shall notify the District of any sinkhole development in the surface water
management system within 48 hours of discovery and must submit a detailed sinkhole evaluation
and repair plan for approval by the District within 30 days of discovery.
9. The District, upon prior notice to the Permittee, may conduct on-site inspections to assess the
effectiveness of the erosion control barriers and other measures employed to prevent violations of
state water quality standards and avoid downstream impacts. Such barriers or other measures
should control discharges, erosion, and sediment transport during construction and thereafter.
The District will also determine any potential environmental problems that may develop as a result
of leaving or removing the barriers and other measures during construction or after construction of
the project has been completed. The Permittee must provide any remedial measures that are
needed.
10. This permit is issued based upon the design prepared by the Permittee's consultant. If at any
time it is determined by the District that the Conditions for Issuance of Permits in Rules 40D-4.301
and 40D-4.302, F.A.C., have not been met, upon written notice by the District, the Permittee shall
obtain a permit modification and perform any construction necessary thereunder to correct any
deficiencies in the system design or construction to meet District rule criteria. The Permittee is
advised that the correction of deficiencies may require re-construction of the surface water
management system and/or mitigation areas.
GENERAL. CONDITIONS
The general conditions attached hereto as Exhibit "A" are hereby incorporated into this permit by
reference and the Permittee shall comply with them.
Authorized Signature
1
EXHIBIT "A"
'
1. All activities shall be implemented as set forth in the plans, specifications and performance criteria as approved by
this permit. Any deviation from the permitted activity and the conditions for undertaking that activity shall constitute
a violation of this permit.
2. This permit or a copy thereof, complete with all conditions, attachments, exhibits, and modifications, shall be kept
at the work site of the permitted activity. The complete permit shall be available for review at the work site upon
request by District staff. The permittee shall require the contractor to review the complete permit prior to
commencement of the activity authorized by this permit.
3. For general permits authorizing incidental site activities, the following limiting general conditions shall also apply:
a. If the decision to issue the associated individual permit is not final within 90 days of issuance of the
incidental site activities permit, the site must be restored by the permittee within 90 days after notification
' by the District. Restoration must be completed by re-contouring the disturbed site to previous grades and
slopes re-establishing and maintaining suitable vegetation and erosion control to provide stabilized
hydraulic conditions. The period for completing restoration may be extended if requested by the permittee
and determined by the District to be warranted due to adverse weather conditions or other good cause. In
' addition, the permittee shall institute stabilization measures for erosion and sediment control as soon as
practicable, but in no case more than 7 days after notification by the District.
b. The incidental site activities are commenced at the permittee's own risk. The Governing Board will not
consider the monetary costs associated with the incidental site activities or any potential restoration costs
' in making its decision to approve or deny the individual environmental resource permit application.
Issuance of this permit shall not in anyway be construed as commitment to issue the associated individual
environmental resource permit.
' 4. Activities approved by this permit shall be conducted in a manner which does not cause violations of state water
quality standards. The permittee shall implement best management practices for erosion and a pollution control to
prevent violation of state water quality standards. Temporary erosion control shall be implemented prior to and
' during construction, and permanent control measures shall be completed within 7 days of any construction activity.
Turbidity barriers shall be installed and maintained at all locations where the possibility of transferring suspended
solids into the receiving waterbody exists due to the permitted work. Turbidity barriers shall remain in place at all
locations until construction is completed and soils are stabilized and vegetation has been established. Thereafter
the permittee shall be responsible for the removal of the barriers. The permittee shall correct any erosion or
shoaling that causes adverse impacts to the water resources.
' 5. Water quality data for the water discharged from the permittee's property or into the surface waters of the state
shall be submitted to the District as required by the permit. Analyses shall be performed according to procedures
outlined in the current edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater by the American
Public Health Association or Methods for Chemical Analyses of Water and Wastes by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. If water quality data are required, the permittee shall provide data as required on volumes of
water discharged, including total volume discharged during the days of sampling and total monthly volume dis-
charged from the property or into surface waters of the state.
ERP General Conditions
Individual (Construction, Conceptual, Mitigation Banks), General,
Incidental Site Activities, Minor Systems
' Page 1 of 3
41.00-023{03104)
1
6. District staff must be notified in advance of any proposed construction dewatering. If the dewatering activity is
likely to result in offsite discharge or sediment transport into wetlands or surface waters, a written dewatering plan
must either have been submitted and approved with the permit application or submitted to the District as a permit
prior to the dewatering event as a permit modification. A water use permit may be required prior to any use
exceeding the thresholds in Chapter 40D-2, F.A.C.
7. Stabilization measures shall be initiated for erosion and sediment control on disturbed areas as soon as
practicable in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased, but in no
case more than 7 days after the construction activity in that portion of the site has temporarily or permanently
ceased.
8. Off-site discharges during construction and development shall be made only through the facilities authorized by
this permit. Water discharged from the project shall be through structures having a mechanism suitable for
regulating upstream stages. Stages may be subject to operating schedules satisfactory to the District.
9. The.permittee shall complete construction of all aspects of the surface water management system, including
wetland compensation (grading, mulching, planting), water quality treatment features, and discharge control
facilities prior to beneficial occupancy or use of the development being served by this system.
10. The following shall be properly abandoned and/or removed in accordance with the applicable regulations:
a. Any existing wells in the path of construction shall be properly plugged and abandoned by a licensed well
contractor,
b. Any existing septic tanks on site shall be abandoned at the beginning of construction.
C. Any existing fuel storage tanks and fuel pumps shall be removed at the beginning of construction.
11. All surface water management systems shall be operated to conserve water in order to maintain environmental
quality and resource protection; to increase the efficiency of transport, application and use; to decrease waste; to
minimize unnatural runoff from the property and to minimize dewatering of offsite property.
12. At least 48 hours prior to commencement of activity authorized by this permit, the permittee shall submit to the
District a written notification of commencement indicating the actual start date and the expected completion date.
13. Each phase or independent portion of the permitted system must be completed in accordance with the permitted
plans and permit conditions prior to the occupation of the site or operation of site infrastructure located within the
area served by that portion or phase of the system. Each phase or independent portion of the system must be
completed in accordance with the permitted plans and permit conditions prior to transfer of responsibility for
operation and maintenance of that phase or portion of the system to a local government or other responsible entity.
14. Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the permittee shall submit a written
statement of completion and certification by a registered professional engineer or other appropriate individual as
authorized by law, utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity form
identified in Chapter 4013-1, F.A.C. Additionally, if deviation from the approved drawings are discovered during the
certification process the certification must be accompanied by a copy of the approved permit drawings with
deviations noted.
ERP General Conditions
Individual (Construction, Conceptual, Mitigation Banks), General,
Incidental Site Activities, Minor Systems
Page 2 of 3
41.00-023{03104)
1
1
15. This permit is valid only for the specific processes, operations and designs indicated on the approved drawings or
exhibits submitted in support of the permit application. Any substantial deviation from the approved drawings,
exhibits, specifications or permit conditions, including construction within the total land area but outside the
approved project area(s), may constitute grounds for revocation or enforcement action by the District, unless a
modification has been applied for and approved. Examples of substantial deviations include excavation of ponds,
ditches or sump areas deeper than shown on the approved plans.
16. The operation phase of this permit shall not become effective until the permittee has complied with the
requirements of the conditions herein, the District determines the system to be in compliance with the permitted
plans, and the entity approved by the District accepts responsibility for operation and maintenance of the system.
The permit may not be transferred to the operation and maintenance entity approved by the District until the
operation phase of the permit becomes effective. Following inspection and approval of the permitted system by
the District, the permittee shall request transfer of the permit to the responsible operation and maintenance entity
approved by the District, if different from the permittee. Until a transfer is approved by the District, the permittee
shall be liable for compliance with the terms of the permit.
17. Should any other regulatory agency require changes to the permitted system, the District shall be notified of the
changes prior to implementation so that a determination can be made whether a permit modification is required.
18. This permit does not eliminate the necessity to obtain any required federal, state, local and special District
authorizations including a determination of the proposed activities' compliance with the applicable comprehensive
' plan prior to the start of any activity approved by this permit.
19. This permit does not convey to the permittee or create in the permittee any property right, or any interest in real
property, nor does it authorize any entrance upon or activities on property which is not owned or controlled by the
permittee, or convey any rights or privileges other than those specified in the permit and Chapter 40D-4 or Chapter
40D-40, F.A.C.
' 20. The permittee shall hold and save the District harmless from any and all damages, claims, or liabilities which may
arise by reason of the activities authorized by the permit or any use of the permitted system.
21. Any delineation of the extent of a wetland or other surface water submitted as part of the permit application,
including plans or other supporting documentation, shall not be considered binding unless a specific condition of
this permit or a formal determination under section 373.421(2), F.S., provides otherwise.
22. The permittee shall notify the District in writing within 30 days of any sale, conveyance, or other transfer of
ownership or control of the permitted system or the real property at which the permitted system is located. All
transfers of ownership or transfers of a permit are subject to the requirements of Rule 40D-4.351, F.A.C. The
permittee transferring the permit shall remain liable for any corrective actions that may be required as a result of
1 any permit violations prior to such sale, conveyance or other transfer.
23. Upon reasonable notice to the permittee, District authorized staff with proper identification shall have permission to
enter, inspect, sample and test the system to insure conformity with District rules, regulations and conditions of the
permits.
24. If historical or archaeological artifacts are discovered at any time on the project site, the permittee shall
immediately notify the District and the Florida Department of State, Division of Historical Resources.
25. The permittee shall immediately notify the District in writing of any previously submitted information that is later
discovered to be inaccurate.
' ERP General Conditions
Individual (Construction, Conceptual, Mitigation Banks), General,
Incidental Site Activities, Minor Systems
Page 3 of 3
00-023(03/04)
41
.
Southwest Florida
- Water Management District
An Equal Bartow Service Office Lecando Service Office
ooponu"m
Em
l
f 170 Century Boulevard Suite 226
p
ge Barlow, Florida 338307700 3600 West Sovereign Path
(863) 5341448 or Lecanto, Florida 34461.8070
1-800492.7862 (FL only) (352) 527-8131
SUNCOM 572.6200
Judith C. Whitehead
Chair, Hernando
Neil Combee
Vice Chair, Polk
Todd Pressman
Secretary, Pinellas
Jennifer E. Closshey
Treasurer, Hillsborough
Thomas G. Dabney
Sarasota
Patricia M. Glass
Manatee
Heidi B. McCree
Hillsborough
Sallie Parks
Pinellas
Talmadge G. "Jerry" Rice
Pasco
Maritza Rovira-Forino
Hillsborough
Patsy C. Symons
Desoto
David L. Moore
Executive Director
William S. Bilenky
General Counsel
1
2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899
(352) 796-7211 or 1-800-423-1476 (FL only)
SUNCOM 628-4150 TDD only 1-800-231-6103 (FL only)
On the Internet at: WaterMatters.org
Sarasota Service Office
6750 Frultvllle Road
Sarasota, Florida 342409711
(941) 377-3722 or
1-8003203503 (FL only)
SUNCOM 531.6900
Tampa Service office
7601 Highway 301 North
Tampa, Florida 33637-6759
(813) 985.7481 or
1$00836.0797 (FL only)
SUNCOM 578-2070
NOTICING PACKET PUBLICATION INFORMATION
PLEASE SEE THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS NOTICE FOR A LIST OF
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ)
The District's action regarding the issuance or denial of a permit, a petition or qualification for
an exemption only becomes closed to future legal challenges from members of the public
("third parties"), if 1.) "third parties" have been properly notified of the District's action
regarding the permit or exemption, and 2.) no "third party" objects to the District's action
within a specific period of time following the notification.
Notification of "third parties" is provided through publication of certain information in a
newspaper of general circulation in the county or counties where the proposed activities are
to occur. Publication of notice informs "third parties" of their right to challenge the District's
action. If proper notice is provided by publication, "third parties" have a 21-day time limit in
which to file a petition opposing the District's action. A shorter 14-day time limit applies to
District action regarding Environmental Resource Permits linked with an authorization to use
Sovereign Submerged Lands. However, if no notice to "third parties" is published, there is no
time limit to a party's right to challenge the District's action. The District has not published a
notice to "third parties" that it has taken or intends to take final action on your application. If
you want to ensure that the period of time in which a petition opposing the District's action
regarding your application is limited to the time frames stated above, you may publish, at
your own expense, a notice in a newspaper of general circulation. A copy of the Notice of
Agency Action the District uses for publication and guidelines for publishing are included in
this packet.
Guidelines for Publishing a Notice of Agency Action
1. Prepare a notice for publication in the newspaper. The District's Notice of Agency
Action, included with this packet, contains all of the information that is required for
proper noticing. However, you are responsible for ensuring that the form and the
content of your notice comply with the applicable statutory provisions.
2. Your notice must be published in accordance with Chapter 50, Florida Statutes. A
copy of the statute is enclosed.
3. Select a newspaper that is appropriate considering the location of the activities
proposed in your application, and contact the newspaper for further information
regarding their procedures for publishing.
4. You only need to publish the notice for one day.
5. Obtain an "affidavit of publication" from the newspaper after your notice is published.
6. Immediately upon receipt send the ORIGINAL affidavit to the District at the address
below, for the file of record. Retain a copy of the affidavit for your records.
Southwest Florida Water Management District
Records and Data Supervisor
2379 Broad Street
Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899
Note: If you are advertising a notice of the District's proposed action, and the District's final
action is different, publication of an additional notice may be necessary to prevent future
legal challenges. If you need additional assistance, please contact us at ext. 4360, at the
Brooksville number listed above. (Your question may be on the FAQ list).
42.00-039 (Rev 06/07)
FAQ ABOUT NOTICING
Q. Do I have to do this noticing, and what is this notice for?
A. You do not have to do this noticing. You need to publish a notice if you want to ensure that a "third
party" cannot challenge the District's action on your permit, exemption, or petition at some future date. If
you choose not to publish, there is no time limit to a third party's right to challenge the District's action.
2. Q. What do I need to send to the newspaper?
A. The enclosed one page notice form entitled "Notice of Final Agency Action (or Proposed Agency
Action) By The Southwest Florida Water Management District." You must fill in the blanks before
sending it.
3. Q. Do I have to use the notice form, or can I make up my own form?
A. You .do not have to use our form. However, your notice must contain all information that is in the
form.
4. Q. Do I send the newspaper the whole form (one page) orjust the top portion that has blanks?
A. Send the full page form which includes the NOTICE OF RIGHTS section on the bottom half.
5. Q. Do I type or print the information in the blanks? Or will the newspaper fill in the blanks?
A. You are required to fill in the blanks on the form before sending it to the newspaper. Contact your
selected newspaper for instructions on printing or typing the information in the blanks.
6. Q. The section 50.051, F.S. (enclosed) proof of publication form of uniform affidavit has blanks in the
text. Do I fill in these blanks and send that to the newspaper?
A. No. That section shows the affidavit the newspaper will send you. They will fill in the blanks.
7. Q. If someone objects, is my permit or exemption no good?
A. If you publish a notice and a "third party" files a request for administrative hearing within the allotted
time, the matter is referred to an administrative hearing. While the case is pending, generally, you may
not proceed with activities under the challenged agency action. When the hearing is complete, the
administrative law judge's (ALJ) recommendation is returned to the District Governing Board, and the
Governing Board will take final action on the ALTs recommendation. There is no time limit for a "third
party" to object and file a request for administrative hearing if you do not publish a notice.
8. Q. I don't understand what I should put in the blanks on the Notice form?
A.
1. County, Section/Township/Range, application No., permit No., proposed permit No., petition
No., Exemption No., or permit inquiry No. is on your Permit, Petition, Exemption, or Denial
document.
2. Permit Type or Application Type is Environmental Resource Permit, Water Use Permit, Work of
the District, etc.
3. # of Acres is the project acres. This is listed on the Environmental Resource Permit documents.
For Water Use Permits, Exemptions, etc., you may put "Not Applicable" if unknown.
4. Rule or Statute reference (Exemptions only). The rule and/or statute reference is at the top of
page one in the reference line of the Exemption. For all others, put "Not Applicable" in this
blank.
5. Type of Project describes your project activity. Environmental Resource Permit = Agriculture,
Commercial, Government, Industrial, Mining, Road Projects, Residential, Semi-Public or Water
Quality Treatment. Water Use Permit = Agricultural (if irrigating, state that it is irrigation and
specify what is being irrigated), Industrial Commercial, Recreation Aesthetic, Mining Dewatering,
or Public Supply. Work of the District = pipeline, etc.
6. Project Name is the name of your project, if applicable. If there is no project name, put "Not
Applicable" in this blank.
42.00-039 (Rev 11106)
1
NOTICE OF FINAL AGENCY ACTION BY
THE SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT
Notice is given that the District's Final Agency Action is approval of the.
1 on .. acres to serve known as
The project is located i
Township
is
The permit No. is
1
County, Section(s
South, Ran
whose address
East. The permit applicant
The file(s) pertaining to the project referred to above is available for inspection Monday through
Friday except for legal holidays, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., at the Southwest Florida Water Manage-
ment District (District)
NOTICE OF RIGHTS
Any person whose substantial interests are affected by the District's action regarding this permit
may request an administrative hearing in accordance with Sections 120.569 and 120.57, Florida
Statutes (F.S.), and Chapter 28-106, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.), of the Uniform Rules of
Procedure. A request for hearing must (1) explain how the substantial interests of each person
requesting the hearing will be affected by the District's action, or final action; (2) state all material
facts disputed by each person requesting the hearing or state that there are no disputed facts;
and (3) otherwise comply with Chapter28-106, F.A.C. A request for hearing must be filed with
and received by the Agency Clerk of the District at the District's Brooksville address, 2379 Broad
Street, Brooksville, FL 34604-6899 within 21 days of publication of this notice (or within 14 days for
an Environmental Resource Permit with Proprietary Authorization for the use of Sovereign Sub-
merged Lands). Failure to file a request for hearing within this time period shall constitute a
waiver of any right such person may have to request a hearing under Sections 120.569 and
120.57, F.S.
Because the administrative hearing process is designed to formulate final agency action, the filing
of a petition means that the District's final action may be different from the position taken by it in
this notice of final agency action. Persons whose substantial interests will be affected by any
such final decision of the District on the application have the right to petition to become a party to
the proceeding, in accordance with the requirements set forth above.
Mediation pursuant to Section 120.573, FS., to settle an administrative dispute regarding the
District's final action in this matter is not available prior to the filing of a request for hearing.
42.00-039 (Rev 11/06)
1
1
CHAPTER 50, FLORIDA STATUTES
LEGAL AND OFFICIAL ADVERTISEMENTS
50.011 Where and in what language legal notices to be published.
50.021 Publication when no newspaper in county.
50.031 Newspapers in which legal notices and process may be published.
50.041 Proof of publication; uniform affidavits required.
50.051 Proof of publication; form of uniform affidavit.
50.061 Amounts chargeable.
50.071 Publication costs; court docket fund.
50.011 Where and in what language legal notices to be published.y
Whenever by statute an official or legal advertisement or a publication, or notice in a newspaper has been or is directed or permitted in
the nature of or in lieu of process, or for constructive service, or in initiating, assuming, reviewing, exercising or enforcing jurisdiction or
power, or for any purpose, including all legal notices and advertisements of sheriffs and tax collectors, the contemporaneous and continuous
intent and meaning of such legislation all and singular, existing or repealed, is and has been and is hereby declared to be and to have been,
and the rule of interpretation is and has been, a publication in a newspaper printed and published periodically once a week or oftener,
containing at least 25 percent of its words in the English language, entered or qualified to be admitted and entered as'second-class matter at
a post office in the county where published, for sale to the public generally, available to the public generally for the publication of official or
other notices and customarily containing information of a public character or of interest or of value to the residents or owners of property in
the county where published, or of interest or of value to the general public.
History.-s. 2, ch. 3022, 1877; RS 1296; GS 1727; s. 1, ch. 5610, 1907; RGS 2942; s. 1, ch. 12104, 1927; CGL 4666, 4901; s. 1, ch.
63-387; s. 6, ch. 67-254.
'Note.-Redesignated as "Periodicals" by the United States Postal Service, see 61 F.R. 10123-10124, March 12, 1996.
Note-Former s. 49.01.
50.021 Publication when no newspaper in county.-
When any law, or order or decree of court, shall direct advertisements to be made in any county and there be no newspaper published in
the said county, the advertisement may be made by posting three copies thereof in three different places in said county, one of which shall be
at the front door of the courthouse, and by publication in the nearest county in which a newspaper is published.
History.-RS 1297; GS 1728; RGS 2943; CGL 4667; s. 6, ch. 67-254.
Note.-Former s. 49.02.
50.031 Newspapers in which legal notices and process may be published.-
No notice or publication required to be published in a newspaper in the nature of or in lieu of process of any kind, nature, character or
description provided for under any law of the state, whether heretofore or hereafter enacted, and whether pertaining to constructive service,
or the initiating, assuming, reviewing, exercising or enforcing jurisdiction or power, by any court in this state, or any notice of sale of property,
real or personal, for taxes, state, county or municipal, or sheriffs, guardian's or administrator's or any sale made pursuant to any judicial
order, decree or statute or any other publication or notice pertaining to any affairs of the state, or any county, municipality or other political
subdivision thereof, shall be deemed to have been published in accordance with the statutes providing for such publication, unless the same
shall have been published for the prescribed period of time required for such publication, in a newspaper which at the time of such publication
shall have been in existence for 1 year and shall have been entered as 'second-class mail matter at a post office in the county where
published, or in a newspaper which is a direct successor of a newspaper which together have been so published; provided, however, that
nothing herein contained shall apply where in any county there shall be no newspaper in existence which shall have been published for the
length of time above prescribed. No legal publication of any kind, nature or description, as herein defined, shall be valid or binding or held to
be in compliance with the statutes providing for such publication unless the same shall have been published in accordance with the provisions
of this section. Proof of such publication shall be made by uniform affidavit.
History.-ss. 1-3, ch. 14830, 1931; CGL 1936 Supp. 4274(1); s. 7, ch. 22858, 1945; s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 74-221.
'Note.-Redesignated as "Periodicals" by the United States Postal Service, see 61 F. R. 10123-10124, March 12, 1996.
Note.YFormer s. 49.03.
50.041 Proof of publication; uniform affidavits required.-
(1) All affidavits of publishers of newspapers (or their official representatives) made for the purpose of establishing proof of publication of
public notices or legal advertisements shall be uniform throughout the state.
(2) Each such affidavit shall be printed upon white bond paper containing at least 25 percent rag material and shall be 81/2 inches in width
and of convenient length, not less than 51/2 inches. A white margin of not less than 21/2 inches shall be left at the right side of each affidavit
form and upon or in this space shall be substantially pasted a clipping which shall be a true copy of the public notice or legal advertisement for
which proof is executed.
(3) In all counties having a population in excess of 450,000 according to the latest official decennial census, in addition to the charges
which are now or may hereafter be established by law for the publication of every official notice or legal advertisement, there may be a charge
not to exceed $2 for the preparation and execution of each such proof of publication or publisher's affidavit.
History.#s. 1, ch. 19290,1939; CGL 1940 Supp. 4668(1); s.1, ch. 63-49; s. 26, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 76-58.
Note.YFormer s. 49.04.
50.051 Proof of publication; form of uniform affidaviLY
The printed form upon which all such affidavits establishing proof of publication are to be executed shall be substantially as follows:
4?_.00-039 (Rev 11106)
1-1
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
NAME OF NEWSPAPER
Published (Weekly or Daily)
(Town or City) (County) FLORIDA
Before the undersigned authority personally appeared , who on oath says that he or she is of the , a
newspaper published at in County Florida; that the attached copy of advertisement, being a in the
matter of in the Court, was published in said newspaper in the Issues of
Affiant further says that the said is a newspaper published at , in said County, Florida, and that the said
newspaper has heretofore been continuously published in said County, Florida, each and has been entered as
'second-class mail matter at the post office in in said County, Florida, for a period of 1 year next preceding the first
publication of the attached copy of advertisement; and affiant further says that he or she has neither paid nor promised any person, firm or
corporation any discount, rebate, commission or refund for the purpose of securing this advertisement for publication in the said newspaper.
Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 19-, by , who is personally known to me or who has
produced (type of identification) as identification.
-(Signature of Notary Public)-
-(Print, Type, or Stamp Commissioned Name of Notary Public)
(Notary Public)_
History: s. 2, ch. 19290, 1939; CGL 1940 Supp. 4668(2); s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 93-62; s. 291, ch. 95-147.
'Note.yRedesignated as "Periodicals" by the United States Postal Service, 5ee61 F.R. 10123-10124, March 12, 1996.
Nate.-Former s. 49.05.
50.061 Amounts chargeable.Y
(1) The publisher of any newspaper publishing any and all official public notices or legal advertisements shall charge therefore the rates
specified in this section without rebate, commission or refund.
(2) The charge for publishing each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 70 cents per square inch for the first
insertion and 40 cents per square inch for each subsequent insertion, except that:
(a) In all counties having a population of more than 304,000 according to the latest official decennial census, the charge for publishing
each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 80 cents per square inch for the first insertion and 60 cents per square inch for
each subsequent insertion.
(b) In all counties having a population of more than 450,000 according to the latest official decennial census, the charge for publishing
each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 95 cents per square inch for the first insertion and 75 cents per square inch for
each subsequent insertion.
(3) Where the regular established minimum commercial rate per square inch of the newspaper publishing such official public notices or
legal advertisements is in excess of the rate herein stipulated, said minimum commercial rate per square inch may be charged for all such
legal advertisements or official public notices for each insertion, except that a governmental agency publishing an official public notice or legal
advertisement may procure publication by soliciting and accepting written bids from newspapers published in the county, in which case the
specified charges in this section do not apply.
(4) All official public notices and legal advertisements shall be charged and paid for on the basis of 6-point type on 6-point body, unless
otherwise specified by statute.
(5) Any person violating a provision of this section, either by allowing or accepting any rebate, commission, or refund, commits a
misdemeanor of the second degree, punishable as provided in s. 775.082 or s. 775.083.
(6) Failure to charge the rates prescribed by this section shall in no way affect the validity of any official public notice or legal
advertisement and shall not subject same to legal attack upon such grounds.
History.-s. 3, ch. 3022,1877; RS 1298; GS 1729; RGS 2944; s. 1, ch. 12215,1927; CGL 4668; ss. 1, 2, 2A, 2B, ch. 20264, 1941; s. 1,
ch. 23663,1947; s. 1, ch. 57-160; s. 1, ch. 63-50; s. 1, ch. 65-569; s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 15, ch. 71-136; s. 35, ch. 73-332; s. 1, ch. 90-279.
Note.YFormer s. 49.06.
50.071 Publication costs; court docket fund.#
(1) There is established in Broward, Dade, and Duval Counties a court docket fund for the purpose of paying the cost of the publication of
the fact of the filing of any civil case in the circuit court in those counties by their counties by their style and of the calendar relating to such
cases- A newspaper qualified under the terms of s. 50.011 shall be designated as the record newspaper for such publication by an order of a
majority of the judges in the judicial circuit in which the subject county is located and such order shall be filed and recorded with the clerk of
the circuit court for the subject county. The court docket fund shall. be funded by a service charge of $1 added to the filing fee for all civil
actions, suits, or proceedings filed in the circuit court of the subject county. The clerk of the circuit court shall maintain such funds separate
and apart, and the aforesaid fee shall not be diverted to any other fund or for any purpose other than that established herein. The clerk of the
circuit court shall dispense the fund to the designated record newspaper in the county on a quarterly basis. The designated record newspaper
may be changed at the end of any fiscal year of the county by a majority vote of the judges of the judicial circuit of the county so ordering 30
days prior to the end of the fiscal year, notice of which order shall be given to the previously designated record newspaper.
(2) The board of county commissioners or comparable or substituted authority of any county in which a court docket fund is not
specifically established in subsection (1) may, by local ordinance, create such a court docket fund on the same terms and conditions as
established in subsection (1).
(3) The publishers of any designated record newspapers receiving the court docket fund established in subsection (1) shall, without
charge, accept legal advertisement for the purpose of service of process by publication under s. 49.011 (4), (10), and (11) when such
publication is required of persons authorized to proceed as insolvent and poverty-stricken persons under s. 57.081.
History.-s. 1, ch. 75-206.
42.00-039 (Rev 11106)
1
1
1
11
1
1
STATEMENT OF COMPLETION AND REQUEST FOR
c TRANSFER TO OPERATION ENTITY
r
SOUTHWEST FLORIDA
o WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT
;ea+2379 BROAD STREET, BROOKSVILLE, FL 34604-6899
(352) 796-7211 OR FLORIDA WATS 1 (8091423-1476
Within 30 days after completion of construction of the surface water management system, the owner or
authorized agent must submit the original plus one copy of this form and two complete sets of certified as-built
drawings for the surface water management system structures and appurtenances. Upon receipt, this Statement
of Completion will be reviewed and the system may be inspected for compliance with the approved permit and as-
built drawings. The operation phase of this permit is effective when the Statement of Completion form is signed
by an authorized District representative.
1. SURFACE WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION:
Permit No.:
Project Name:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone:
2. 1 HEREBY CERTIFY THAT (please choose accurately and check only one box):
? A. At the time of final inspection, the surface water management system was completed substantially in
accordance with the permitted construction plans and information. Any minor deviations from the
permitting plans and specifications will not prevent the system from functioning in compliance with the
requirements of Chapters 40D-4 and 4013-40, Florida Administrative Code (F_A.C.). (The as-built
drawings and information submitted to the District shall confirm this certification.)
? B. At the time of final inspection, the system was NOT completed in substantial conformance with the
permitted construction plans and information. (The registered professional engineer shall describe
the deviation(s) in writing, and provide confirming depiction on the as-built drawings and information.)
This certification shall be verified by TWO COPIES of attached "as-built" drawings (as-built drawings must be
signed, dated and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer or Professional Land Surveyor and
Mapper, as required by State Law).
1 By:
Signature of Engineer of Record Name (please type) Fla. P.E. Reg. No.
Date:
Company Name
County:
Permittee:
*AFFIX SEAL &
mm/dd/yyyy
Phone: ( )
' FORM 547.27/SOC (Rev. 02/07)
Rule 40D-1.659, F.A.C.
Company Address
City, State, Zip
Page 1 of 3
3. NOTIFICATION OF COMPLETION: The District is hereby notified that construction of the surface water
management system is completed, and the Permittee requests that the surface water management permit be
transferred to the legal entity (individual owner or corporate) responsible for operation and maintenance
(O&M) as named in Section 4. An authorized agent must submit a letter of authorization from the permittee
authorizing him or her to execute this Notification.
By:
Signature of Permittee or Authorized Agent Name and Title (please type)
Permit Number Company Name
Company Address
City, State, Zip
4. AGREEMENT FOR SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITY: The below-named
legal entity responsible for O&M agrees to operate and maintain the surface water management system in
compliance with all permit conditions and the provisions of Chapters 40D-4 and 40D-40, F.A.C. An
authorized agent must submit a letter of authorization from the owner or other legal entity authorizing him or
her to execute this agreement.
By:
Signature of Representative of Acceptable Name of Owner or Other Acceptable
O&M Entity or Authorized Agent Legal Entity for O&M
Name and Title (please type) Address
Permit Number City, State, Zip
Phone Date
RESPONSIBILITY FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER ENTITY ONLY
UPON WRITTEN NOTICE AND APPROVAL BY THE DISTRICT IN ACCORDANCE WITH RULE 40D-4.351, F.A.C.
AGENCY USE ONLY
OPERATION AUTHORIZATION: Based upon the certification by the Engineer of Record in Section 2., and the notice of
completion in Section 3., the responsibility for operation and maintenance of the system is transferred to the legal entity
named in Section 4., and the operation phase of this permit is effective on the date indicated below.
SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT:
Authorized District Representative Name and Title
Effective Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Permit Number
FORM 547.27/SOC (Rev. 02/07)
Rule 40D-1.659, F.A.C_ Page 2 of 3
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION CHECKLIST
Following is a list of information that is to be verified and submitted by the Engineer of Record in support of the
Statement of Completion.
1 _ On behalf of the permittee, the Engineer shall certify that:
a. At the time of final inspection, the surface water management system was completed substantially in
accordance with the permitted construction plans and information. Any minor deviations from the permitting plans
and specifications will not prevent the system from functioning in compliance with the requirements of Chapters
4DD-4 and 40D-40, F.A.C. (The as-built drawings and information submitted to the District shall confirm this
' certification.); or
b. At the time of final inspection, the system was NOT completed in substantial conformance with the
permitted construction plans and information. (The registered professional engineer shall describe the
deviation(s) in writing, and provide confirming depiction on the as-built drawings and information.)
2. The Engineer's certification shall be based upon on-site observation of construction (scheduled and
conducted by the professional engineer of record or by a project representative under direct supervision) and
' review of as-built drawings, with field measurements and verification as needed, for the purpose of determining if
the work was completed in accordance with original permitted construction plans, information and specifications.
3. The as-built drawings are to be based on the District permitted construction drawings revised to reflect any
changes made during construction. Both the original design and constructed condition must be clearly shown.
The plans need to be clearly labeled as "as-built" or "record" drawings. As required by law, all surveyed
dimensions and elevations required shall be verified and signed, dated and sealed by a Florida registered
professional surveyor and mapper or professional engineer. The following information, at a minimum, shall be
' verified on the as-built drawings, and supplemental documents if needed:
a. Discharge structures - Locations, dimensions and elevations of all, including weirs, orifices, gates,
pumps, pipes, and oil and grease skimmers;
' b. Side bank and underdrain filters, or exfiltration trenches - locations, dimensions and elevations of all,
including clean-outs, pipes, connections to control structures and points of discharge to receiving waters;
c. Storage areas for treatment and attenuation - dimensions, elevations, contours or cross-sections of all,
sufficient to determine stage-storage relationships of the storage area and the permanent pool depth and volume
below the control elevation for normally wet systems;
' d. System grading - dimensions, elevations, contours, final grades or cross-sections to determine
contributing drainage areas, flow directions and conveyance of runoff to the system discharge point(s);
e. Conveyance - dimensions, elevations, contours, final grades or cross-sections of systems utilized to divert
off-site runoff around or through the new system;
f. Water levels - existing water elevation(s) and the date determined;
g. Benchmark(s) - location and description (minimum of one per major water control structure); and
h. Wetland mitigation or restoration areas - Show the plan view of all areas, depicting a spatial distribution of
' plantings conducted by zone (if plantings are required by permit), with a list showing all species planted in each
zone, numbers of each species, sizes, date(s) planted and identification of source of material; also provide the
dimensions, elevations, contours and representative cross-sections depicting the construction.
' 4. Submit the final subdivision plat or other legal documents, as recorded in the county public records, showing
dedicated rights-of-way, easement locations and special use areas that are reserved for water management
purposes and continuing operation and maintenance.
5. Additional information will be shown on the as-built drawings or otherwise provided as needed to verify and
support the Statement of Completion (example: home owners association final documents, and other items
required by permitting conditions.)
' FORM 547.27/SOC (Rev. 02/07)
Rule 40D-1.659, F.A.C. Page 3 of 3
1
1
1
1
1
PART II HEARINGS INVOLVING
DISPUTED ISSUES OF MATERIAL FACT
28-106.201 Initiation of Proceedings.
(1) Unless otherwise provided by statute, and except for
agency enforcement and disciplinary actions that shall be
initiated under Rule 28-106.2015, F.A.C., initiation of
proceedings shall be made by written petition to the agency
responsible for rendering final agency action. The term
"petition" includes any document that requests an evidentiary
proceeding and asserts the existence of a disputed issue of
material fact. Each petition shall be legible and on 8 1/2 by
11 inch white paper. Unless printed, the impression shall be
on one side of the paper only and lines shall be double-
spaced.
(2) All petitions filed under these rules shall contain:
(a) The name and address of each agency affected and
each agency's file or identification number, if known;
(b) The name, address, and telephone number of the
petitioner; the name, address, and telephone number of the
petitioner's representative, if any, which shall be the address
for service purposes during the course of the proceeding; and
an explanation of how the petitioner's substantial interests
will be affected by the agency determination;
(c) A statement of when and how the petitioner received
notice of the agency decision;
(d) A statement of all disputed issues of material fact. If
there are none, the petition must so indicate;
(e) A concise statement of the ultimate facts alleged,
including the specific facts the petitioner contends warrant
reversal or modification of the agency's proposed action;
(f) A statement of the specific rules or statutes the
petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the
agency's proposed action, including an explanation of how
the alleged facts relate to the specific rules or statutes; and
(g) A statement of the relief sought by the petitioner,
stating precisely the action petitioner wishes the agency to
take with respect to the agency's proposed action.
(3) Upon receipt of a petition involving disputed issues
of material fact, the agency shall grant or deny the petition,
and if granted shall, unless otherwise provided by law, refer
the matter to the Division of Administrative Hearings with a
request that an administrative law judge be assigned to
conduct the hearing. The request shall be accompanied by a
copy of the petition and a copy of the notice of agency action.
Specific Aurhoriry 110.54(3), (5) FS. Low Implemented 120.54(5),
110.569, 110.57 FS. Histon-New 4-1-97, Amended 9-17-98, 1-15-
07.
42.00-028 (6/10)
PART III PROCEEDINGS AND HEARINGS
NOT INVOLVING DISPUTED ISSUES OF
MATERIAL FACT
28-106.301 Initiation of Proceedings.
(1) Unless otherwise provided by statute and except for
agency enforcement and disciplinary actions initiated under
subsection 28-106.2015(1), F.A.C., initiation of a proceeding
shall be made by written petition to the agency responsible
for rendering final agency action. The term "petition"
includes any document which requests a proceeding. Each
petition shall be legible and on 8 1/2 by 11 inch white paper
or on a forum provided by the agency. Unless printed, the
impression shall be on one side of the paper only and lines
shall be doubled-spaced.
(2) All petitions filed under these rules shall contain:
(a) The name and address of each agency affected and
each agency's file or identification number, if known;
(b) The name, address, and telephone number of the
petitioner; the name, address, and telephone number of the
petitioner's representative, if any, which shall be the address
for service purposes during the course of the proceeding; and
an explanation of how the petitioner's substantial interests
will be affected by the agency determination;
(c) An explanation of how the petitioner's substantial
interests will be affected by the agency determination;
(d) A statement of when and how the petitioner received
notice of the agency decision;
(e) A concise statement of the ultimate facts alleged,
including the specific facts the petitioner contends warrant
reversal or modification of the agency's proposed action;
(f) A statement of the specific rules or statutes that the
petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the
agency's proposed action;
(g) A statement of the relief sought by the petitioner,
stating precisely the action petitioner wishes the agency to
take with respect to the agency's proposed action; and
(h) A statement that no material facts are in dispute.
Specylc Awhoriry 120.54(5) FS. Law Implemented 120.54(5),
120.569, 110.57 FS. History-New 4-1-97, Amended 9-17-98, 1-15-
07. 12-14-07.
QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
TO: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept./Construction Division
Attn: Alice Eckman, Construction Specialist
100 So. Myrtle Ave., Ste #220
Clearwater, Florida 33756 or
(PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL. 33758-4748)
DATE:
PURPOSE: To provide the City with reasonable assurance that the
prospective bidder on City of Clearwater formal construction
contracts has the financial assets, resources, work force, and work
experience to successfully complete contemplated construction
contract agreements with the City.
CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME:
BUSINESS ADDRESS:
CITY - STATE - ZIP CODE:
PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER:
E-MAIL ADDRESS :
TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:
(Individual, Corporation, Partnership, etc.)
LIST ALL PRINCIPALS OF ORGANIZATION:
(President, Vice-President, Secretary-Treasurer, Partner, etc.)
DATE ORGANIZATION BEGAN UNDER PRESENT NAME:
OTHER NAMES AND DATES UNDER WHICH ORGANIZATION EXISTED:
REFERENCES:
1
C
t
CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: '
INDIVIDUAL HOLDING LICENSE:
ISSUING AUTHORITY:
CLASSIFICATION OF LICENSE:
HAS YOUR FIRM EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE WORK AWARDED TO YOU? IF SO,
WHERE AND WHY?
NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE'S DIRECTLY ON APPLICANTS PAYROLL:
PRESENT VALUE OF AND GENERAL TYPE OF ALL CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONAL
EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY OWNED BY THE APPLICANT (INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MOST RECENT FINANCIAL STATEMENT & INCLUDE LONG TERM
LEASE/PURCHASE EQUIPMENT):
The pre-qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal
to the amount of the largest single construction project which has
been successfully completed by the Contractor. The pre-qualification
amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which
the Contractor is approved to perform work. This pre-qualification
amount may be adjusted as the Contractor may successfully complete
larger construction projects. The Contractor may exhibit where two
or more similar projects were substantially accomplished by the
Contractor at the same time where the aggregate amount of these
projects in excess of the largest single project accomplished. This
aggregate amount will be considered as the pre-qualification amount
up to an amount equal to 150 of the largest single project amount.
Pre-qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted
by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects.
LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR:
1. AMOUNT: $
2. DATE OF COMPLETION:
3. TYPE OF WORK:
4. OWNER/REREPRESENTATIVE:
Address:
Phone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
' ALTERNATE PRE-QUALIFICATION AMOUNT IS BASED ON THE AGGREGATE TOTAL
AMOUNT OF CONCURRENT PROJECTS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITH A MAXIMUM
AMOUNT OF 150% OF LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. LARGEST
AGGREGATE AMOUNT COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WHERE WORK WAS PERFORMED
AT THE SAME TIME:
$(Total aggregate amount determined from project list below)
PROJECT 1 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PROJECT 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[-I
PROJECT 3
AMOUNT: $
DATE OF START OF WORK:
DATE OF COMPLETION:
TYPE OF WORK:
OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:-
Telephone Number:
Address:
Email:
AMOUNT: $
DATE OF START OF WORK:
DATE OF COMPLETION:_
TYPE OF WORK:
OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_
Telephone Number:
Address:
Email
1. AMOUNT: $
2. DATE OF START OF WORK:
3. DATE OF COMPLETION:
4. TYPE OF WORK:
5. OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_
Telephone Number:
Address:
Email
THE FOLLOWING THREE ADDITIONAL ITEMS ARE TO ACCOMPANY THIS
APPLICATION:
1. A current Financial Statement for your company which will
be returned uncopied upon completion of review.
2. A list of major projects completed (each project is to
include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone/fax
number of project representative or owner w/email
address).
3. Three letters of reference are requested from owners your
company has performed work for. The reference letters
shall be on the owner's letterhead and contain the
following information:
A.) Location and type of work.
B.) Dollar volume with your company.
C.) Project owner's name, address & phone number.
D.) Surety Company involved, if any.
1 E.) Consulting Engineer or Architect, address and
phone/fax number.
F.) Start and completion dates.
Pre-qualification is limited to particular construction categories
or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully
3
Fax
Fax
Fax
completed construction projects or extensive work in the category
in conjunction with larger project work. Following are the general
categories of construction work which are available for contractor
pre-qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check those
categories for which your firm is seeking pre-qualification approval.
To receive approval in a particular construction category, your
application must contain documentation of successfully completed
work experience in that category. This documentation is to be
included in your firm's completed project list as described above.
In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has
sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct
payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved
construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work
force or insufficient resources will not be approved for
pre-qualification or will not receive pre-qualification in
particular work categories.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE RESURFACING .....................
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MODIFICATION................
COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS ..............................
COMMERCIAL SWIMMING POOLS ..........................
CONCRETE FLAT WORK (CURBS, WALKS, COURTS, ETC.)....
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES. . . . . . . .....
DEMOLITION .........................................
DESIGN BUILD . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
EXCAVATION/SITE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .
GUNITE RESTORATION .................................
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING. . . . . . . . . .
INDUSTRIAL PAINTING ................................
LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION ............................
MARINE CONSTRUCTION ................................
MARINE DREDGING ....................................
ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT CONSTRUCTION ...............
SANITARY PUMP STATIONS .............................
SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS ..........................
STORMWATER MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION .................
TENNIS COURTS ......................................
4
URBAN STREETSCAPE ................................
WASTEWATER & WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES............
WATER AND FORCE MAINS ..............................
' WELL CONSTRUCTION ..................................
1
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY
KNOWLEDGE.
FIRM:
BY:
(Please Type)
SIGNATURE:
TITLE:
Owner, President, etc.
DATE:
6
1
r CITY OF CLEARWATER FIRE HYDRANT 5-PECIF1CATIONS
r ACCEPTED MODELS. ONLY
No Fire hydrants other than those listed below are acceptable.
"NNEDY GUARDIAN 1481 D
MUELLER SUPER CENTURION 250
AVK NOSTALGIC 2780
AMERICAN DARLING &84-0
• All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
• Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and include the
following mWif cations. Must be UL / FM` listed,
• Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
• The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
' bottom with=, O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
• Hydrants - shall be of the traffic model breAksway type, with, the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2".above the .ground line.
r Breakaway bolts not allowed.
• Operating nut shall be of one piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
• A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup
and corrosion due to moislture.
• A thrust washer shall be supplied-between the operating nut and stem lock nut to
facilitate operation.
"
). pentagpn nut.
• Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1 /2
• Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant. 1/4 turn type. with O-ring seals yr threadeEl-
inta upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking &Vic:e.
' • The-main valve shall be QfE.PDM.ttolid rubber.
• The-seat smell be-of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with
0-rings- to seal the barrel frorft leakage of water in the shoe.
* The main Valve stern will be 304, or highcr grade stainless steel and made in two
sections with a breakable coupling.
• Hydrant shall have a 6" Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less access Lies.
• Hydrant shall have a 5-114" valve opening„ and shall be a left hand operation to open.
' • Hydrant shall be without drain's.
• Hydrant shall have (2) 2-1/2" hose nozzles and (1) 4-1/2" pumper nozzle. Threads
shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling. Thread
Specifications..
• Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow.paint.
r
NCHLAG .
M490G
Electromagnetic Gate Lock
Special Application Lock Solution
Overview
The Schlage M49OG Electromagnetic Gate Lock is a weather
resistant electromagnetic lock with 1500 lbs. of holding force,
designed for use on all types of sliding and swinging gates.
As a high security magnetic lock it can accommodate
misalignment problems while supplying superior
holding force.
A 1/2" compression connector is provided for installation of
1/2- EMT conduit, insuring protection of hook-up wiring from
weather and vandalism. Heavy duty plating resists corrosion of
mating surfaces providing a low maintenance locking device.
A modified Top Jamb mounting bracket allows a single M490G
to be mounted in a variety of positions. The M49OG Gate Lock
may be mounted to any gate frame or post. Special brackets may
be required to adapt the lock to a particular frame or post. It is
important that the lock is mounted so that the armature pulls
straight back from the magnet face.
The M490G can be field configured for either 12 or 24 VDC
operation. Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) and Gate Status Monitor
(DPS) are standard.
Features
1500 lbs. of direct holding force
Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) and
Gate Status Monitor (0135)
Field Selectable 12 or 24VDC operation
Built-in voltage spike suppressor
Electroless nickel plated finish
Universal mounting brackets
1/2" EMT compression fitting
Two foot wire leads
Weather resistant for exterior use
Accomodates gate misalignment
No moving parts -
low maintenance
STANDARD FEATURES
M49OG
Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the band between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether
the door is open or closed
• Universal Mounting Brackets, for swinging or
sliding gate applications
• Built in voltage spike suppression
• %" EMT compression fitting
• Special corrosion resistant plating
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
M4906 Electromagnetic Gate Lock Specifications
Specifications M490/M490G
Holding Force 1 Meets or exceeds BHMA standard
of 1500 lbs.
Input Voltage (Field Selectable) 12/24 VDC
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit) .65A @ 12 VDC
!
35A @ 24 VDC
Height 3"
Length j 11'
Width 1-3/4'
Weight (approximates) 14lbs.
Temperature 0•- 49° C (32-- 120° F)
Wire Gauge 114-22 AWG
Filler Plates
Electromagnetic Lock M4WG
Length 9'
Width x Height Plate No.
1-1,14- x 1%8 4961 F
1-1/4' 0/4' i 49G2F
1-114- x 3/B" 49G3 F
1-1 /4- x 1/2" 49G4F
1-1 /4' x 5/8" 1 4965 F
1-1 /4" x 3/4" 49G6F
3/4" x 1/2' 49G7F
3/4" x 5/8" 49G8F
Angle Brackets
Electromagnetic Lock M49OG
Length j 9-
Width x Height Bracket No.
1-XI- 49G1A
1-1/2-x 1- ; 49G2A
1-112' x 1-1 /2" 49G3A
1-112- x 2" i 49G4A
1-1 /2" x 2-112w 49GSA
g'onVingersoll Rand ,
Security Technologies
020101ngersoll Rand ES-6012 11/10 '
I
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRACT BOND .....................................................................................................................1
CONTRACT .................................................................................................................................. 5
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 8
PROPOSAL BOND ...................................................................................................................... 9
AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................................................10
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT .....................................•.......................................................11
PROPOSAL .................................................................................................................................12
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET .................................................................15
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ..................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
SectionV.doc Page i 9/27/2010
BOND NUMBER: 5108666
CONTRACT BOND
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF HILLSBOROUGH
KNOW ALL IMEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we ?CERTU'S BUILDERS, ENC. Contractor
and SURETEC INSURANCE CONIPANY (Surety) whose home address. is 952 ECHO LANE,
SUITE #454. HOUSTON, TEXAS 77024
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety are. held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (Hereinafter called the "owner") in the penal sum of: FIVE HUNDRED TWENTY-SIX
THOUSAND THREE HUNDRED SIXTY-THREE DOLLARS & TWENTYCENTS
($5266;363.20) TOTAL INCLUDES BASE BID W/CONTINGENCY & ALTERNATES 92 &
#3 W/CONTINGENCY for the payment. of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract,.
dated the 25th . day of may 2011 entered into between the Contractor and, the City
of Clearwater for.
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOMICONCESSIOaN BUILDING
07-0035-PR-D
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply mith the terms. and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and tabor, and his obligations thereunder;, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal., Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the..
Flans and Specifications therein. referred to and made a part thereof;, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said: Owner. against. and. from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill,. negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said. Contractor agents
or employees,, in the execution. or perfortnance of said contract;. including errors in the flans
furnished by the. Contractor, and further,. if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons suppI izig him; them or it, labor, material, and supplies used. directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub?Contractor; or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the. work provided for in said. Contract, this obligation shall be void, otllerMse, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the.
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on. account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in. all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
Page: t
CONTRACT BOND ?
' And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators, and assigns; jointly and severally. that they will ainply and Mly protect the said
Owner against and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments. which may be
.recovered against or -which the Owner may, be called upon to pay to any .person or corporation by
' reason.of any damages- arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair Or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the. same or the neglect. of the said Contractor or his agents or
servants or the improper performance of the said work by the (Contractor or his agents or servants, or
' the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as
aforesaid, or. otherwise.
' And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns,. jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the wrork,,
' embraced by said Contract.
' A.nd the said Surety; for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that.no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its.obligaticins on this bond, and it
' does hereby waive notice of my such change; extension of time, alterarioii_ or addition to the terrxas mf
the contract or to: the work or to the specifications.
' IN TESTIMONY'V HEREOF, -witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto 25th
this ......',•.?'f? `
day of May 2411 Aa,'•
.? a'>
CERTUS BUILDERS. MCC r
- ?
SHARON A. SUMNER "`
CONTRACTOR.. ? r?
' Notary Public - State of Florida •;My Comm. Expires Nov 8, 2013
aPr •* ^
ATTEST: Commission # DD 938936 j
By: ?? ) •_1 "? .
C-)---
' -l.L i. L-Q ?1 ...... .
SureTec Insurance Company
' SURETY
'FITNESS: Sy:
' CA-, ? } A dRNEY-IN-FACT
wkm!!!t!;
' COUNTERSIGNED:
`N`
Page 2
i
P«A #: 910037
SureTee Insurance Company
LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know A11 _Alen by These Presents, That SURETF- INSURANCE COMPANY' (the "Company'), a'corporation duly organized and: ::
existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and-having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these :presetns
make, constitute and appoint
Michael L. Van Huts
its true and lawful Attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge
and deliver any and>ali bonds; recagnizances, undertakings or: other:instruments or contracts of stuetvship toinehide waivers to the
conditions of contracts .:and:. consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed
.::
Three Million Dollars and no/100.
and to bind the Company thereby as, fully and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the Company and-duIy-attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the.Said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the .:...
premises. Said appointment shall continue in force until 9/30/11 and is made under. and by authority of the following
resolutions of the Board of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company::
Be it Resolved .that: the.President, any Vice-President, arty Assistant Vice President, my Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is
hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or rhore.suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in?Fact to represent and act for and on
behalf of the Company subject to th0.following provisions:
Attorney-in-Fact n ay be given full powc; and authorityfor and in the name of. and of behalf of :the Company, to execute: acknowledge and
deliver, any and allbonds, recogniiances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and- other donditiorial or obligatoryundertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or- Jertninating the Company's liability thereunder, -and any. Mich instruments=so executed by any such .:: .
.. ...
Attorney-in-Fact shall be bindingupon the Company as ifsigned bythe.President and sealed and effected by the Corporate secretary.
Be it Resolved, that the signature.of°anyauthorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed t?i arty pokver of attorney or
any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of aftomeyor certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimileseal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (AdopW.at a meeting held on ZO' of April:
1999.)
In FitnessWhereof, SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its.President, and its corporate seal
to be hereto affixed this 28th day of October, A.D. 2009.
SURETEC INS CE COMPANY::.
µM Lry
5 lBy
? t
? B J -K1 ..resident
State of Texas ss:
1
County of Harris
* .:..
On this 28b day of October, 2008 before me personally came 11:1 King, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn', did depose and say, that he resides .
CONTRACT
This CON-TRACT made and entered into this (P44 day of ZM h e. , 2011 by and between
the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
CERTUS BUILDERS, INC. of the City of TAMPA, County of HILLSBOROUGH and State of
FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors,.assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall. and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment f6r the.
following:
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING 07-0035-
PR-D FOR THE SUM OF FIVE HUNDRED TWENTY-SIX THOUSAND THREE
HUNDRED SIXTY-THREE DOLLARS & TWENTY CENTS ($526,363:20) TOTAL
INCLUDES BASE BID W/CONTINGENCY & ALTERNATES 42 & #3 W/CONTINGENCY.
In accordance with such proposal and. technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings; if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns, shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike mariner to the satisfaction of the. City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as.
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed b) the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HER)!:.BY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES.
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
Page 3
CONTRACT
(z)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion., color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising;, lay-oft' or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the. Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of 51,004.99 ner day for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per
dom. shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the. Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is
not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages' for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or.
sureti0 ul7011 such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the %vork the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such terra and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
Page 4
1
LJ
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By=
Wi iam B. Horne, II
City Manager
1 Countersigned:
By: A)a?
Frank Hibbard,
Mayor-Councilmember
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
L o 2 pv&Art o---J
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
' for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
Of THE
Attest: E?
Z;
Rosemarie l
City C
to
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Attorney
C_LG/Li CJS vet-4) i1S
(Contractor)
BY: ..r?E sfib4
B la 4SFAi3•
L?a ?,v
Post 3
u
1
I !QQNTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
CORPORATION FORM)
' STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF HILLSBOROUGH
' On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
' That he is the (TITLE) of CERTUS BUILDERS
1NC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 101 S. WESTLAND
' AVENUE, TAMPA, FLORIDA 33681 (herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
' 20, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as
Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of
' JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROONWONCESSION BUILDING
07-0035-PR-D
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and mategial men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (FinuI Full Ankount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
' That the Owner is hereby released ffom any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me CERTUS BUILDERS, INC.
AFFIANT
This day of _ .29
_.
BY:
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT
1 Page 6
i
J
L-I
J
1
1
1
1
EMM"NOR
(Mat to be filled out if a a wtitSed check is snbminred)
KNOWN ALL MIEN IW THM PRESUM: That we, the wrdersigped,
Cerhm Builders, Inc. as Prindpal. and SureTec Insurance Company
as Surety, who's address is 952 Echo Lane Ste 450
Houston, TX 77024 am held and fim,ly bound u w
the City of Clash. Fkxida. in the swn of Ten Percent
Dollars ($ 10% ) (bft a rtlitrltnwn of 10% of C atracwde"s total bid arrlount) for h psylnerlt
of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourseives, our heirs,
executors, adm nisttoom stlocemofs and aasigrw.
The oonditioo of the above oblignim is such that if the attached Proposal of Certus Builders, Inc.
„_ as PAwipal, and SureTec insurance Co as
Surety, for work spedied as: Constmebon of .lee Dftg1o Sports Complex Restraom / Concession
Building
all as stiptrWW in sold Pwpvml, by doing all work incidwal thereto, in accordance with the plans and
Wmfcarr m prvvidad heir, all within Pmelles Coady, is aeo"ad and the contract awrarded to the
above neater bidder, and the said bidder shall witlpn tent days sties notice of said awed enter ido s
contract, in WaIA g, and fiunish the m*med Peefnrmum Hord with surety of muea to be approved
by the City Mm*IW, tits obligation shall be void, othts<wise the serve shall be in fill fofce and vulm
by law and the hill mount of this Proposal Hand frill be paid tea thus City as stipulated of liquidated
dmnages.
Signed this 20th day of Aril 2011 .
P A y
?
or individual)
The person signing shall, in his own
bandwfift sign the Principal's
name, his own mm and his title;
the person s for a corporation
musk by a ?it, show his authority
to bind tine oorpacatiom
hincipal
Title
SureTec Insurance Compeny
surely
By: ? l
Att ey-in-Fact
Ser+lfo VAM
t'W 7 of 14 W77*010
i]
1
[1
POA #: 910037
SureTec Insurance Company
LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know All Men by These Present, That SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company'), a corporation duly organized and
existing under the laws of the State of Texas, attd having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents
make, constitute and appoint
Michael L. Van Huis
its true and lawful Attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge
and deliver any and all bonds. recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include waivers to the
conditions of contracts and consents of surety. providing the bond penalty does not exceed
Three Million Dollars and no/100 ($3,000,000.00)
and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the Corporate
seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the
premises. Said appointment shall continue in force until 9/30.11 and is made under and by authority of the following
resolutions of the Hoard of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company:
Be it Remifurd that the President, eery Vice-President. any Assistant Vice-President. any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary small be and is
hereby vested with &II power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable parsons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to
behalf of the rr:pt?esertl and act for and on
Company subject to the following provisions;
Attome},6in-Fact may be given full power and authority, for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and
deliver. arty and all bonds, tecogftizances, contracts, agreements or Indenu ty and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability dwewxter, and any such instruments so executed by any such
Attornay-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Comperty as if signed by the president and seated and effected by the Corporate Secretary.
Be It Resolved, that the signatory of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or
any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seat shall be valid
and binding upon the Company with respect to any bend or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted at a mewing held on 20'* of April.
1999.)
In Witness Wheneaf, SURL7"1 C INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its President, and its corporate seal
to be hereto affixed this 28th day of October. A.D. 2008.
SURETEC INS CE COMPANY
Kl opt
State of Texas ss: '
County of Harris
On this 28h day of October, 2008 before me personally carte B.J. King, to me known. who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides
in Houston, Texas. that he is President of SURMW INSURANCE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the above inanwmnt;
that he knows the seat of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of
Directors of said Compmv; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
----------------------
M ?Ft?
aftatibm
'WOW ttaptnstllgaa 1VW.2M ?^??e3r?1?1/?? _
Mkhelle Denny, Notary P i
My commission expires August 27, 2012
I. M. Btnnt Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy
of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Company, which is still in N11 force and effect; and fiutbermore, the resolutions of the Board of Directors, set
out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effom
Given under my hand and the seal of said Company at Houston, Texas this W rq day of t L , 20_? 1, A.D.
M. Brent sty, at Secretary
Any Instrument Issued In excess of tote penalty shhel alcove is lately void and without arty valldlty.
For verification of the authority, of this rower you may salt (713) !12-011011 any bualness day between 8:00 am and 5:80 pm CST.
1
AUIDAVIJ
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF _ NILLSBOROUgH )
Sharon Sumner being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
Secretary of Certus Builders, Inc.
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
304 S. Westland Avenue„ Tampa Hillsborough FL_
' Street & Number City -County State
Affiiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
' Certus Builders, Inc.
(Name of Corporation)
' Afjtiant further says that David Strawter is President
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Joe Maggio Sports Complex Restroom/Concession
for said corporation by virtue of the company b laws Section 4.
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of
Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption).
Affant
' Sworn to before me this day of r 201L_.
t
1
' SeaianV.doc
ML SA IAINJpMin
mw" Pa -c • 91 d rwft
W Comm L xa+w tM K >M
C?slOn I 0 M1?/
Page 9 of 14 9127,12010
". A
No Public
Type/print/stampnarne of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No, if any
1
1
1
11
11
1
STATE OF I'LORIDA
NQN-COLLUSJQN AFFIDAVIT
COUNTY OF HILLSBOROUGH )
David Strawter being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
President
of _ Certus Builders, Inc. ,
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham:
that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other
bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly
or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain
from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage, against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the. proposed
contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that sueb bidder
has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged infonnation or data
relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
J?2?sl_j_
Afflant
40% Sworn to and subscribed before me this ? ? day of r t Q .20-j 1 .
1 SeclionVA"
Imaly Fuwrc 51711 0; u;
My temm. Woos Mc 26, 201:
Ca?YMIe? I DD 1140M
Page 9 of 14
-
Notary PNAW)
M ?i
ai'wryD
Drat
Irf
• 00 01?
9/27/2010
05AL
PROP
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSJON BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
JOE DIMAGGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 074035-PR-D
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract
without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder
is hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such
investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and
agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form
of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or
apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General
Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
SectionV.doc Page 10 of 14 9/27/2010
1
[7
1
FRQ
(2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
became the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned. as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on SureTec
Bank, for the sum of 10% of proposal
(being, a minimum of 1 We of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's
improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether subcontractor, materialman,
agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
David Strawter 12512 Lake Vista Drive, Gibsonton, FL 33534
Sharon Sumner 7408 S. Desoto Street, Tampa, FL 33616
Signature of Bidder: -L _ .
David Strawter, President - Corporation
(The bidder must indicate whether CorpourWon, Partnership, Company or Individual).
S clonV_doc Page I I of 14 W27/2010
1
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principals
By: Title: 30fl j ? T
Business Address of Bidder: 304 S. Westland Avenue
City and State: Tama FL ___ Zip Code 6
Dated at 304 S. Westland Ave, this 20th day of April A.D., 2011 .
I SOW"V.doc Pop 12 of 14
9rz7rzolo
= OF CLE,ARWA'TE
ADDEIVDUM SHEET
PROJECT: JOE DD"GGIO SPORTS COMPLEX RESTROOM/CONCESSION BUILDING
PROJECT NO.: 07435-PR-D
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the fallowing addenda received since issuance of flans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. 1 Date: 3/23/2011
Addendum; No. 2 Def. 414/2011
Addendum No. 3 Date: 417/2011
Addendum No. 4 Date: 4111/2011
Addendum No. 5 Date: 411412011
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Certus Builders, Inc.
(Name of Bidder)
S? c ..?-
(Signature of Officer)
Pgt. s ? nr-r
(Title of Officer)
-/12.61
d)ate)
SecdomV.doc Page 13 of 14 9/27/2010
u
L?LTi _ ? r i!r_
PROJECT: . DI 5 TS ) P . t R STR / , 1V[' . 'SI N LLDIN (; %.35- -D
BID ITE,AIS - ADDENMUM NO 2 -.1t412ol 1
f
i
1
d
i
I
1 `
1
?4
1
Architectural (Base aid)
Construction of the Joe DiMaggio Sports Complex - _
Restroom Concession Building 4,300 sq, ft.. Project No
07-0035-PR-D. single story masonry building; all
associated items required per architectural(Fowler
Assoc. Architect's) & site civi drawings (Deuel & Assoc.
Engineers)-(CS-1,1 of 3, 2 o' 3 3 of 3. A-1.1, A1.2, A-
1.3. A2.1, A-2.2. A-3 1, S-1.0, S-1.1, S-1 7 E-1 0. E-11
C-1.2. M-' uN to fire feet autsir a urip Ill. of tt'iG
building's roof canopy line (unless otherwise noted),
include storm drain system and miter and sections and
ice machine piping even if it :s outside the roof canopy
drip line; the technical specifications, miscellaneous
items and all other items not included in bill of quantities
bid items listed below in providing a complete
o rational building
Landfill Gas Mitigation SysternMu ing Protection Plan -
drawing and technical specifications developed by
Geosyntec Consultants; drawing sheets (1 of 4, 2 of 4. 3
of 4 & 4 of 4); specifications sections 02720. 02740, I's
02770 and Permanent Gas Monitoring Sensors - Sierra,
Gas Monitors and all miscellaneous items in providing a
complete operable landtill.gas mi ' aborts stem
Alternates (Base Bid) -
t?rvrr 7O'r:A.
UNIT QTl'. PltlCl:
25.106.51 ? S 25.108.51
Site Civil - includes all associated work five feet outside
the drip lino: of the building roof line (unless otherwise
noted) including tie in of utilities of line item 1 & 2 above
according to drawings by Dauel Assoc, Engineers (1 of
3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) & Fowler Assoc. Architect (E-1.0 Riser
Diagram Detail) the technical specifications and all other
items not included in the bill of quantities bid items listed
above of a complete operable site civil infrastructure
system. The intent is to include all work associated on
the drawings listed and if not specifically of items on the
drawing the bidder shall include all work cost on the
drawings & specifications shall be include In Nne items.
Coordinate with Owner irrigation contractor for relocation
of irrigation controller/control wires/irrigation mainline
and cap of abandoned lateral zones. The Owner may
select not on of se!f performing the site civil work but the
intent is to incorporate this work in this contract with the
general contactor awarded the project
Clearing & Grubbing, Silt Fencing placement & removal;
Tree Barricades placement & removal; Tree Removal &
Demolition _
Site grading cut and fill including roughtfne grading
additional soil required for X-Section 'A•A' 580 Cu. Yd..
restore & reconstruct retention north pond bank &
regrading as required. protect existing cleanouts; site
restoration at completion of construction; provide 417
Bermuda and Bahia sodding initial watering during
installation and roll as necessary of all disturbed areas
within and outside limits of work
L.5
I.S
1:4,756,73 1 $ 4,756.73
M
313.260.39' a 313,250.39
.11 24.589.87 1 S 24,599.97
1
BID ITEMS - ADDENDL'*1 NO 2 - 4/4/2011 F ST, t.AIT TOTAL
_ UNIT QTl'. ? PRICE
Construct weir structure and all storm waterworks 1.5 I K 11,e63.83 ? 11,883.93
Site electrical includes: riser diagram detail as shown on
E-1.0; all electrical conduits: electrical, telephone. data.
' cable television; wiring conductors and appropriate
?t T gauge size; function boxes as required even if not shown
6 on drawing; all conduits shall be taken directly to the ; LS i 28.078.87 3 23.079.97
electricallmechanieal room and to the required locations
' beneath the panel board coordinate with building general
contractor's electrical sub-contractor and provide a
complete operable electricals stem
' Al T Sanitary sewer system includes all work associated on
drawing inrltirling grease trap and misc iter"s to prnvid? 12.987.96 12,997.99
i
a complete operable system
j provide a complete operable water systems for 1.5-inch tT?
lL I ' domestic potable. 9-inch fire line wJ fire hydrants I.S l 33,065.02 S 33.055.02
9 including blow off; provide two bollard at blow off (not
shown on drawing) see detail
Concrete slab medium broom finished east/west
directions; B" thick 3,000 PSM days include
Al 'r commercial fiber mesh; provide expansion joints
y bituminous full depth adjacent to all horizontal or vertical LS I 4.776.97 S 4,775.87
hard edges, 40 feet on center saw cut 10 foot on center
' minimum 2-inch depth within 24 hours of pour, provide 5 i
_ mill vapor barrier beneath concrete slab
Construct 18-inch deep x 2 foot wide gravel trench:
?I. I includes 1-inch diameter wash river gravel, geotlech r w; I'S 1,125.65 R 1,125.85
' 10 fabric per cross section details total width of concrete
slab distance based on south concrete slab width
(Base Bid)
I .......................
I St IRF T Y I I L RF1-1 ENIS OR ICkBON11 --LS I ? ?.?Q00.o?
. _ .._.............
.. .............
13 100•o CO\ 1 INUENL'Y OF LINE: 13 LS 1 8 $ 46,441.20
_...
-- --.........
I'() 1-:\I. ( ()Ns INI It' Ill)IS' 01S' I S i l 1'1,NIs 1-I1 1NL'I 1 1)114I ???
C't1N I INGENCY1 S $ `6??
_...._._._..,_. _._._._.?
'.lr le q,s?.71.a ??.
CONTRACTOR: certus_Builder_s, Ine-
BIDDERS TOTAL $_ (Numbiors)
' BIDDER'STOTAL S-
I r f H ? - T? q` T T ..... w ? i.,N,,
_ _
?? _?1S ?'1?11? 4 i?,
° /1040-
IC) •„ c:ciritingency shall be utilized -ni upor writt u t by the contractor for additicna scope of woik. -ot included ;n
the bill of quantities to the Owner, written approval by the Owner for the additional stops of work. ,n the utilization of the
10% contingency, any funds not utilized shall be returned to the owner upon close out of the purchase order short.
' THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LAMP SUM PRICES AND THE
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING
BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE HIM IF THERE
IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMI'
SLIM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELE:CI- ANY ALTERNATE ITEMS AND OR
REJECT ALL BIDS' THE TOTAL PRICE SHALL BE BASED ON ITEMS SELECTED BY 'THE. OWNER TO CONSTRUCT
THIS PROJECT.
1
PROJECT I A
SPORTS (N 1 ri 413 07 3_A-PR-D
G. 12 CgXEM.U5jBQQNL ,
i BID ITEMSADDFNDUM [Y0.3 114/11 UNIT Tl'. t'RICF, 1(>TA1.'
' Add Alternates (Add Alternate)
Adki aItcrnatc itcros arc items the owner is considering
adding to the base bid contruet of items 1-13 atx>ae the
CirN ma• sek t an. add alternates to be added to the
' base bid a lamp stun.
Provide and install in lieu of seal floors Armstrong VCT _ W
tiles in Meeting Room Office, Storage # 'I & Storage #
2; include striping of factory finish, apply 3 coats of wax, ` i,sa7.oo 1• 1.887.04
i ! polish/buff each coat prior to final handover to the Owner
Add
Provide Silikal flooring & 4-inch cove base in lieu of S ' _
-
' -All
?p L5 i !
epoxy sealer polished floor in Meeting Room and Office 9,300.00 e
300
S
00
AJd Provide Silikal flooring & 4-inch cove base in lieu of Y
n
...
nl'. epoxy sealer polished floor in Storage Room 1 & 2 t.S I S 4,800.00 x a;aoo.oo
d Sl
Pl-T(3'I'Al
At)[) ALThRNa I'kIT'
S 1
3
16
067
00
.
.
v
- ,
,
5 10'" CONTINGENCY LING d Is I 1.606.70
TOTAL
l. I EANA E LINES (1-5 INC'I.l I*S IIP,, 7
- - --- S' 17
I1
T
1 .-._._....._.? _ __.....-_ .6
3.7
..__.